Sie sind auf Seite 1von 176

SERVICE MANUAL

CODE: 00ZAR203E/S2E

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM/DIGITAL COPIER

py

.c

om

AR-203E
AR-203E X
AR-M200
AR-M201
AR-5420

MODEL

co

(The descriptions of the AR-203E X are same as


those of the AR-203E unless otherwise specified.)

hr
an

CONTENTS

[1] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1

.te

[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1


[6] COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1

[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1


[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1

[9] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
[10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1

[11] MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
[12] USER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
[14] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1

Parts marked with are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

SHARP CORPORATION

This document has been published to be used


for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.

CAUTION

This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040 of the CDRH standard and
IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls,
adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved
on the eyes retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina.

om

The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time of
servicing.
1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as a
unit, not as individual parts.

.c

2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, toner
cartridge, and drum cartridge.

4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch.

py

3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected
when removing and installing the optical system.

co

Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot.

CAUTION

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION,

hr
an

WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.


AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.

VORSICHT

UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG,
WENN ABDECKUNG GEFFNET UND
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG BERBRCKT.
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.

.te

LASER WAVE LENGTH : 770 ~ 795nm


Pulse times : 12.88s 12.88ns/7mm
Out put power : MAX 0.2mW

VARO !
AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS
OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA
NKYMTTMLLE LASERSTEILYLLE L
KATSO STEESEEN.

ADVARSEL
USYNLIG LASERSTRLNING VED BNING, NR
SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF
FUNKTION. UNDG UDSAETTELSE FOR
STRLNING.

VARNING !
OSYNLIG LASERSTRLNING NR DENNA DEL
R PPNAD OCH SPRREN R URKOPPLAD.
BETRAKTA EJ STRLEN. STRLEN R
FARLIG.

Caution
This product contains a low power laser
device. To ensure continued safety do not
remove any cover or attempt to gain access
to the inside of the product. Refer all
servicing to qualified personnel.

VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KYTTMINEN MUULLA


KUIN TSS KYTTOHJEESSA MAINITULLA
TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KYTTJN
TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTVLLE
NKYMTTMLLE LASERSTEILYLLE.

VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVNDS P ANNAT


STT N I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING
SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVNDAREN UTSTTAS
FR OSYNLIG LASERSTRLNING, SOM
VERSKRIDER GRNSEN FR LASERKLASS 1.

.te

hr
an

co

py

.c

om

At the production line, the output power


of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.18
MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and is
maintained constant by the operation of
the Automatic Power Control (APC).
Even if the APC circuit fails in operation
for some reason, the maximum output
power will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1
MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessible
emission level of 42 MICRO-WATT
which is still-less than the limit of
CLASS-1 laser product.

The foregoing is applicable only to the 220V


model, 230V model and 240V model.

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

CONTENTS
[1]
[2]

[3]

[7]

GENERAL

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS

1. Major functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1. Outline of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

SPECIFICATIONS

2. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

1. Basic Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

2. Operation specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

B. Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

3. Copy performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

C. Drive system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

4. GDI printer (AR-203E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

3. Laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

5. SPLC printer (AR-M200/M201). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

A. Basic structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

6. Scan function (AR-203E/M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

B. Laser beam path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3


C. Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

CONSUMABLE PARTS

4. Fuser section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

om

A. General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

A. Europe Subsidiary (AR-203E/5420/M200/M201),


SCA/SCNZ (AR-203E/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

5. Paper feed section and paper transport section . . . . . . 7-4

B. Asia Subsidiary (AR-203E/M201). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

A. Paper transport path and general operations . . . . . . 7-4

C. SMEF/Distributor (AR-203E/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

6. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/


document transport (Duplex model)
(AR-M201 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

D. SRH (AR-203E/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

.c

2. Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

A. Initial state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

3. Production control number (lot No.) identification . . . . . 3-2

B. Front copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

4. Toner cartridge replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3


EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

C. Back copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

py

[4]

7. Shifter (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

1. Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
2. Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
3. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

1. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

co

A. AR-203E/5420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

[8]

B. Drum replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

B. AR-M200/M201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

C. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

4. Motors and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

D. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

5. Sensors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

hr
an

6. PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

7. Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8


UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

2. Cautions on handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

3. Checking packed components and accessories. . . . . . 5-1

3. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

4. Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

5. Removing protective packing materials . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5


C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

7. Toner cartridge installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

4. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

8. Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

9. Power to copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

6. Developer unit installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

A. Before installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

5. Tray paper feed/transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

B. Installing the software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

C. Setting up Button Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

10. Software (AR-203E/M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

11. Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

A. USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

6. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

12. Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

13. Scanner moisture-proof kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

A. Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

w
[6]

F. Charger wire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

2. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

1. Copier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

.te

[5]

E. Charger wire cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

B. Precautions at installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

D. Pressure plate holder attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

C. Attachment method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

7. Rear frame section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

COPY PROCESS

A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

1. Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

2. Outline of print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

3. Actual print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION

A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

A. Overall block diagram (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . 13-1

C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

B. Overall block diagram (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . 13-2

9. DV unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

2. Actual wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

A. Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

B. DV seal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

C. DV blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

C. SPF unit (AR-203E optional only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

D. DV doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

D. RSPF unit (AR-M200/M201 optional only) . . . . . . . 13-5

E. DV sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

E. 2nd cassette unit


(AR-203E/M200/M201 optional only) . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

10. Duplex motor section (AR-M201 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

F. Network box and FAX


(AR-M200/M201 optional only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
11. Reverse roller section (AR-M201 only). . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

3. Signal name list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

om

C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

4. Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9


A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

C. OPE PWB (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37

C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22

D. OPERATION PWB (AR-M200/M201). . . . . . . . . . 13-38

1. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1


A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
B. Image position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
2. Copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
A. Copy density adjustment timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
B. Note for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

[14] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES


1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures) . . . . 14-1
2. Download procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
3. Version acquisition procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
5. Installing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

co

C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . 9-4

.c

ADJUSTMENTS

py

[9]

D. Features of copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

E. Copy density adjustment procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

3. High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

hr
an

A. Main charger (Grid bias). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

B. DV bias check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6


4. Duplex adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory


for duplex copying (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode


(AR-M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
5. Automatic black level correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

.te

[10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES

1. Entering the simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1


2. Key rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
3. List of simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

4. Descriptions of various simulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3


5. Trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
A. Trouble codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

B. Details of trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

[11] MAINTENANCE

1. Maintenance table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1


2. Maintenance display system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
3. Remaining toner indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

[12] USER PROGRAM


1. Functions that can be set with user programs . . . . . . 12-1
2. Toner save mode (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
3. User programs (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
4. User programs (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
A. Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
B. Print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

[1] GENERAL
1. Major functions
Configurations
Item

CPM
(A4)

PPM
(A4)

Model
AR-203E 20CPM 15PPM

SB/
MB
MB

2 Tray SPF R-SPF


Opt

Color
GDI SPLC
EDuplex Shifter
Scanner printer printer SORT

Opt

AR-5420 20CPM
AR-M200 20CPM 20PPM

MB
MB

Opt

Opt

AR-M201 20CPM 20PPM

MB

Opt

Opt

USB

(2.0 full)

RJ45

FAX

External
NIC

Opt

Opt

Opt

Opt

(2.0 Hi)

om

(2.0 Hi)

Print speed (Print Per Minute)

SB/MB:

SB = Manual feed single bypass,


MB = Manual feed multi-bypass

2 Tray:

Second cassette unit (AR-D33)

SPF:

Original feed unit (AR-SP9)

R-SPF:

Duplex original feed unit (AR-RP9)

Color Scanner:

Color scanner function

GDI printer:

GDI printer function with USB.

SPLC printer:

SPLC printer function with USB.

E-SORT:

Electronic sort function

Duplex:

Auto duplex copy/print function

Shifter:

Job separator function


Interface port (USB)

RJ45:

Interface port (Network)

FAX:

FAX function (AR-FX13)

External NIC:

AR-NB2A

Descriptions of table
:

Standard provision

No function or no option available

(Options)

AR-RP9

AR-D33

AR-SP9

AR-NB2A

.te

Opt: Option

AR-203E/AR-5420
AR-M200/AR-M201

hr
an

USB:

py

Copy speed (Copies Per Minute)

PPM:

co

CPM:

.c

Descriptions of items

AR-FX13

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 GENERAL 1 - 1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic Specifications
Item
Type
Copy system
Segment (class)
Copier dimensions

Desktop
Dry, electrostatic
Digital personal copier
AR-203E/5420: 518mm (W) x 445mm (D) x 298mm (H) (20-1/2" (W) x 17-5/8" (D) x 11-3/4" (H))
AR-M200/M201: 518mm (W) x 452mm (D) x 298mm (H) (20-1/2" (W) x 17-7/8" (D) x 11-3/4" (H))
AR-203E/5420: 16.6kg (36.5 lbs.) Toner cartridge not included
AR-M200: 19.8kg (43.7 lbs.)
AR-M201: 20.5kg (45.2 lbs.)

Weight (Approximately)

Tray paper feed section

Remark
Paper size
Paper weight
Paper feed capacity
Kinds
Remark
Paper size

hr
an

Inch
system

Paper size
Paper weight
Paper feed capacity
Kinds
Remark
Paper size
Paper weight
Paper feed capacity
Kinds

Multi-bypass paper
feed section

Paper weight
Paper feed capacity
Kinds
Remark

Scanning
section

Optical
section

Originals

Exit way
Capacity of output tray
Original set
Max. original size
Original kinds
Original size detection
Scanning system
CCD sensor
Lighting lamp

.te

Paper exit section

Writing
section

Image forming

Resolution
Type
Voltage
Power consumption

Output data
Writing system
Laser unit
Photoconductor
Charger

Developing
Cleaning

1 tray (250 sheets) + multi-bypass (50 sheets)


A4, B5, A5 (Landscape)
56 - 80g/m2
250 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
User adjustment of paper guide available
A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 (Landscape)
56 - 128g/m2
50 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP,
Label, Envelop (Single copy)
User adjustment of paper guide available
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape)
15 - 21 lbs.
250 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
User adjustment of paper guide available
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2", 3-1/2" x 5-1/2"
(Landscape)
15 - 34.5 lbs.
50 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP,
Label, Envelop (Single copy)
User adjustment of paper guide available
Face down
200 sheets
Center Registration (left edge)
A4 (8-1/2" x 14")
sheet, book
None
3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp
600 dpi
CCFL
560Vrms
2.8W
Output: R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / Input: A/D 16 bits (12 bits
actual)
Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser
600 dpi
OPC (30)
25K
Saw-tooth charging with a grid, / (-) scorotron discharge
(+) DC corotron system
(-) DC corotron system
Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system
Counter blade system (Counter to rotation)

.c

Multi-bypass paper
feed section

Details

py

Section, item
Paper feed system
AB system Tray paper feed section

co

Paper feed
section

om

2. Operation specifications

Resolution
Type
Life
Charging system
Transfer system
Separation system
Developing system
Cleaning system

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1

Section, item
Fusing system
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Heater lamp

Electrical section

Details

Power source
Power consumption

Type
Type
Type
Voltage
Power consumption
Voltage
Frequency
Max.
Average (during copying)
Average (stand-by)
Pre-heat mode
Auto power shut-off mode

Heat roller system


Teflon roller
Silicon rubber roller
Halogen lamp
220 - 240V / 120V
800W
220 - 240V / 120V
Common use for 50 and 60Hz
Less than 1000W
AR-203E/5420: 350Wh/H or less
AR-M200/ M201: 380Wh/H or less
80Wh/H
AR-203E/5420: 25Wh/H or less
AR-M200/ M201: 28Wh/H or less
AR-203E/5420: 8.8W or less
AR-M200/ M201: 12.5W or less

om

Fusing section

3. Copy performance
Details

.c

Section, item
Copy magnification
Fixed
magnification
ratios

co

py

AR-203E/5420:
3 Reduction + 2 Enlargement
(AB system: 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200%)
(Inch system: 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200%)
AR-M200/M201: *1
4 Reduction + 3 Enlargement
(AB system: 25, 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200, 400%)
(Inch system: 25, 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200, 400%)
25 - 400% (376 steps in 1% increments)
50 - 200% when using SPF (151 steps in 1% increments)

Zooming
magnification
ratios
First-copy time *2
(Approximately)

Copy speed
(CPM)

AB system
B5 (Landscape)

Copy speed
(CPM)

Inch system
8-1/2" x 11"
(Landscape)

Copy speed
(CPM)

Same size
Enlargement
Reduction
Same size
Enlargement
Reduction
Same size
Enlargement
Reduction

.te

AB system
A4 (Landscape)

Void area

Max. continuous copy quantity


Void

Warm-up time
Power save mode reset time
Paper jam recovery time

5 steps
AR-203E/5420:
8.0 seconds (When user program 24 is set to OFF)
10.7 seconds (When user program 24 is set to ON)
AR-M200/M201:
8.0 seconds
(paper: A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), exposure mode: AUTO, copy ratio: 100%)
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
99
1 - 4mm
4mm or less
0.5mm or more (per side)
4.5mm or less (total of both sides)
same size: 3.0mm or less (OC) / 4mm or less (SPF)
Enlarge: 1.5mm or less (OC) / 3mm or less (SPF)
Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less (OC) / 8mm or less (SPF)
0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit.
0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit.
0 sec.
Jam recovery condition: Recovery time from 60 sec of door open.

hr
an

Manual steps (manual, photo)


Copy speed

Image loss

Leading edge
Trailing edge
Side edge
void area
Leading edge

*1: If a value greater than 200% or smaller than 50% is selected when the RSPF is used, the magnification ratio is automatically set to 200% or
50%.
*2: The first-copy time is measured after the power save indicator turns off following power on, using the document glass with the polygon rotating in the copy ready state and "Selection of copy start state" set to ON in the user programs (A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), paper fed from paper tray).
The first-copy time may vary depending on machine operating conditions and ambient conditions such as temperature.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 2

4. GDI printer (AR-203E only)


Print speed

Max. 15ppm (excluding bypass tray, paper size A4, 8.5" x 11") (Variable depending on the PC performance)

Duplex

No

Memory

8MB

Interface

USB 2.0 (Full speed)

Emulation

GDI

Resolution

600dpi *1

Supported OS

Win 98 / Me / 2000 / XP / Vista

WHQL support

Yes *2

*1: Engine Resolution

5. SPLC printer (AR-M200/M201)


Print speed

Max. 20ppm (Paper size: A4, excluding manual paper feed)

First print time

8 sec. (without data transfer time)

Duplex

Yes (AR-M201 only)

ROPM

Yes

Memory

64MB
USB2.0 (Hi Speed)

Network

Option: Network expansion kit the AR-NB2A

Emulation

SPLC (JBIG GDI)

MIB support

No

py

Interface

.c

Varies depending on the PC performance.

om

*2: By running change

600dpi *1

Supported OS

Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, Windows Vista

WHQL support

Yes *2

Application

Status window

co

Resolution

*1: Engine Resolution

hr
an

*2: Running change

6. Scan function (AR-203E/M200/M201)


Type

Flat Bed Color Scanner

Scanning system

Original table/SPF/RSPF

3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp (2 pcs of CCFL)

Resolution

Optical: 600 x 1200dpi


Setting range: 50 - 9600dpi (Preview resolution is fixed at 75dpi)

.te

Light source

Originals

Sheet type / Book type

Output data

R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel

Scan speed

Protocol

A/D 16 bits (12 bits actual)

OC/SPF/RSPF: 216mm (H) x 356mm (V) (8.5" (H) x 14.0" (V))


Original position: Left Center
SPF/RSPF position: Right Center

Scan range

Interface

Scanner utility

Scan key/lamp

OC/SPF: Max. 2.88ms/line


TWAIN / WIA (Only XP, Vista) / STI
AR-203E: USB2.0 (Full speed support)
AR-M200/M201: USB2.0 (Hi speed support)
Button Manager / Sharpdesk / Composer

Yes

Duplex scan

Yes only when the RSPF is installed (AR-M200/M201)

Supported OS

Win 98 / Me / 2000 / XP / Vista

Void area

No

WHQL supported

Yes *1

*1: By running change

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 3

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS


1. Supply system table
A. Europe Subsidiary (AR-203E/5420/M200/M201), SCA/SCNZ (AR-203E/M201)
Name
Toner cartridge
(Black)

Content
Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g)
Polyethylene bag

10
10

Developer

Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g)

10

Drum kit

Drum
Drum fixing plate

1
1

Life
80K
(8K x 10Pcs)

Product name
AR-208LT
(A4 6% document)

250K
(25K x 10Pcs)

AR-208LD

25K

AR-152DM

Life
80K
(8K x 10Pcs)

Product name
AR-208CT
(A4 6% document)

Content
Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g)
Polyethylene bag

10
10

Developer

Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g)

10

Drum kit

Drum
Drum fixing plate

C. SMEF/Distributor (AR-203E/M201)

25K

Content
Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g)
Polyethylene bag

AR-152DR

Developer

Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g)

Drum kit

Drum
Drum fixing plate

Life
80K
(8K x 10Pcs)

Product name
AR-208ET
(A4 6% document)

250K
(25K x 10Pcs)

AR-208CD

25K

AR-152DR

Life
80K
(8K x 10Pcs)

Product name
AR-208CT-C
(A4 6% document)

250K
(25K x 10Pcs)

AR-208CD-C

25K

AR-152DR-C

hr
an

Name
Toner cartridge
(Black)

10
10
10

1
1

.te

No.
1

AR-208CD

co

1
1

250K
(25K x 10Pcs)

py

Name
Toner cartridge
(Black)

Packing form
One carton of the
AR-208CT includes
10 toner cartridges.
One carton of the
AR-208CD includes
10 developers.
One carton of the
collective package
includes 10 units of the
AR-152DR.

.c

B. Asia Subsidiary (AR-203E/M201)


No.
1

Packing form
One carton of the
AR-208LT includes
10 toner cartridges.
One carton of the
AR-208LD includes
10 developers.
One carton of the
collective package
includes 10 units of the
AR-152DM.

om

No.
1

Packing form
One carton of the
AR-208ET includes
10 toner cartridges.
One carton of the
AR-208CD includes
10 developers.
One carton of the
collective package
includes 10 units of the
AR-152DR.

D. SRH (AR-203E/M201)

Content
Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g)
Polyethylene bag

Developer

Name
Toner cartridge
(Black)

No.
1

Drum kit

Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g)

Drum
Drum fixing plate

10
10
10

1
1

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1

Packing form
One carton of the
AR-208CT-C includes
10 toner cartridges.
One carton of the
AR-208CD-C includes
10 developers.
One carton of the
collective package
includes 10 units of the
AR-152DR-C.

2. Environmental
The environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and the
machine operations are as follows:

(1)

3. Production control number (lot No.)


identification
<Toner cartridge>

Normal operating condition

Temperature: 20 - 25C

Production month
Production day
Destination code

Humidity: 65 5%RH

(2)

Acceptable operating condition

(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)


Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
Version No.

Humidity (RH)
85%

<Drum cartridge>

om

60%

The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production.


(SOCC production)

20%

35C

(3) Transport condition

Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
Version No.

15%

25C

30C

40C

.te

Supply storage condition

hr
an

60%

Production control
label attachment position

Humidity (RH)
90%

(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)

co

Humidity (RH)
90%

(4)

.c

30C

py

10C

Production month
Production day
Destination code

20%

5C

45C
Production control
label attachment position(*1)

*1: The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of


a China product.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2

<Developer>

Sub lot
Production day
Production month
End digit of year
Production place

4. Toner cartridge replacement


1) Open the front and side cabinets of the copier.
2) Keep holding Toner lever, and

om

3) Carefully pull out Toner unit from the copier.

py

.c

co

.te

hr
an

4) Put Toner unit in a collection bag immediately after removing it


from the copier

Note: Never carry exposed Toner unit. Be sure to put it in the collection bag.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 3

[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES


1. Appearance
Interface

Interface

1
USB connector
(AR-203E)

om

USB connector
(AR-M200/M201)

2
3

10
11

8
9

.c

Original cover
Front cover
Side cover
Paper output tray
Handle

2
5
8
11
14

Document glass
Paper tray
Side cover open button
Paper output tray extension
Power cord

co

1
4
7
10
13

14

py

12
13

Operation panel
Multi-bypass tray
Bypass tray paper guides
Power switch

hr
an

2. Internal

3
6
9
12

Drum cartridge

.te

Toner cartridge

1
4

Front cover
Transfer charger

4
5
2
5

Side cover
Charger cleaner

Fusing unit release lever

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1

3. Operation panel
A. AR-203E/5420
4 5

13 14

9
11

13

15

Copy ratio display (%) key


Use to verify a zoom setting without changing the zoom ratio.
Use to check the number of originals that must be returned to
the document feeder tray if an original misfeed occurs while
using the SPF.
SCAN key and indicator (AR-203E only) *2, *3

Start key and indicator


Copying is possible when the indicator is on.
Press to start copying
Use to set a user program.
Tray select key
Use to select a paper feed station (paper tray or multi-bypass
tray).
ZOOM keys and indicator
Use to select any reduction or enlargement copy ratio from 25%
to 400% in 1% increments. (When the SPF is being used, the
zoom copy ratio range is 50% to 200%.)
Clear key
Press to clear the display, or press during a copy run to
terminate copying.
Press and hold down during standby to display the total
number of copies made to date.

17

16

10

11

12

17

Light and dark keys and indicators


Use to adjust the MANUAL or PHOTO exposure level. Selected
exposure level is shown by a lit indicator. Use to start and
terminate user program setting.
SPF indicator (AR-203E only)

Copy ratio selector key and indicators


Use to sequentially select preset reduction/enlargement copy
ratios.
Selected copy ratio is shown by a lit indicator.
Display
Displays the specified copy quantity, zoom copy ratio, user
program code, and error code.

co

Exposure mode selector key and indicators


Use to sequentially select the exposure modes: AUTO,
MANUAL or PHOTO.
Selected mode is shown by a lit indicator.
Alarm indicators
Developer replacement required indicator
Misfeed indicator
Toner cartridge replacement required indicator *1
Maintenance indicator
SPF misfeed indicator (AR-203E only)

10

12

ONLINE key and indicator (AR-203E only)


Lights up when the unit is used as a printer and scanner. *2
Power save indicator
Lights up when the unit is in a power save mode.

hr
an

15

.te

om

.c

py

*1: Toner cartridge replacement

Paper feed location indicators


Light up to show the selected paper feed station.

16

Copy quantity keys


Use to select the desired copy quantity (1 to 99).
Use to make user program entries.

Start indicator

When toner density is lower than a specified level, the toner


cartridge replacement indicator lights up to warn the user. If the
toner cartridge is not replaced in that time, the ready lamp
changes to blinking and then start to supply the toner after
around 10 copies. (Cartridge replacement lamp continues to
light.) If toner density is not back to specific level after two minutes, the ready indicator goes out and toner developer indicator
starts blinking, and the copier stops. Also when the toner quantity is insufficient, the lamp is lighted.

*2: Indicators on the operation panel


The ONLINE indicator and the start (
state of the printer or scanner.
SCAN indicator
ONLINE indicator

14

) indicator indicate the

Start indicator
Power save indicator

On:

Indicates the unit is ready for copying or scanning is


being performed.
Blinking: The indicator blinks in the following situations:
When a print job is interrupted.
When reserving a copy job.
When toner is being replenished during a copy or
print job.
Off:
The indicator is off in the following situations:
During copying or scanning.
The unit is in the auto power shut-off mode.
When a misfeed or error has occurred.
ONLINE indicator
The ONLINE key is pressed and on line and off line are
changed.
On:

Indicates the unit is ready for printing or scanning is


being performed. (On line)
Blinking: Printing or data is being received from a computer.
Off:
Copying is being performed. (Off line)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 2

Power save indicator

2) Place the original you wish to scan on the document glass/


SPF.

On:
Indicates the unit is in a power save mode.
Blinking: Indicates that the unit is initializing (when the side
cover is opened and closed or the power turned off
and on).

3) Press the right copy quantity key to display the number of


the application that you wish to use for scanning.
The application numbers are initially as follows.

SCAN indicator
On:

The SCAN (
) key has been pressed and the unit
is in scanner mode.
Blinking: A scan job is being executed from the computer, or
scan data is stored in the units memory.
Off:
The unit is in the copy mode.
Application
number
SC2

Note:
Scanning is not possible during a copy job.
If the SCAN (
) key is pressed during a print job, the scan
job will be stored.

SC3
SC4
SC5
SC6

When scanning an original that has been placed in the SPF,


only one original can be placed unless you are using Sharpdesk.
) key.

E-mail (your standard e-mail program in


the Windows OS you are using)
Fax (if a fax program is installed)
OCR (if an OCR program is installed)
Microsoft Word (if installed)
Filing (if a Filing program is installed)

4) Press the start (

) key.

.c

1) Press the SCAN (

Application launched

om

*3: Using the SCAN key to begin scanning

The unit enters scan mode.

co

py

Scanning will start and the scanned data will be transferred


to the application.

B. AR-M200/M201

hr
an

For Europe

Display
READY TO COPY.
100%
A4

.te

1
2
1

6 7

8 9 10 11

1
2
2

12 13 14

18

15

16

19

20

21

17

For SCA/SCNZ/Asia

Display
READY TO COPY.
100%
A4

18

6 7

8 9 10 11

12 13 14

15

16

17

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 3

19

20

21

Numeric keys
Use these to enter the number of copies and other numerical
settings.

11

13

15

17

1
2
2

1
2
1

12

Press the [OK]/[ENTER] key to enter a selection.


[ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key
Press to select an enlargement or reduction ratio.

14

16

To select a preset ratio setting, press the [ZOOM]/[COPY


RATIO] key and select the desired preset ratio. To select a ratio
that is not preset, press the [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key, select
the preset ratio that is closest to the desired ratio, and then press
the [
] key (
) or [
] key (
) to increase or decrease
the ratio in increments of 1%.
[START] key (
) / Ready indicator
The ready indicator lights up when copying or scanning is
possible.

[CLEAR ALL] key (


)
This returns all functions to the default settings. When pressed in
a setting menu, this returns the settings and display to the initial
state.

18

Shows the current copy ratio.

).

The [START] key (


) is also pressed to return to normal
operation from auto power shut-off mode.
Shows the selected paper size.

20

Shows the number of copies that has been entered with the
numeric keys.

A checkmark " " appears when the exposure has been


changed, or when two-sided copying, sort, 2 IN 1, or margin shift
is selected.

.te

21

10

To begin copying, press the [START] key (

19

RSPF indicator
This lights up when an original is placed in the RSPF.
[TRAY SELECT] key (
)
Use to select the paper tray that has the desired paper for
copying.
[MENU] key
Press this key to select the paper size for copying, to configure a
user program or to display the total count.
[E-SORT/SP.FUNC] key (
)
Press to select the sort function, 2 IN 1 copy function, or margin
shift function.
[EXPOSURE] key (
)
Use to switch from auto exposure adjustment to text mode or
photo mode.

co

hr
an

The keys can also be used to select items in function setting


menus.
Power save indicator
This lights up when the power save function is activated.
Error indicator
This lights steadily or blinks when a paper misfeed or other error
occurs.
Tray location indicator
Indicates the selected paper tray. The indicator blinks when the
tray is out of paper during operation or is not closed properly.
[2-SIDED SCAN] key (
)
[2-SIDED COPY] key (
)
Press to select the automatic two-sided copying mode.
[
] key (
), [
] key (
), [OK]/[ENTER] key
Press the [
] key (
) or [
] key (
) to select an item in
a function setting menu.

Display
This shows messages indicating the machine status and any
problems that occur, as well as user programs and function
setting menus.
[CLEAR] key (
)
Use this to clear the set number of copies, as well as cancel a
job that is in progress. When a setting menu appears, use this
key to move back to the previous menu level.

om

.c

[MODE SELECT] key / Mode indicators


Press this key to select the mode. The indicator of the selected
mode lights (copy, printer, scanner, fax indicators).

py

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 4

4. Motors and solenoids

om

.c

py

hr
an

co

Part name
Main motor
Scanner motor
Toner motor
Cooling fan motor
Resist roller solenoid
Paper feed solenoid
Multi paper feed solenoid
Duplex motor
Shifter motor

Control signal

MM
MRMT
TM
VFM
RRS
CPFS1
MPFS
DMT
SFTM

Function / Operation
Drives the copier.
Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit).
Supplies toner.
Cools the optical, fusing section.
Resist roller rotation control solenoid
Cassette Paper feed solenoid 1
Multi manual pages feed solenoid
Devices the duplex paper transport section (AR-M201 only)
Drives the shifter. (AR-M200/M201)

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

.te

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 5

5. Sensors and switches

om

PPD1 sensor
Door switch

6
7

2
3
4
5

Name
Scanner unit home position
sensor
POD sensor
PPD2 sensor
Cassette detection switch
PD1 sensor (AR-M200/M201)

No.
1

.te

hr
an

co

py

.c

Signal
MHPS

Type
Transmission sensor

POD
PPD2
CED1
PD1

Transmission sensor
Transmission sensor
Micro-switch
Micro-switch

PPD1
DSW

Transmission sensor
Micro-switch

4
5

Function
Scanner unit home position
detection
Paper exit detection
Paper transport detection 2
Cassette installation detection
Paper width detect
Paper transport detection 1
Door open/close detection
(safety switch for 24V)

Output
"H" at home position
"H" at paper pass
"L" at paper pass
"H" at cassette insertion
"H" at A4 size or less
"L" at A4 size or more
"L" at paper pass
1 or 0V of 24V at door open

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 6

6. PWB unit

11

10
4
3

hr
an

co

py

Function

Exposure lamp (CCFL) control


Copier control
Operation input/display
High voltage control
For image scanning
For polygon motor drive
For toner sensor control
For laser control
FAX operation input (AR-FX13 option)
AC power input, DC voltage control
FAX control (AR-FX13 option)

.te

Name
Exposure lamp invertor PWB
Main PWB (MCU)
Operation PWB
High voltage PWB
CCD sensor PWB
LSU motor PWB
TCS PWB
LSU PWB
FAX-operation PWB
Power PWB
Modem PWB

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

.c

om

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 7

7. Cross sectional view


1

16

15

6
7

om

8
9

11

hr
an

co

Function and operation


Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit (CCD).
Exposure lamp (CCFL) Illuminates original
Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum.
Roller for paper exit (AR-203E/5420)
Transports and shifts paper in the back-forth direction of the machine. (AR-M200/M201)
Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface.
Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller)
Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller)
Forms images.
Transfers images onto the drum.
Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only)
Tray for manual feed paper
Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port.
Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper.
Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette.
Transports of a paper.
Transports of a paper. (AR-M200/M201)

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Part name
Scanner unit
Exposure lamp
LSU (Laser unit)
Paper exit roller
Shifter roller
Main charger
Heat roller
Pressure roller
Drum
Transfer unit
Pickup roller
Manual paper feed tray
Manual paper feed roller
PS roller unit
Paper feed roller
Paper transport roller
Paper transport roller 2

12

.te

No.
1
2
3
4

13

py

14

.c

10

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 8

[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION


1. Copier installation

2. Cautions on handling

Improper installation may damage the copier. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the copier is moved.

Be careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the performance of this copier.

Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm place,


condensation may form inside the copier. Operation in
this condition will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions.
Leave the copier at room temperature for at least 2 hours
before use.

Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against any


object.

Do not install your copier in areas that are:

om

damp, humid, or very dusty

Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight.

Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge, causing poor print quality.

py

.c

exposed to direct sunlight

co

poorly ventilated

Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and toner cartridges


in a dark place without removing from the package before use.

hr
an

If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may result.
Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge.
Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor
print quality.

.te

subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near


an air conditioner or heater.

The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for


easy connection.

3. Checking packed components and


accessories
Open the carton and check if the following components and accessories are included.

Operation manual

Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that


meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded.

Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation.

20cm (8")

10cm
(4")

Software CD-ROM

20cm (8")

10cm
(4")

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1

Drum cartridge
(installed in unit)

4. Unpacking
Be sure to hold the handles on both sides of the unit to unpack the
unit and carry it to the installation location.

2) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover and remove
the two protective pins from the fusing unit by pulling the
strings upward one at a time.

Protective pins
CAUTION tape

om

3) Push gently on both sides of the front cover to open the cover.

5. Removing protective packing


materials

.c

1) Remove all pieces of tape shown in the illustration below.


Then open the original cover and remove protective materials.

py

4) Remove the locking tape of the developer unit.


5) Remove the screw which is fixing the copier and Developer
unit.

2) Release the scan head locking switch.


The scan head locking switch is under the document glass.

co

6) Remove Developer unit slowly from the copier.

Grasp here and turn in


the direction of the arrow.

(A)

Unlock

.te

Lock

hr
an

If the switch is locked ( ), the unit will not operate. Unlock the
switch ( ) as shown below.

To lock the scan head locking switch, hold up the catch in illustration (A) and turn the center knob counter-clockwise 90
degrees until you hear a click.

6. Developer unit installation

1
3

4
7) Remove the screw (1 pc).
8) Remove Upper developer unit.

1) Open the multi-bypass tray, and then open the side cover.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 2

7. Toner cartridge installation

9) Shake the aluminum bag to stir developer.


10) Supply developer from the aluminum bag to the top of the MX
roller evenly.

1) To prevent against uneven distribution of toner, hold Toner unit


with both hands and shake it several times horizontally.

om

2) Hold the section of Toner unit shown in the figure below,


remove the packing tape, and remove the cushion.

.c

3) Pull out the cushion in the arrow direction.

Note: Be careful not to splash developer outside Developer


unit.

py

11) Attach Upper developer unit and fix it with a screw.


12) Rotate the MG roller gear to distribute developer evenly.

co

4) Insert Toner unit carefully into the copier.

hr
an

5) Insert until the hook is engaged with the copier as shown in


the figure below.

.te

Note: Never rotate the gear in the reverse direction.

6) Pull out the shutter in the arrow direction.

Note: When carrying Developer unit, do not tilt it extremely as


shown with the arrow in the figure below.
(Prevention of splash of developer)

13) Insert Developer unit carefully into the copier.


Note: Quick insertion may result in splash of developer. Be
sure to insert carefully.
14) Confirm that Developer unit is completely inserted to the bottom of the machine, fix Developer unit and the machine with a
screw.
15) Completion of Developer unit installation

Note: Do not hold and carry the shutter. Otherwise the shutter
may drop and Toner unit may drop.
7) Completion of Toner unit installation
Close the front and side cabinets.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 3

8. Loading paper

10. Software (AR-203E/M200/M201)

1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out
until it stops.

The CD-ROM that accompanies the machine contains the following


software:

MFP driver
Printer driver
The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of the
machine.
2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate
lock in the direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing
down the pressure plate of the paper tray.

The printer driver includes the Print Status Window. This is a utility
that monitors the machine and informs you of the printing status,
the name of the document currently being printed, and error messages.
Please note that the Print Status Window does not operate when
the machine is used as a network printer.

om

Scanner driver*

The scanner driver allows you to use the scanning function of the
machine with TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant applications.

Sharpdesk* (Excluding AR-203E X)

.c

3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed in step
2). To store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to fix it on
the relevant location.

Sharpdesk is an integrated software environment that makes it


easy to manage documents and image files, and launch applications.

Button Manager*

Button Manager allows you to use the scanner menus on the


machine to scan a document.

py

Pressure plate lock

*: The scanning feature can only be used with computers that are
connected to the machine by a USB cable.

co

A. Before installation

Hardware and software requirements


Check the following hardware and software requirements in order to
install the software.
Computer type

hr
an

4) Adjust the paper guides on the paper tray to the copy paper
width and length. Squeeze the lever of paper guide (A) and
slide the guide to match with the width of the paper. Move
paper guide (B) to the appropriate slot as marked on the tray.

Display
Hard disk free
space
Other hardware
requirements

.te

Paper guide (B)

Paper guide (A)

5) Fan the paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure the edges
go under the corner hooks.
).

Note: Do not load paper above the maximum height line (


Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed.

Operating
system*2 *3

IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped


with a USB 2.0/1.1*1
Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000
Professional*4, Windows XP Professional*4,
Windows XP Home Edition*4, Windows Vista*4
1024 x 768 dots (XGA) display with 16bit
150 MB or more
An environment on which any of the operating
systems listed above can fully operate

*1: Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000


Professional, Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home
Edition or Windows Vista preinstalled model standardly
equipped with a USB port.
*2: Printing is not available in MS-DOS mode.
*3: The machine does not support printing from a Macintosh environment.
*4: Administrator's rights are required to install the software using
the installer.

Installation environment and usable software


The following table shows the drivers and software that can be
installed for each version of Windows and interface connection
method.
Cable

6) Gently push the paper tray back into the unit.

9. Power to copier
Ensure that the power switch of the unit is in the OFF position.
Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet. Turn
the power switch on the left side of the unit to the "ON" position.
The start (
) indicator will light up and other indicators which
show the initial settings of the operation panel will also light up to
indicate the ready condition.

USB

Operating
Printer
Scanner Button
Sharpdesk
system
driver
driver Manager
1
Available
Windows 98/ Available*
Me/2000/XP/
Vista

*1: The printer driver that is installed will vary depending on the
type of connection between the machine and your computer.
Install the software according to the Operation Manual.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 4

B. Installing the software

8) Click the "MFP Driver" button.

Note:
The screen images in this manual are mainly for Windows XP.
With other versions of Windows, some screen images may be different from those in this manual.

Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected.

In the following explanations it is assumed that the mouse is configured for right hand operation.
If an error message appears, follow the instructions on the screen
to solve the problem. After the problem is solved, the installation
procedure will continue. Depending on the problem, you may
have to click the "Cancel" button to exit the installer. In this case,
reinstall the software from the beginning after solving the problem.

om

1) The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make


sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding.
If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If
this happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and
disconnect the cable.
Note: The cable will be connected in step 13).
2) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive.

In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and


then double-click the CD-ROM icon.
4) Double-click the "setup" icon.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

co

In Windows Vista, if a message screen appears asking you for


confirmation, click "Allow".

.c

In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, click "Computer",


and then double-click the CD-ROM icon.

9) Select "Connected to this computer" and click the "Next" button.

py

3) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then doubleclick the CD-ROM icon.

5) The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure


that you understand the contents of the software license, and
then click the "Yes" button.

hr
an

Note: You can show the "SOFTWARE LICENSE" in a different


language by selecting the desired language from the
language menu. To install the software in the selected
language, continue the installation with that language
selected.

6) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then


click the "Next" button.

.te

7) To install all of the software, click the "Standard" button and go


to step 12).

If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window


appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
10) You will return to the window of step 8). If you wish to install Button Manager or Sharpdesk, click the "Utility Software" button.
If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close"
button and go to step 12).
Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart
your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes"
button to restart your computer.

To install particular packages, click the "Custom" button and go


to next step.

Caution:

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 5

Installing the Utility Software

14) Follow the instructions in the plug and play window to install the
driver.

11) Click the "Button Manager" or the "Sharpdesk" button.


Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected.
Follow the on-screen instructions.

Follow the on-screen instructions.


Caution:
If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
This completes the installation of the software.
If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as
explained in "C. Setting up Button Manager".
If you installed Sharpdesk, the Sharpdesk setup screen will
appear. Follow the instructions in the screen to set up Sharpdesk.

Connecting a USB cable

om

(1)

Follow the procedure below to connect the machine to your computer.

Caution:

If "Skip" is selected, the Sharpdesk installation will continue without installing Sharpdesk Imaging.

Do not connect the USB cable before installing the printer driver.
The USB cable should be connected during installation of the
printer driver.

co

If "Continue" is selected, Sharpdesk Imaging will be


installed. If Imaging for Windows is installed on your computer, Sharpdesk Imaging will overwrite Imaging for Windows.

USB is available with a PC/AT compatible computer that was originally equipped with USB and had Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP or Windows Vista preinstalled.

py

Caution: In Windows 98/Me/2000, if the following screen appears,


click the "Skip" button or the "Continue" button as appropriate to continue the Sharpdesk installation.

.c

A USB cable for connecting the machine to your computer is not


included with the machine. Please purchase the appropriate cable
for your computer.

Note

If the machine will be connected using a USB 2.0 port of your


computer, please purchase a USB cable that supports USB 2.0.

hr
an

To obtain the fastest USB 2.0 data transfer speed, "USB2.0


MODE SWITCH" in the machine's user programs must be set to
"HI-SPEED". For more information, see "[12] USER PROGRAM".
(AR-M200/M201 only)
Use the machine's "HI-SPEED" mode only when using a computer that is running Windows 2000/XP/Vista.

.te

Even when the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is used, it may not be
possible to obtain full USB 2.0 speed if a PC card supporting
USB 2.0 is used. To obtain the latest driver (which may enable a
higher speed), contact the manufacturer of your PC card.

12) When installing is finished, click the "Close" button.


Caution:

If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window


appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".

Connection is also possible using a USB 1.1 port on your computer.


However, the specifications will be USB 1.1 specifications (FullSpeed).
1) Insert the cable into the USB connector on the machine.

If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message


appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine
to your computer. Click the "OK" button.

Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart


your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes"
button to restart your computer.
13) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then
connect the USB cable.

(AR-203E)

(AR-M200/M201)

2) Insert the other end of the cable into your computer's USB port.

Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen
will appear.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 6

(2)

Using the machine as a shared printer


(AR-203E/M200/M201)

5) Click the "Add Network Port" button.


In Windows Vista, the "Add Network Port" button does not
appear.

If the machine will be used as a shared printer on a network, follow


these steps to install the printer driver in the client computer.
Note: To configure the appropriate settings in the print server, see
the operation manual or help file of your operating system.
1) Perform steps 2) through 6) in "Installing the software".

om

2) Click the "Custom" button.

6) Select the network printer that is shared and click the "OK" button.

3) Click the "MFP Driver" button.

hr
an

co

Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected.

py

.c

Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer
name of the machine on the network.

7) In the printer port selection window, verify the network printer


that is shared and whether the machine is to be used as the
default printer, make the selections and click the "Next" button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.

.te

Caution:

4) Select "Connected via the network" and click the "Next" button.

If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window


appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
8) You will return to the window of step 3). Click the "Close" button.
Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart
your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer.
This completes the installation of the software.

C. Setting up Button Manager


Button Manager is a software program that works with the scanner
driver to enable scanning from the machine.
To scan using the machine, Button Manager must be linked with the
scan menu on the machine. Follow the steps below to link Button
Manager to scanner events.

(1)

Windows XP/Vista

1) Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click "Printers and
Other Hardware", and then click "Scanners and Cameras".
In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, select "Control Panel"
and click "Hardware and Sound", and then click "Scanners and
Cameras".

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 7

2) Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" icon and select "Properties" from


the "File" menu.
In Windows Vista, select "Properties" from the "Organize"
menu.
3) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.

(2)

Windows 98/Me/2000

1) Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click "Control Panel".
2) Double-click the "Scanners and Cameras" icon.
Note: If the "Scanners and Cameras" icon does not appear in
Windows Me, click "view all Control Panel options".

4) Select "SC1:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu.

3) Select "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click the "Properties" button.


In Windows Me, right click "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click "Properties" in the pop-up menu.
4) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.

py

co

5) Select "Start this program" and then select "Sharp Button Manager T" (AR-203E) or "Sharp Button Manager S" (AR-M200/
M201) from the pull-down menu.

.c

om

5) Select "SC1:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu.

.te

hr
an

6) Select "Sharp Button Manager T / S" in "Send to this application".

6) Click the "Apply" button.

7) Repeat Steps 4) through 6) to link Button Manager to "SC2:"


through "SC6:".

Select "SC2:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu.


Select "Start this program", select "Sharp Button Manager T /
S" from the pull-down menu, and then click the "Apply" button.
Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:".
When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button
to close the screen.

Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).


The scan settings for each of scan menu 1 through 6 can be
changed with the setting window of Button Manager.
For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the Online Manual.

Note: If other applications are shown, deselect the checkboxes for


the other applications and leave only the Button Manager
checkbox selected.
7) Click the "Apply" button.
8) Repeat Steps 5) through 7) to link Button Manager to "SC2:"
through "SC6:".
Select "SC2:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu.
Select "Sharp Button Manager T / S" in "Send to this application" and click the "Apply" button.
Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:".
When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button
to close the screen.
Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).
The scan settings for each of scan menus 1 through 6 can be
changed with the setting window of Button Manager.
For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the Online Manual.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 8

11. Interface

13. Scanner moisture-proof kit

A. USB

If the machine is installed in a highly humid environment, you can


alleviate dew condensation inside the scanner by installing the
scanner moisture-proof kit described below.

Connector
Type-B connector

A. Components

Cable

Scanner moisture-proof kit (DKIT-0016QSZZ)

Shielded twisted pair cable


(2 m (6 feet) Max.: high-speed transmission equivalent)

Name
Scanner condensation
prevention mylar
Optical right hole mylar B
Scanner motor metal plate
cushion
Scanner upper surface cushion
Scanner motor lower mylar
Scanner UPG mylar J3
Fan housing cushion

Pin configuration
The pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table.
Signal name
+5V
-DATA
+DATA
GND

4
5
6
7

2
3

Qty
3

PSHEZ0469QSZZ
PMLT-0106QSZZ

2
2

PMLT-0105QSZZ
PSHEP0600QSZZ
PSHEP0599QSZZ
PMLT-0108QSZ1

1
1
1
1

om

Pin No.
1
2
3
4

Part code
PSHEZ0493QSZZ

B. Precautions at installation

.c

Clean the position where each cushion/mylar is attached with


industrial alcohol before the work.

C. Attachment method

py

Turn the main switch to the "OFF" position and remove the power
plug from the outlet.
1) Remove the document cover.

12. Moving
Moving instructions

hr
an

co

Remove the document cover from the copier.

When moving the unit, follow the procedure below.

Note: When moving this unit, be sure to remove the toner cartridge
in advance.

1) Turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the
outlet.

.te

2) Open the side cover and front cover, in that order. Remove the
toner cartridge and close the front cover and side cover, in that
order.

To open and close the side cover and front cover, and to remove
the toner cartridge.

2) Remove the rear cabinet.


Remove the four screws and then remove the rear cabinet.

3) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out
until it stops.

4) Push the center of the pressure plate down until it locks in place
and lock the plate using the pressure plate lock which has been
stored in the front of the paper tray.

5) Push the paper tray back into the unit.

6) Lock the scan head locking switch.

Note: When shipping the unit, the scan head locking switch must
be locked to prevent shipping damage.
7) Close the multi-bypass tray and the paper output tray extension,
and attach the packing materials and tape which were removed
during installation of the unit.
8) Pack the unit into the carton.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 9

3) Remove the rear cover for the document glass.


<1> Remove the two screws and then remove the right glass
holder.

Attach along the edge of the projection (the yellow line in the
diagram below).

<2> Slide the rear cover for the document glass to remove it.
<3> Remove the table glass.

om

5) Attach the Optical right hole mylar B at the 2 positions shown


in the diagrams below which are at the top of the rear side of
the main unit.
Note: The holes should be covered with the mylar.

Align with the inside line of the bent part (the yellow line in the
diagram below).

hr
an

co

Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the
diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered
as much as possible.

.c

Note: The hole should be covered with the mylar.

Attach along the edge of the cushion (the yellow line in the diagram below).

py

4) Attach the Scanner condensation prevention mylar at the 3


positions on the rear side of the main unit as described below.

Align with the raised part (the yellow line in the diagram
below).
Match the center of the mylar (in the horizontal direction) to the
center of the raised part.

.te

Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the
diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered
as much as possible.

Stick the excessive part on the side.

Stick the excessive part on the side.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 10

6) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion at 1 position on


the attachment plate of the motor on the rear side of the main
unit.

Bend the part which is sticking out to the rear side of the scanner and attach to the surface.

Note: The hole on the top of the motor unit should be covered
with the mylar.
Align the edge of the metal plate and the edge of the cushion
(the yellow line in the diagram below).

Press the cushion at the steps shown in the diagram so that


there will be no gap.
Press the cushion to make sure all the holes are covered.

om

8) Bend the edge of the Scanner motor lower mylar and stick
together.

.c

20mm - 25mm

hr
an

co

py

Press and attach the cushion aligning it to the metal plate so


that there will be no gap between them.

Stick together.

Stick together.

9) Attach the Scanner motor lower mylar at 1 position under the


motor attachment plate on the rear side of the main unit.
Note: The mylar should cover the hole under the motor unit.

7) Attach the Scanner upper surface cushion on the top and the
rear side at the rear side of the main unit.

Disconnect the motor harness from the connector and take off
the snap band from the hole.

.te

Align the cushion with the side of the raised part (the yellow
line in the diagram below).

Attach matching the hole (the yellow mark in the diagram) and
along with the side edge (the yellow arrow in the diagram).

Do not cover this hole.

Align the edge of the cushion with


the edge of the metal plate.

Press the mylar with a sharp-pointed stick or something so


that it is stuck correctly.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 11

10) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion covering the
bottom part of the Scanner motor lower mylar.
Note: The hole under the motor unit should be covered.
Attach the cushion to cover the gap between the mylar and the
metal plate (the yellow mark).

13) Attach the Fan housing cushion to the cooling fan at the position shown in the diagram below.

om

Stick the lower part of the cushion to the mylar, too.

Cover the top and the right side of the fan housing when you
see the fan housing from the backside of the machine.

co

Press the cushion with a sharp-pointed stick or something to


fill the gap between the mylar and the metal plate.

py

.c

Note: Please make sure the double-sided tape is not exposed


where the cushion is sticking out from the edge of the
fan housing.

hr
an

View from
the arrow A

Back side

Reference position
Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm
from the edge.

.te

11) Attach the motor connector and the snap band to the original
position.

12) Attach the Scanner UPG mylar J3 to cover the hole on the
right side of inside of the scanner.
Note: The mylar should cover the hole shown by the arrow in
the diagram.
Attach along with the bent part of the metal plate and align the
edge of the mylar with the line shown in the diagram (the yellow line in the diagram).

3 - 7mm

Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm from the edge so that the
gap between the Fan housing cushion and the filter of the rear
cabinet is filled for sure.
14) Attach the parts removed in the items 1), 2), and 3).
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 12

[6] COPY PROCESS


An OPC drum is used for the photoconductor.
(Structure of the OPC drum layers)

OPC layer
(20 microns thick)
Pigment layer (0.2
to 0.3 microns thick)
Aluminum drum

1. Functional diagram

Laser beam

om

Main charger
Cleaning blade

MG roller

py

.c

Drum

Transfer unit

co

Resist roller

hr
an

(Basic operation cycle)

Semiconductor laser

Focus correction lens

Main high voltage unit

.te

Exposure

Charge

Saw tooth

To face
down tray

Toner
Developing

Drum

Cleaning

Developer

Cleaning blade

Paper release

PS roller

Waste toner box

Fusing

Separation

Transfer

Heat roller

Electrode

Transfer charger

Heater lamp

Synchronization
with drum

Manual feed

Cassette
paper feed

Transfer high
voltage unit

Print process

Paper transport route

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 1

2. Outline of print process

Step-2: Exposure (laser beam, lens)

This printer is a non-impact printer that uses a semiconductor


laser and electrostatic print process. This printer uses an OPC
(Organic Photo Conductor) for its photoconductive material.
First, voltage from the main corona unit charges the drum surface
and a latent image is formed on the drum surface using a laser
beam. This latent image forms a visible image on the drum surface
when toner is applied. The toner image is then transferred onto the
print paper by the transfer corona and fused on the print paper in
the fusing section with a combination of heat and pressure.

A Laser beam is generated from the semiconductor laser and controlled by the print pattern signal. The laser writes onto the OPC
drum surface through the polygon mirrors and lens. The resistance of the OPC layer decreases for an area exposed by the laser
beam (corresponding to the print pattern signal). The beam neutralizes the negative charge. An electrostatic latent image is
formed on the drum surface.

Semiconductor laser

Step-1: Charge
Step-2: Exposure

Step-4: Transfer
The visible image (toner image) on the drum is transferred
onto the print paper.

Exposure
(semiconductor laser)

.c

Step-3: Developing
Latent image formed on the drum is then changed into
visible image with toner.

om

Latent image is formed on the drum.

Drum surface charge


after the exposure

co

Step-6: Optical discharge


Residual charge on the drum surface is removed, by
semiconductor laser beam.

py

Step-5: Cleaning
Residual toner on the drum surface is removed and collected by the cleaning blade.

3. Actual print process


Step-1: DC charge

Non-image area

hr
an

A uniform negative charge is applied over the OPC drum surface


by the main charging unit. Stable potential is maintained by means
of the Scorotron charger.

.te

Positive charges are generated in the aluminum layer.

About
DC5.5KV

OPC layer
Pigment
layer
Aluminum
drum

( 580V/ 400V)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 2

Image area

OPC layer
Pigment
layer
Aluminum
layer

Step-3: Developing (DC bias)

Step-4: Transfer

A bias potential is applied to the MG roller in the two component


magnetic brush developing method, and the toner is charged negative through friction with the carrier.

The visible image on the drum surface is transferred onto the print
paper by applying a positive charge from the transfer corona to the
backside of the print paper.

Non-image area of the drum surface charged with negative potential repel the toner, whereas the laser exposed portions where no
negative charges exist, attract the toner. As a result, a visible
image appears on the drum surface.

om

:Carrier (Magnetized particle)


:Toner (Charge negative by friction)
(N) (S) Permanent magnet
(provided in three locations)

N
S

DC
400V 8V

py

.c

MG roller

About DC 5.2kV

co

Step-5: Separation

hr
an

Since the print paper is charged positively by the transfer corona, it


is discharged by the separation corona. The separation corona is
connected to ground.
Step-6: Cleaning

.te

Toner remaining on the drum is removed and collected by the


cleaning blade. It is transported to the waste toner collecting section in the cleaning unit by the waste toner transport roller.

Toner is attracted over the shadowed area because of the developing bias.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 3

Step-7: Optical discharge (Semiconductor laser)

Start

Before the drum rotation is stopped, the semiconductor laser is


radiated onto the drum to reduce the electrical resistance in the
OPC layer and eliminate residual charge, providing a uniform state
to the drum surface for the next page to be printed.

1) Because the grid potential is at a low level, the drum potential


is at about -400V. (Carrier may not be attracted though the carrier is pulled towards the drum by the electrostatic force of 400V.

When the electrical resistance is reduced, positive charges on the


aluminum layer are moved and neutralized with negative charges
on the OPC layer.

2) Developing bias (-400V) is applied when the photoconductor


potential is switched from LOW to HIGH.

Semiconductor laser

3) Once developing bias (-400V) is applied and the photo conductor potential rises to HIGH, toner will not be attracted to the
drum.

Stop
The reverse sequence takes place.

om

Retaining developing bias at an abnormal occurrence


Function

Function
The Scorotron charger functions to maintain uniform surface
potential on the drum at all times, It control the surface potential
regardless of the charge characteristics of the photoconductor.
Basic function

Normally, the developing bias voltage is retained for a certain time


before the drum comes to a complete stop if the machine should
stop before completing the normal print cycle. The developing bias
can be added before resuming the operation after an abnormal
interruption. Therefore, carrier will not make a deposit on the drum
surface.

co

A screen grid is placed between the saw tooth and the photoconductor. A stable voltage is added to the screen grid to maintain the
corona current on the photoconductor.

Basic function

py

Charge by the Scorotron charger

.c

The developing bias will be lost if the power supply was removed
during print process. In this event, the drum potential slightly
abates and the carrier makes deposits on the drum because of
strong static power. To prevent this, the machine incorporates a
function to retain the developing bias for a certain period and
decrease the voltage gradually against possible power loss.

hr
an

As the photoconductor is charged by the saw tooth from the main


corona unit, the surface potential increases. This increases the
current flowing through the screen grid. When the photoconductor
potential nears the grid potential, the current turns to flow to the
grid so that the photoconductor potential can be maintained at a
stable level.

Process controlling
Function

.te

The print pattern signal is converted into an invisible image by the


semiconductor laser using negative to positive (reversible) developing method. Therefore, if the developing bias is added before
the drum is charged, toner is attracted onto the drum. If the developing bias is not added when the drum is charged, the carrier is
attracted to the drum because of the strong electrostatic force of
the drum.

To avoid this, the process is controlled by adjusting the drum


potential and the grid potential of the Scorotron charger.
Basic function

START

Voltage added to the screen grid can be selected, high and low. To
make it easily understood, the figure below shows voltage transition at the developer unit.
STOP

Print potential

Toner attract
potential

Developing bias

2)

3)
1)

Low

4)

Drum potential

High
Time

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 4

[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS


1. Outline of operation
The outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration.

(Basic configuration)
AR-M200/M201
(Option)
Scanner section

Operation
section

FAX

FAX modem

(Option)

CCD

FAX I/F

Network
Box

Network

om

USB

USB

Printer/
Scanner I/F

PC

USB

.c

MCU (Main control/image process section)

LSU (Laser unit)


Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens

Paper exit

Process section

Fusing section

hr
an

Printer section

co

Laser beam

py

AR-203E/M200/M201

Paper transport section

Cassette paper
feed section

Setting conditions

Printing

.te

(Outline of copy operation)

Manual paper
feed section

1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy
density with the operation section, and press the COPY button. The information on copy conditions is sent to the MCU.

Image scanning

2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section starts


scanning of images.
The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document and
passed through the lens to the CCD.
Photo signal/Electric signal conversion

7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum


according to the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to be visible images (toner images).
8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in
synchronization with the image lead edge.
9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner
images are fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied paper is discharged onto the exit tray.

(Outline of printer operation)


The print data sent from the PC are passed through the NIC PWB
(in case of network connection) and the MCU to the LSU. The procedures after that are the same as above 5) and later.

Image process

(Outline of scanner operation)

4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processed under the revised conditions and sent to the LSU
(laser unit) as print data.

The scan data are passed through the MCU to the PC according
to the conditions requested by the operations with the operation
panel.

3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuit and passed to the MCU.

Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion


5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data.
(Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.)
6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and
various lenses to the OPC drum.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 1

2. Scanner section
A. Scanner unit
Spectral sensitivity characteristics (Standard characteristics)

The scanner unit in the digital copier scans images.

Relative sensitivity

It is composed of the optical unit and the drive unit. The optical unit
performs scanning in the main scan direction with the light receiving elements (color CCD). The drive unit performs scanning in the
sub scanning direction by moving the optical unit.

B. Optical system
Two white lamps are used as the light source.

om

Light radiated from the light source is applied to the document on


the document table. The reflected light from the document is
reflected 4 times by No. 1 - No. 3 mirrors and passed through the
reduction lens to form images on the light-receiving surface of 3line CCD.
The light-receiving surface of the color CCD is provided with 3 line
scanning sections for RGB. Separate images scanned in each
color section are overlapped to complete color scanning. (When
PC scanning)

Wavelength [nm]

When copying, only the green component is used to print with the
printer.

100.0

75
50.2

50

45.4

25

380

480

580

680

hr
an

(Spectrum characteristics of the lamp)

(Optical unit)
Table glass
Mirror 1
CCD PWB
Original

2
5
8

Optical unit
Mirror 2
Lamp

3
6
9

Lens
Mirror 3
Reflector

.te

1
4
7
10

C. Drive system

780

Wavelength [nm]

10

co

Sensitivity

100

py

The color component for printing can be switched to red or blue by


the service simulation.

.c

(Spectrum characteristics of the color CCD)

The resolution is 600dpi.

The drive system is composed of the scanner motor, the pulley


gear, the idle pulley, the idle gear, the belt 473, the belt 190, and the
shaft.

The motor rotation is converted into reciprocated movements of the


belt 473 through the idle gear, the pulley gear, the belt 190, and the
idle pulley to drive the optical unit.

3
1
4
7

Scanner motor
Belt 473
Shaft

6
2
5
8

2
Pulley gear
Belt 190
Idle gear

5
3
6
9

Idle pulley
Optical unit
Table glass

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 2

3. Laser unit

B. Laser beam path

The image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent
to the LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams.

A. Basic structure
The LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system.
The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images
are formed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and f lens, etc.

C. Composition

.c

om

The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindrical lens, the polygon mirror, the f lens, and the mirror to form
images on the OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser
emitting PWB is provided with the APC (auto power control) in
order to eliminate fluctuations in the laser power. The BD PWB
works for measurement of the laser writing start point.

Effective scanning width: 216mm (max.)


Resolution: 600dpi

f lens

Function
Generates laser beams.
Converges laser beams in parallel.
Takes the focus.
Reflects laser beams at a constant
rpm.
Detects start timing of laser
scanning.
Converges laser beams at a spot on
the drum.
Makes the laser scanning speeds at
both ends of the drum same as each
other. (Refer to the figure below.)

Polygon motor section: Brushless motor 20.787rpm


No. of mirror surfaces: 5 surfaces

4. Fuser section

hr
an

Component
Semiconductor laser
Collimator lens
Cylinder lens
Polygon mirror,
polygon motor
BD (Lens, PWB)

.te

No
1
2
3
4

Image surface power: 0.18 0.01mW (Laser wavelength 770 795nm)

co

py

Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanning direction, 80um in the


sub scanning direction

Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same
as each other.

abc
b

d=e=f

f LENS

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 3

A. General description

2) The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 160 200C. The surface temperature during the power save mode
is set to 100C.

General block diagram (cross section)


Thermal fuse

Separator pawl

3) The self-check function comes active when one of the following malfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopy window.

PPD2

a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240C.


b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100C
during the copy cycle.
Separator pawl

c. Open thermistor
d. Open thermal fuse
e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190C within
27 second after supplying the power.

Thermistor

This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section


to improve transfer efficiency.

Heat roller

Top view

Thermal fuse

Thermistor

5. Paper feed section and paper


transport section

py

Heater lamp

.c

Since the upper heat roller is conductive, when using copy paper
that contains moisture and the distance between the transfer unit
and the fusing unit is short, the transfer current may find a path to
ground via the copy paper, the upper heat roller and the discharging brush.

Paper guide

Heat roller

(4) Fusing resistor

om

Pressure roller

A. Paper transport path and general operations

Heat roller

hr
an

Separator pawl

(1)

16

co

1 2

15
6
7
8

A Teflon roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller
is used for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance
and paper separation.

(2)

Separator pawl

9
10

Three separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separator pawls are Teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and
prevent a smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl.

Thermal control

.te

(3)

1) The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply


PWB, and triac within the power supply unit are used to control
the temperature in the fuser unit.
To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser
unit, a thermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety
purposes.

Safety device
(thermal breaker, thermal
fuse)

Triac (in the


power supply unit)

Heated by the heater


lamp. (950W)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

14 13 12
Scanner unit
Exposure lamp
LSU (Laser unit)
Paper exit roller
Main charger
Heat roller
Pressure roller
Drum

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

11
Transfer unit
Pickup roller
Manual paper feed tray
Manual paper feed roller
PS roller unit
Paper feed roller
Paper transport roller
Shifter roller

Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity
of 250 sheets.
The front loading system allows you to install or remove the tray
from the front cabinet.

The surface temperature


of the upper heat roller is
sensed by the thermistor.

The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual
paper feed operation are given below.

Level of the thermistor is


controlled by the main PWB.

With the signal from the


main PWB, the triac is
controlled on and off.
(power supply PWB)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 4

PFS

RRS

OFF

ON

RRS
OFF

6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and
the resist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to
disengage the resist start latch from the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft.
Thus the paper is transported by the resist roller.

hr
an

OFF

PFS

co

2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor starts
rotating to drive each drive gear.
The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however, the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of
the clutch sleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to
the pick-up roller, which does not rotate therefore.

om

1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the
paper feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initial
state without pressing the COPY button after lighting the ready
lamp.
The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the
clutch sleeve.

5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detection
switch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec from
detection of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid
(PFS) turns on so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into
contact with the paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller.
Then the pick-up roller rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the
lead edge of the paper is evenly pressed on the resist roller,
preventing against skew feeding.

.c

Cassette paper feed operation

py

(1)

.te

3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating,
the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on for a moment.
This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of the
clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to
the paper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed
the paper.

7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed


through the pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images
are transferred on the paper, which is separated from the OPC
drum by the drum curve and the separation section.

PFS
OFF

PFS
OFF

RRS
ON

RRS
OFF

8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusing paper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper
out detector) to the copy tray.

4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper
feed latch is brought in contact with a notch on the clutch
sleeve, stopping rotation of the pick-up roller.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 5

(2)

Manual multi paper feed operation

.c

py

om

1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid


(MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below.

3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is


engaged with the manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper
falls and the manual take-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feed roller is rotating.

co

OFF
MPFS

MPFS

4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the


resist roller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped
temporarily to allow synchronization with the lead edge of the
image on the OPC drum.
From this point, the operation is the same as the paper feed
operation from the tray. (Refer to 7-5 - 8.)

hr
an

2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feed


solenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feed
latch.
A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the
manual paper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the
same time, the manual paper feed stopper opens and the
manual take-up roller is pressed to the surface of the paper to
start paper feeding.

ON

.te

5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initial
state.

C
A

A
C

ON
MPFS

OFF
MPFS
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 6

(3)

Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeed

a. When the power is turned on:


PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on.
b. Copy operation
PPD1 jam

PPD2 jam

POD jam

PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec after


turning on the resist roller.
PPD2 is off immediately after turning on the
resist roller.
PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec after
turning off the resist roller.
POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec after
turning on the resist roller.
POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec - 2.7 sec
after turning off PPD2.

om

6. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/


document transport (Duplex model)
(AR-M201 only)

C. Back copy

A. Initial state
Set duplex documents on the document tray.

By switchback operation, the document is sent through the upper


transport roller and the PS roller to the exposure section, where the
back surface of the document is exposed.

Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed
tray cannot be selected.)

The document is sent to the document exit section by the lower


transport roller and the paper exit roller.

B. Front copy

The document is sent to the intermediate tray. (However, it is not


discharged completely.)
The document is stopped once, and switchback operation is performed.

co

The document feed roller feeds the document from the paper feed
roller to the PS roller.

py

Document transport:

.c

Document transport:

The document is exposed in the exposure section, and transported to the document exit section by the lower transport roller
and the paper exit roller.

The document is discharged to the document exit tray.

hr
an

The document is transported to the paper exit tray. (However, it is


not discharged completely.)

The document is sent through the upper transport roller and the
PS roller and the exposure section (without being exposed) to the
document exit section.

The document is stopped once, and then switchback operation is


performed. (To the back copy)
Paper transport:

The paper is passed through the paper feed roller and the PS roller,
and the images on the front surface are transferred.

Paper transport:
Switchback operation is performed.
The paper is sent through the upper side of the gate section and
the duplex transport section and the PS roller, and the images on
the back surface are transferred.
The paper is sent through the fusing section and discharged to
the paper exit tray.

.te

The paper is passed through the fusing section and the lower
side of the gate section to the paper exit tray side. (However, it is
not discharged completely.)

The paper is stopped once, and switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 7

om

Rotation copy mode:


The front and the back are in upside down each other.
Copy mode without rotation:

.c

The front and the back are not in upside down.

Shift width: 2.5cm

.te

hr
an

co

py

7. Shifter (AR-M200/M201)

The offset function by the shifter is turned ON/OFF by the user program.

According to the setting, offset operation is performed for every job.


(Default: ON)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 8

[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

2) Remove the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.


(Note) Dispose the drum fixing plate which was removed.

Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord


for safety.
1. Do not disconnect or connect the connector and the
harness during the machine is powered. Especially be
careful not to disconnect or connect the harness
between the MCU PWB and the LSU (MCU PWB: CN119)
during the machine is powered. (If it is disconnected or
connected during the machine is powered, the IC inside
the LSU will be destroyed.)
2. To disconnect the harness after turning on the power, be
sure to turn off the power and wait for at least 10 sec
before disconnection. (Note that a voltage still remains
immediately after turning off the power.)
The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the
following sections:

om

LO C K

(2)

1. High voltage section


2. Operation panel section

.c

3. Optical section
4. Fusing section
5. Tray paper feed/transport section
6. Manual paper feed section

py

3) Check the cleaning blade and the red felt for no damage.

7. Rear frame section

If there is any damage, execute all procedures from item 5)


and later.

8. Power section
9. DV unit section

If there is no damage, execute the procedure of item 12).

11. Reverse roller section (AR-M201 only)

A. List
Part name Ref.
Drum
Transfer charger unit
Charger wire

B. Drum replacement

hr
an

1. High voltage section

4) Remove the main charger.


(When uneven charging occurs, clean the screen grid and the
sawteeth with an air blower.)

co

10. Duplex motor section (AR-M201 only)

No.
1
2
3

(3)

5) Remove the cleaning blade.


Note: Dispose the cleaning blade which was removed.
If a cleaning error occurs, replace the cleaning blade.
(Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K)

.te

1) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 1

6) Clean the cleaning section and the waste toner pipe to remove
waste toner completely with a vacuum cleaner.

Normal state of the molt


Machine F side

7) Remove the felt and duplex tape completely.


Note: Be careful not to scratch or bend the sub blade.
8) Attach the cleaning blade.
Securely insert the plate section of the cleaning blade into the
unit and fix it with a screw.
Do not touch the cleaning blade rubber with your hand.

om

When attaching the cleaning blade, press the cleaning blade


in the arrow direction and attach.

.c

Machine R side

Attach the cleaning blade, press the molt on the process frame
with a screwdriver (), and push it in the clearance between the
process frame and the cleaning blade.

co

py

Machine F side

: Check while pressing the blade.


Cleaning blade
0 0.3 mm

Moquette R

0 0.3 mm

0.2 0.5 mm

Moquette F

Sub blade
0 0.5 mm

0 0.5 mm

Cleaning blade
Moquette R

Moquette F

.te

Machine R side

0.2 0.5 mm

hr
an

9) Attach the moquettes.

Sub blade
Be careful not to allow the
moquette to cover the sub blade.

Example of NG

Attach the mocket with slightly pressing section A of the cleaning blade.
Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade.
Do not put the mocket under the cleaning blade.
Do not put the mocket on the sub blade.
Do not press the sub blade with the mocket.
If the moquette F/R is deformed or damaged, replace it.
(Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 2

C. Disassembly procedure

10) Attach the main charger.


Securely set the MC holder on the projection of the process
frame.

1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side
cover.

Securely insert two projections of the MC holder into the


groove in the process frame.

om

When attaching the MC holder ass'y, be careful not to make


contact with the cleaning blade.

1)

.c

2)

co

Apply grease to the inside of the photoconductor drum. (Dia.


2)

py

11) Attach the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.

hr
an

2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and


remove the transfer charger.
Lock pawl rear

.te

1)

2)

Attach the drum from (b). (Prevention against the sub blade
edge breakage)
Attach the drum so that its position with the sub blade is as
shown.

12) Attach the drum cover.

Transfer
charger

1)

Note: After attaching the drum cover, do not make a copy.


When attaching the drum cover, engage the detection
gear 20T rib with the 30T gear rib, and attach the drum
cover to the process frame.
13) Insert the process unit into the machine until it is fully engaged.
Lock pawl front

D. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 3

E. Charger wire cleaning

F. Charger wire replacement

1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit.

1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw.


2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire.
3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and
(2).
At that time, be careful of the following items.
The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. Refer to
Fig.1
The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be
in the range of the projection section.
Be careful not to twist the charger wire.
3)

om

1)

.c

1)

Charger wire

py

2) Clean the TC front guide and the TC holder with alcohol.

1)

hr
an

co

2)

1mm
Protrusion

3) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it reciprocally a few times in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure
below.

.te

1.5mm

4)

3)

2. Operation panel section

2)

Fig.1

1)

A. List
No.
1
2

Part name Ref.


Operation panel unit
Operation PWB

B. Disassembly procedure
1) Open the side door, and Open the front cover.
1)

2)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 4

2) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation


panel unit.

(AR-M200/M201)

1)
3)
2)

1)
2)

1)

5)

5)

5)

5)

4)

om

2)

1)

.c

1)
3) Remove four screws, and remove the operation cabinet.
4) Remove four screws, and remove the operation PWB.

py

(AR-203E/5420)

C. Assembly procedure

For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure

1)

3. Optical section

co

2)

A. List

1)

NO.
1
2
3

1)

hr
an

3) 3)

3)

1)

3)
3)

B. Disassembly procedure

3)

4)

3)

1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear
cabinet cover.

1)

.te

3)

Part name Ref.


Copy lamp unit
Copy lamp
Lens unit

2)

2)

1)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 5

1)

2) Remove two screws, and remove the earth wire.

10) Move the carriage to the position indicated on the figure.

3) Disconnect the connector.

11) Loosen the screw which is fixing the tension plate.

4) Remove the original cover.

12) Move the tension plate in the arrow direction to release the
tension, and remove the belt.

3)

2)

.c

1)

om

4)

py

13) Remove the screw, and remove the rod stopper.

co

14) Remove the rod.

3)

5) Remove five screws. Remove the operation unit, and disconnect the connector.

hr
an

6) Remove the right cabinet.


7) Remove the left cabinet.

8) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cover.


9) Remove the table glass.

1)

2)
1)

.te

7)

5)

15) Lift the rear side of the carriage, remove the belt and the connector, and remove the carriage.

1)

4)

4)

2)

3)

2)

1)

8)

1)

1)

3)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 6

1)

C. Assembly procedure

4. Fusing section

CCD core

A. List

1) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the CCD PWB of the carriage unit.
2) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the duplex tape on the back
surface of the carriage unit. Clean and remove oil and dirt from
the attachment surface.
3) Pass the CCD-MCU harness through the square hole in the
base plate.
4) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the base plate with duplex
tape.
5) Attach two cable fixing sheets to fix the CCD-MCU harness to
the base plate.

Part name Ref.


Thermistor
PPD2 sensor
Heater lamp
Pressure roller
Heat roller

B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet.
2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusing unit.

om

6) Pass the core through the CCD-MCU harness and fix the core.

No.
1
2
3
4
5

7) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the MCU PWB.

py

.c

Note: Attach the FCC to the base


plate securely with duplex tape to
prevent against coming loose.

hr
an

co

1)

2)

.te

Note: Attach the FCC to


fit with the marking line.

3)

Marking line.

3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the thermistor.

2)

1)

2)

Thermistor

3)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 7

4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide.

7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater
lamp.

1)

2)

1)

.c

om

2)

Pressure roller section disassembly


5) Remove the three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on
the right side, and open the heat roller section.

py

2)
4)

8) Remove the spring, and remove the upper separation pawls (3


pcs.).

6)

5)

hr
an

1)

co

3)

Heater lamp

5)

3)

2)

6)

.te

6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor.

1)

1)
2)
PPD2 sensor

9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate.

3)

1)
2)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 8

10) Remove the spring, and remove the lower separation pawls (4
pcs.).

Heat roller disassembly


(Continued from procedure (4).)
5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat
roller section.

2)

3)

2)
2)
2)

2)

1)

1)

3)

6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the
heat roller.

1)

.c

11) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left
sides.

om

2)

2)

hr
an

1)

co

py

1)

Heat roller

3)

7) Remove the parts from the heat roller.

12) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the
spring.

.te

Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with an asterisk ().


Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ

Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with 1.


Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ

Pressure roller

3)
2)
1

2)

1)

3)

1)

1)
2)
3)

8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit.


Note: The set temperature of the thermostat differs from that of the
current model.
Current model
AR-203E/5420
AR-M200/M201

Temperature
210C
230C

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 9

2) Remove two screws, and remove the hinge guide R.


3) Disconnect the connector. (2 positions)
4) Remove five screws, and remove the scanner unit.

1)

5) Remove the fan duct.

2)

2)

3)

2)

2)
2)

om

2)

1)

py

.c

3)

C. Assembly procedure

5. Tray paper feed/transport section


No.
1
2
3
4
5

Part name Ref.


PPD1 sensor PWB
POD sensor PWB
LSU unit
Intermediate frame unit
Paper feed roller

B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove the paper holding arm.

6) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the speaker
unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed)

hr
an

A. List

2)

co

For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

2)

.te

Remove the arm holder from the main unit, and remove the
holder from the arm. (AR-M200/M201)

8) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the
AR-FX13 is installed)

2)

7) Remove the connector.

1)

2)

2)

2)

1)
3)

4)
3)
2)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 10

2)

9) Remove each connector and four screws, and remove the MCU
PWB. (The shape of the MCU PWB differs depending on the
model.)

11) Remove two springs and open the intermediate frame unit.
(AR-203E/5420)

1)
3)

2)
1)

2)

om

2)
1)
1)

1)

.c

1)

1)

10) Remove the PWB insulation mylar and remove the paper transport detection sensor (POD).

co

1)

py

2)

1)
1)
2)

.te

hr
an

12) Remove the screw, and open the upper paper guide.
(AR-M200/M201)

13) Remove the roller, and remove the belt. (AR-M200/M201)

2)

2)

1)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 11

14) Remove the pulleys on the both sides and remove the paper
exit roller. (AR-203E/5420)

18) Remove the harness guide.

3)

om

1)

4)

py

.c

19) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor.

co

2)

hr
an

2)

15) Disengage the pawl, and remove the roller knob.

16) Disengage the pawl, and shift the pulley and the bearing.

3)

1)

2)

.te

20) Remove three screws, and remove the DUP motor unit and the
belt. (AR-M201)

1)

4)

17) Remove the paper exit roller, and remove the belt, the pulley,
and the bearing.

1)
2)
1)

2)

1)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 12

3)

21) Remove five screws and the grounding wire.


For the AR-203E/5420/M200, remove the main drive plate and
the belt.
For the AR-M201, remove the main drive plate.

23) Remove four screws, and remove the paper guide unit.
(AR-203E/5420)

1)
1)

1)

2)

2)

1)

om

1)

1)
AR-203E/5420/M200
AL-2030 only
3)

.c

1)

py

24) Remove four screws, and remove the lower paper guide unit.
(AR-M200/M201)
[Note for installation]

hr
an

co

Fit the lower paper guide hole (a) with the shifter gear hole (b)
so that the black resin (c) of the shifter unit can be checked.

c b

CAUTION:Attach the gears securely

22) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressure
release solenoid and the paper feed solenoid.

4)

.te

3)

1)

2)

1)

1)
4)
2)

3)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 13

1)

1)
1)

2)

25) Put the lower paper guide unit upside down, remove two
screws, and remove the shifter motor. (AR-M200/M201)

30) Remove four screws, and remove the LSU unit.

1)

1)

1)

1)

2)

.c

om

2)

[Note for assembling the LSU]

27) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing, and remove the
shifter roller. (AR-M200/M201)

When installing the LSU, turn the LSU clockwise and fix with
screws in order to provide an attachment backlash in the proper
direction.

py

26) Remove the screw, and remove the grounding plate and the
gear. (AR-M200/M201)

Observe the following sequence of fixing screws.

hr
an

co

1)

.te

2)

3)

28) Disengage the pawl, and remove the pulley.

29) Shift and remove the shifter unit. (AR-M200/M201)

3)

2)

4)

3)
1)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 14

31) Remove the screw, slide the left cabinet to the left to detach it.
Remove each pawl, and remove the paper exit tray.

34) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-circular earth plate and the PS roller unit.
35) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS
roller unit.

3)

5)

4)

PS roller unit

1)

2)

1)

py

2)

4)

.c

PS semi-circular
PS
semi-circuler
earth
plate
earth plate

5)

om

Use grease of
Floil FG40H
only to apply to
this section.

co

4)

3)

32) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector.

33) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediate
frame unit to remove.

.te

4)

hr
an

36) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide.

3)

1)

2)

2)

2)

1)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 15

37) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1
sensor PWB.

6. Manual paper feed section


A. List
No.
1
2
3
4

1)

Part name Ref.


Manual transport roller
Cassette detection switch
PPD1 sensor PWB
Side door detection unit

B. Disassembly procedure
Multi unit

2)

1)

.c

38) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller.

Clutch unit
4)

hr
an

Paper feed
roller

co

Back

py

39) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit.

5)

om

1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover.

4)

.te

3)

Front

2)

1)

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 16

2)

2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.

4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit
from the multi paper feed upper frame.

2)

2)
1)

Wire treatment

.c

2)

5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed


roller B9.

co

1)

py

3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upper
frame.

1)

1)

1)

3)

L O CK
T O

.te

hr
an

1)

2)

1)

om

1)

Back

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 17

2)

D. Pressure plate holder attachment

6) Remove the pick-up roller.

1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not
covered with the seal M1-N.

Seal M1-N

1)
Pressure plate
holder
Attachment
reference

om

2)
7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid.

1)

co

py

.c

Attachment
reference

7. Rear frame section


A. List

hr
an

3)

Multi paper feed


solenoid

No.
1
2
3
4

2)

Part name Ref.


Scanner motor
Main motor
Exhaust fan motor
Main PWB

1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear
cabinet cover.

1)

.te

B. Disassembly procedure

2)

C. Assembly procedure

For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

2)

1)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 18

1)

2) Remove the connector.


3) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the
AR-FX13 is installed)

7) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the


exhaust fan motor.
Note: Be careful of the installing directions of the fan.
Attach it so that the blowing direction faces outside.

1)

2)

2)

3)

3)

om

1)

2)

2)

.c

2)
4) Disconnect the connector.
5) Remove two screws, and remove the scanner motor.

Blowing direction

py

8) Disconnect the connectors.

co

9) Remove the five screws, and remove the MCU PWB.

1)

hr
an

3)

1)
1)

2)
3)

.te

2)

2)
1)
1)

1) 2)

1)

6) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the main
motor.

2)

C. Assembly procedure

For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

3)

1)

2)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 19

Power section

2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV cover.

1)

A. List
No.
1

Part name Ref.


Power PWB

2)

B. Disassembly procedure
1) Disconnect each connector.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line.
3) Remove two screws, and remove the power PWB unit.

1)

1)

om

4)
1)
1)

3) Remove the used developer.


2)
1)

py

.c

3)

5)
4)

4) Supply new developer.

co

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

hr
an

9. DV unit section
A. Developer

.te

1) Remove the screw, slide the pawl to the right side, and remove
the TN guide.

1) Peel off the old DV seal.


2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol.
3) Attach the new DV seal to the reference position.
DV side seal F

1)

B. DV seal

DV side seal R
D

B
0.5

C 0.5
0.5

2)

0.5

B
0
X

Bump
B

X-X

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 20

Magnification ratio:
200%

C. DV blade

E. DV sensor

1) Peel off the old DV blade.

1) Remove the Mylar.

2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol.

2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV sensor.

3) Attach the new DV blade to the reference position.

* Clean the sensor (A) section.


A

1)
B
0.5

DV blade IC

2)

3)
2)
DV-BOX AS

om

D. DV doctor

1) Remove the screw, and remove the DV doctor.

.c

* Clean the edge (A) section.

10. Duplex motor section (AR-M201 only)

py

A. List
No.
1

1)
A

Part name Ref.


Duplex motor

B. Disassembly procedure

co

2)

1) Remove the rear cabinet.

1)

2) Remove two screws.


3) Remove the Duplex motor cover.

Note for installation

4) Remove the Duplex motor.

hr
an

1) Insert the DG check gauge as shown in the figure.

2) After checking, install the doctor gap and fix it with a screw.

* Apply screw lock to the screw tightening section as shown in the


figure below.
MG-ROL

DG check
gauge

.te

C
DG sect
F/R :1.5 ion
DG se 5
:1. ctio 0.15
5
n
0.1
0

* After checking the DG,


apply screw lock.

FRONT

20

10

10

REAR

R
110

20

DG check
position

Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the Duplex motor


gear with the belt on the main body side.

C. Assembly procedure
DG check
gauge

DG check
gauge

DG check
gauge

1
2

For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 21

11. Reverse roller section (AR-M201 only)


A. List
No.
1

Part name Ref.


Reverse roller

B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove four screws.
2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire.

om

3) Remove the reverse unit.

py

.c

co

3
1

.te

hr
an

4) Bend the reverse roller and remove it.

C. Assembly procedure

For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 22

[9] ADJUSTMENTS

5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio.


Main scanning direction magnification ratio

1. Optical section

A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment

X 100 (%)

(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.)


Original (Scale)

The copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanning direction and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use
SIM 48-1.

(1)

Copy image dimensions


Original dimension

mm
1/2mm

10

20

100

110

120

JAPAN

HARDENED
STAINLESS

130

140

150
Shizuoka

Outline

The main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment is made automatically or manually.

Paper feed
direction

mm
1/2mm

HARDENED
STAINLESS

JAPAN

10

20

100

110

120

130

140

150
Shizuoka

Automatic adjustment: The width of the reference line marked on


the shading correction plate is scanned to perform the main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment automatically.

Main scanning direction magnification ratio


adjustment

a. Cases when the adjustment is required


2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.

co

3) When "U2" trouble occurs.


b. Necessary tools

7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the main scanning direction copy


magnification ratio adjustment mode.
To select the adjustment mode, use the [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201).
In the case of the automatic adjustment, when the START switch is
pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading
to scan the width of the reference line, calculating the correction
value and displaying and storing this value.

1) When the main PWB is replaced.

4) When repairing or replacing the optical section.

6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified


range. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures.

py

(2)

110

om

The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted by


changing the carriage (scanner) scanning speed.

Copy

.c

Manual adjustment: The adjustment is made by [Copy quantity]


keys (or [Numeric] keys for the AR-M200/M201) operations. (In
either of the automatic and manual adjustments, the zoom data register set value is changed for adjustment.)

Comparison point

Reference

After execution of the automatic adjustment, go out from the simulation mode and make a copy to check the magnification ratio.
If the magnification ratio is not in the specified range (100 1.0%),
manually adjust as follows.

Screwdriver (+)
Scale

hr
an

(AR-203E/5420)

c. Adjustment procedure

1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long


scale for precise adjustment.)

Adjustment mode
Display lamp
Main scanning direction
TEXT mode lamp
magnification ratio
OC mode sub scan
PHOTO mode lamp
direction magnification ratio

Default
50
50

.te

(AR-M200/M201)
Adjustment mode

Main scan direction


magnification ratio
OC mode sub scan
direction magnification ratio

Display
LED
Default
item
F-R
PRINT mode lamp
50
SCAN SCAN mode lamp

50

8) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the copy quantity key (or [Numeric] key for the
AR-M200/M201), and press the [START] key.

9) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio is
within the specified range.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is
changed by 0.1%.

(3)

Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio

a. Cases when the adjustment is required

2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.


3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper.

1) When the scanner unit drive section is disassembled or the part


is replaced.

4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.

2) When the main PWB is replaced.


3) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
4) When "U2" trouble occurs.
b. Necessary tools
Scale

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 1

c. Adjustment procedure

B. Image position adjustment

1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a


long scale for precise adjustment.)

There are following eleven kinds of image position adjustments,


which are made by laser control except for the image scan start
position adjustment. For the adjustments, SIM 50-01 and 50-10 are
used.
Mode
Print start position (Main cassette paper feed)
Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed)
Print start position (Manual paper feed)
Image lead edge void amount
Image scan start position
Image rear edge void amount (Cassette paper feed)
Image rear edge void amount (Manual paper feed)
Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed)
Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed)
Print center offset (Manual paper feed)
2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed)

(AR-203E/5420)

om

No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

SIM
50-01
50-01
50-01
50-01
50-01
50-01
50-01
50-10
50-10
50-10
50-10

.c

To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-01, use the [Exposure
mode selector] key.

3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper.


4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.
5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio
using the formula below.
Copy image dimensions
Original dimension

X 100 (%)

hr
an

110

HARDDENCD
STAINLESS

JAPAN

10

20

100

110

120

130

140

Shizuoka

10

20

100

110

120

JAPAN

130

140

Paper feed
direction

Shizuoka

Reference

Comparison point

AE, manual feed lamp


TEXT lamp
PHOTO lamp
AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp

The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting


lamps are as shown in the table below.

150

.te

mm
1/2mm

AE, 2nd cassette lamp

To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-10, use the [Exposure
mode selector] key.

150

HARDDENCD
STAINLESS

Lamp ON
AE, main cassette lamp

: Supported for the installing model and skipped for non-installing mode.

Original (Scale)

mm
1/2mm

Adjustment mode
Print start position
(Main cassette paper feed)
Print start position
(2nd cassette paper feed)
Print start position
(Manual paper feed)
Image lead edge void quantity
Image scan start position
Image rear edge void quantity

co

py

The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting


lamps are as shown in the table below.

2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.

Copy

6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within the


specified range. (100 1.0%).
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures.

Adjustment mode
Print center offset
(Main cassette paper feed)
Print center offset (2nd cassette)
Print center offset
(Manual paper feed)
Second side center offset

Lamp ON
AE, main cassette lamp
AE, 2nd cassette lamp
AE, manual paper feed
lamp
TEXT lamp

: Supported for the installing model and skipped for non-installing mode.

7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the sub scanning direction copy


magnification ratio adjustment mode.
To select the adjustment mode, use the [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
] [
] key for the AR-M200/M201). (PHOTO
lamp ON (or SCAN mode lamp ON for the AR-M200/M201))

Machine with the multi manual paper feed unit

8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the [Copy quantity] keys (or [Numeric] keys for
the AR-M200/M201), and press the [START] key.
Repeat procedures 1) - 8) until the sub scanning direction actual
copy magnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified
range.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration is
changed by 0.1%.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 2

The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting


lamps are as shown in the table below.
Adjustment mode
Print start position
(Main cassette paper feed)
(*) Print start position
(2nd cassette paper feed)
Print start position
(Manual paper feed)
Image lead edge void
amount
Image scan start position
Image rear edge void
amount (Cassette paper
feed)
Image rear edge void
amount (Manual paper
feed)

Display item
Lamp ON
TRAY1
COPY mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
TRAY2
COPY mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
MFT
COPY mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp
DEN-A
PRINT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
RRC-A
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
DEN-B
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
RRC-B
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp

To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-10, use the [


key.

][

The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting


lamps are as shown in the table below.

(1)

Lead edge adjustment

6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm).


When the value of B is increased by 10, the void amount is
increased by about 1mm. For 25 or less, however, the void
amount becomes zero. (Default: 50)

(Example)
Distance between paper lead
edge and image: H = 5mm

Image loss:
R = 3mm

5mm

10mm

co

Display item
Lamp ON
TRAY1
COPY mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
TRAY2
COPY mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
MFT
COPY mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp
SIDE2
PRINT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp

5) Measure the distance (H mm) between the paper lead edge


and the image print start position.
Set A = 10 X H (mm). (Example: Set the value of A to 50.)
When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is
shifted to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50)

(2)

Image rear edge void amount adjustment

1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11" x 8 1/2" paper


size as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2"
x 14" paper.

hr
an

Adjustment mode
Print center offset
(Main cassette paper feed)
Print center offset
(2nd cassette paper feed)
Print center offset
(Manual paper feed)
2nd print center offset
(Main cassette paper feed)

4) Measure the image loss amount (R mm) of the scale image.


Set C = 10 X R (mm). (Example: Set the value of C to 30.)
When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is
decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)

om

][

.c

To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-01, use the [


key.

py

(AR-M200/M201)

B4 or 8 1/2 14 paper

A4 size rear edge

.te

1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown
below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper.

2) Execute SIM 50-01 to select the image rear edge void amount
adjustment mode.
The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge.

Void amount (Standard value: 2 - 3mm)

Scale image
2) Execute SIM 50-01
3) Set the print start position (AE lamp ON) (A), the lead edge void
amount (TEXT lamp ON) (B), and the scan start position
(PHOTO lamp ON) (C) to 0, and make a copy of a scale at
100%. (AR-203E/5420)
For the AR-M200/M201, the following LEDs are lighted:
AE lamp/COPY mode lamp: (A)
TEXT lamp/PRINT mode lamp: (B)
PHOTO lamp/SCAN mode lamp: (C)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 3

Paper rear edge

4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change


the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure.
The default value is 50.

2. Copy density adjustment

Note: The rear edge void cannot be checked with the first sheet
after entering the simulation mode, the first sheet after
turning off/on the power, or the first sheet after inserting the
cassette. Use the second or later sheet to check the rear
edge void.

The copy density adjustment must be performed in the following


cases:

(3)

Center offset adjustment

A. Copy density adjustment timing

When maintenance is performed.


When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted.
When the optical section is cleaned.
When a part in the optical section is replaced.

1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment
so that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the document guide.

When the OPC drum is replaced.


When the main control PWB is replaced.
When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced.
When the memory trouble (U2) occurs.

om

Test chart for the center position adjustment.


Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2" x 11" paper in the paper
transport direction.

When the optical section is disassembled.

Document guide

B. Note for copy density adjustment

1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment


Clean the optical section.

Clean or replace the charger wire.

Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and the developing bias voltage are in the specified range.

Copy paper
(A4 or 8 1/2 11)

C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment

.c

Center

B4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper

The user program AE setting should be "3."


1

co

2) Execute SIM 50-10 to select the print center offset (cassette


paper feed) adjustment mode.
The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.

py

One of the following test charts:


UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE

10

3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properly
positioned.
The standard value is 0 2mm from the paper center.

hr
an

Test chart comparison table

2.0mm or less

(Copy A)

Copy image

Shift

Copy paper
folding line

2.0mm or less

(Copy B)

.te

Copy image

Shift

Copy paper
folding line

(Paper feed direction)

4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the


set value and repeat the adjustment procedure.
When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is
shifted by 0.1mm toward the rear frame.

UKOG0162FCZZ
DENSITY
No.
UKOG0089CSZZ
DENSITY
No.
KODAK
GRAY
SCALE

0.1

0.2

0.3

10

0.5 1.9

19

D. Features of copy density adjustment


For the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function provided in the image process LSI is used.
List of the adjustment modes

For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feed
adjustment mode and perform the similar procedures.

Auto mode
Manual mode

Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by


the CCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of
document guide, there is no need to adjust manually.

Photo mode

Manual T/S mode


T/S Auto mode

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 4

Brightness 1 step only


Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the
center brightness is made.
Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the
center brightness is made.
Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the
center brightness is made.
Brightness 1 step only

E. Copy density adjustment procedure


Use SIM 46-1 to set the copy density for each copy mode.
For selection of modes, use the [Exposure mode selector] key (or
[
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201).

(1)

Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting

1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter) reference line on the document table. Then place a A4
(14" x 8 1/2") white paper on the test chart and close the document cover.

Adjustment
mode
Auto mode
Text mode
Photo mode
Text T/S mode

Display
item
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT

Auto T/S mode TSAE

Sharp gray chart


adjustment level
"3" is slightly copied.
"3" is slightly copied.
"3" is slightly copied.
"3" is slightly copied.

LED

COPY mode lamp


PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp "3" is slightly copied.
SCAN mode lamp

3) Make a copy.
Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of the
exposure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale).
Sharp Gray Scale adjustment level

White paper

10

10

om

Non toner
save
mode

Slightly copied.

Not copied.

Test chart

.c

Toner
save
mode

py

Slightly copied.

Not copied.

(When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy


quantity display.

(2)

Perform the adjustment in each mode.

Increase the value displayed on the copy quantity display.

co

(When too dark):

1) Execute SIM 46-01 (300dpi). To adjust in 600dpi, execute SIM


46-02.

The value can be set in the range of 1 - 99.

3. High voltage adjustment

hr
an

2) AR-203E/5420

Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select


key. Set the exposure level to 3 for all adjustment. (Except for
the auto mode.)

A. Main charger (Grid bias)

(1)

Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10M or


more measurement.

(2)

Exposure mode
display lamp
Auto lamp ON
Manual lamp ON
Photo lamp ON
Manual lamp/Photo lamp ON

Sharp gray chart


adjustment level
"3" is slightly copied.
"3" is slightly copied.
"3" is slightly copied.
"3" is slightly copied.

Auto lamp/Photo lamp ON

"3" is slightly copied.

Adjustment
mode
Auto mode
Manual mode
Photo mode
Manual T/S
mode
Auto T/S
mode

.te

(1) Exposure mode select key/display lamp


(2) [Exposure mode selector] key/
display lamp

Note:

After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output. Do
not reverse the sequence.
Procedures
1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V.
2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3
(GRID) of high voltage section of the power PWB and set the
negative side to the frame ground (power frame).
3) Execute SIM 8-2. (The main charger output is supplied for 30
sec in the grid voltage HIGH output mode.)
4) Adjust the control volume (VRG1) so that the output voltage is
580 12V.

2) AR-M200/M201
Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure key. Set the
exposure level to 3 (center) for all adjustment. (Except for the
auto mode.)
VRG1
TEXT
| | | | |

1
2
2

1
2
1

(1) Exposure mode, level display

2
1

(2) Exposure key

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 5

B. DV bias check
Note: A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1G must
be use for correct check.
The adjustment volume is locked, and no adjustment can
be made.

2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown


below, in the S-D mode and the D-S mode.

Scale (S-D mode)

Scale (D-S mode)

Procedures
1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V.
2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1
(DV BIAS) and set the negative side to the frame ground
(power frame).
3) Execute simulation 50-18.
Mode
Display item Default
LED
OC memory reverse
OC
50
COPY mode lamp
output position
SPF/RSPF memory
SPF
50
PRINT mode lamp
reverse output position

om

3) Execute SIM 8-1 to output the developing bias for 30sec, and
check that the output is 400 8V.

VRDV

Select the SPF/RSPF memory reverse output position, and


press [START] key to make a copy.

.c

Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than
4.0 mm in the SPF/RSPF mode.
An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in
image loss.

py

Front edge of paper

co

The front edge of the


scale on test chart

4. Duplex adjustment

5 10

hr
an

less than 4 mm

Void area

A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in


memory for duplex copying (AR-M200/M201)

This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of a


document set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge position of an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode.

.te

That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing


mode (image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image
data is once stored in memory.
The image data is read, starting from its front end in the document
delivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the
OC mode)and stored in memory.

This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position, in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data.

In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be
adjusted by changing the document read end position.
(Adjustment procedure)

1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of
a sheet of A4 white paper or letter paper)

2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side)

B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy


mode (AR-M201)
This is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end
void) in duplex copying.
In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from
the rear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to
make a void area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paper jam at the fusing part.
There are two adjustment modes:
1) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (TEXT)

5 10

This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size is recognized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted by
changing the trailing edge image laser OFF timing.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 6

2) Print start position (Duplex back surface) (SPF/RSPF) 50-19


(PHOTO)
The size (length) of a document read from the SPF/RSPF is
detected, the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut to make a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity
at the time when the cassette paper size is not recognized.)
The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image
cut trailing edge void quantity (SPF/RSPF) is adjusted.
(Adjustment procedure)

(1)

Paper trailing edge void quantity

2) Execute SIM 50-19 to turn on the SCAN mode lamp and make
the printing mode in the S-D mode.
3) Remove and reinsert the cassette.
Note: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy during
this adjustment.
4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the
image.
Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm. An
increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in
void area.
Void position to be checked

1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side
of a sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper)

5. Automatic black level correction

2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below.

a. Cases when the adjustment is required


1) When the main PWB is replaced.

om

Document guide

The trailing edge has a scale

2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.


3) When "U2" trouble occurs.

4) When repairing or replacing the optical section.


b. Adjustment procedure

.c

Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level
adjustment of white balance.

py

When SIM 63-02 is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number.
Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the
correction document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on
the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the
plate left center.

co

Table glass
3) Using the user simulation [18], set the paper size of the first
cassette.

10

Letter paper: 4

hr
an

A4 paper: 3

4) Execute SIM 50-19 to turn on the PRINT mode lamp and make
the printing mode in OC-D mode.

Chart back surface

Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale
on the image.
Void position to be check

When [START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart
and calculates the correction value.

.te

Paper

Default: 0
If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.

AR-M200/M201
c. Operation

1) Initial display

The trailing edge void on the first printing surface


is shown above.

Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm. An increase in


1 of setting represents 0.1 mm in void area.

(2)

After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on


the display section.

Print start position (Duplex back surface)

1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown


below.

63-02 BLACK LEVEL


0
2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key: Correction start
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
EXECUTING...
<During canceling - When [Clear]/[Clear All] key is pressed->
After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby
mode.
THE JOB IS BEING
CANCELED.
3) After execution
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** OK
3) In case of an error

Scale (S-D mode)

63-02 BLACK LEVEL


*** ERR

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 7

To enter the serviceman simulation mode, press the keys as follows:

Sub
code
03
06
08

AR-203E/AR-5420
09

[Clear] key Exposure mode selector key [Clear] key


Exposure mode selector key

03
05

AR-M200/AR-M201
[#] key [] key [Clear] key [] key
To cancel the simulation mode, press the [Clear All] key.

06

2. Key rule

07

[ ] [ ] key:

Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE


Setting of the adjustment values for the
adjustment-related simulations
When [%] key is pressed simultaneously, the
value is displayed in the descending
sequence such as [0] [9], not as [0] [1].
Settlement
<In case of simulations for print>
[START] key: Settlement / Print

[START] key:

Selection of an item
(Interrupting operation check) Returns to the
upper hierarchy.
On the initial display (00-00), it terminates the
simulation.
Exits from the simulation mode.
For a simulation of adjustment, the display
returns to the initial display (00-00).

09

02

04

10
14
16
20
21
22

hr
an

co

[Exposure mode
selector] key:
[Clear] key:

08

SPF/RSPF Motor ON (Only the AR-203E/M200/


M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Resist clutch ON (SPF) (AR-203E only)
RSPF paper feed solenoid operation check
(Only the AR-M200/M201 with the RSPF installed)
RSPF reverse solenoid operation check
(Only the AR-M200/M201 with the RSPF installed)
Shifter operation check (AR-M200/M201)
Operation panel display check
Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check
Copy lamp ON
Paper feed solenoid ON
Resist solenoid ON
Warm-up display and aging with jam
Intermittent aging
Shift to copy with the warm-up display
Developing bias
Main charger (Grid high)
Grid voltage (Low)
Transfer charger
Duplex motor normal rotation operation check
(AR-M201 only)
Duplex motor reverse operation check
(AR-M201 only)
Duplex motor rotation speed adjustment
(AR-M201 only)
Toner motor aging
Cancel of troubles other than U2
Cancel of U2 trouble
Maintenance counter clear
Maintenance cycle setting
Maintenance counter display
Maintenance preset display
JAM total counter display
Total counter display
Developer counter display
SPF/RSPF counter display (Only the AR-203E/
M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
FAX-related counter display
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Drum counter display
CRUM type display
ROM version display
Duplex counter display (AR-M201 only)
Copy counter display
Printer counter display
Scanner mode counter display
(AR-203E/M200/M201)
Scanner counter display
SPF/RSPF JAM counter display (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
JAM total counter clear
SPF/RSPF counter clear (Only the AR-203E/
M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Duplex counter clear (AR-M201 only)
Developer counter clear
Drum counter clear
Copy counter clear
Printer counter clear
FAX counter clear
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Scanner counter clear
SPF/RSPF JAM total counter clear (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)

py

AR-203E/AR-5420

03
01
02
03
01
02
01
06
08
01
02
03
06
01

Operation

om

1. Entering the simulation mode

Sim
No.
02

.c

[10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES

AR-M200/AR-M201
[Numeric] key:

][

] key:

.te

Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE


Selection of an item
Setup of an adjustment value in case of
simulations for adjustment
Selection of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE
Selection of an item

[Clear All] key:

3. List of simulations
Sim
No.
01

02

Sub
code
01
02
06
01
02

Operation
Mirror scan operation
Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display
Aging of mirror scanning
SPF/RSPF aging operation (Only the AR-203E/
M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
SPF/RSPF sensor status display (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)

11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19

[Clear] key:

Settlement
<In case of simulations for print>
[OK]/[ENTER] key: Settlement (Without print)
[START] key: Settlement / Print
(Interrupting operation check) Returns to the
upper hierarchy.
In case of simulation of operation check,
terminates the operations.
Exits from the simulation mode.
For a simulation of adjustment, the display
returns to the initial display (00-00).

[OK]/[ENTER]/
[START] key:

01
01
01
02
04
05
06
08

21
22
24

01
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
13
14

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 1

07

43

46

01
04
05
14
01
02
12

13
14
15
18
19
20

02
08

61
63

03
01
02
12
13
01
01

64
66

02

03
04

05
07
10

01

05

49
50

01
01
06

10

12
13
17
18

24
30
33
34
37

w
48

11

21

29
30
31
32
39

51
53

om

42
43
54
62
01
06

19

Document off-center adjustment


Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex
copy (Only the AR-M201, or the AR-M200 with the
RSPF installed)
Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment
(AR-M201 only)
Resist quantity adjustment
SPF/RSPF scan position automatic adjustment
(Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the
SPF/RSPF installed)
Polygon motor check (HSYNC output check)
Shading check
Black level automatic correction
Light quantity stabilization wait time setting
Light quantity stabilization band setting
Self print (1by2 mode)
FAX soft SW setting
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAX soft SW initializing
(excluding the adjustment values)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAX PWB memory check
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Signal send mode (Max. value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Signal send mode (Soft SW set value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Image memory content print
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Image memory content clear
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
300bps signal send (Max. value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
300bps signal send (Soft SW set value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Dial test
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
DTMF signal send (Max. value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAX information print
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAST SRAM clear
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
TEL/LIU status change check
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Signal detection check
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Communication time measurement
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Speaker sound volume setting
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Time setting/check
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
USB receive speed adjustment (USB1.1)
(AR-203E only)

.c

30
41

10
02
03
04
06
07
20
30
37
39
40

Operation

py

26

Sub
code
12
18

co

01

Scanner mode counter clear


(AR-203E/M200/M201)
Main motor operation check
(Cooling fan motor rotation check)
Polygon motor ON
SPF/RSPF setup
Second cassette setup
Machine duplex setup
Destination setup
Machine conditions check
Rear edge void setup
CE mark support control ON/OFF
Cancel of stop at developer life over
Memory capacity check
Polygon motor OFF time setup (Time required for
turning OFF after completion of printing)
Transfer ON timing control setup
Side void setup
life correction setting
Energy-save mode copy lamp setup
Paper sensor status display
OC cover float detection level adjustment (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)
OC cover float detection margin setting (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)
Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy)
Fusing temperature setting in multi copy
Fusing temperature setup in duplex copy
(AR-M201 only)
Fusing start temperature setting
Copy density adjustment (300dpi)
Copy density adjustment (600dpi)
Density adjustment in the FAX mode
(Collective adjustment)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAX mode density adjustment (Normal text)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Image contrast adjustment (300dpi)
Exposure mode setup
SPF/RSPF exposure correction (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Image contrast adjustment (600dpi)
AE limit adjustment
Image sharpness adjustment
Copier color reproduction setup
FAX mode sharpness adjustment
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Front/rear (main scanning) direction and scan (sub
scanning) direction magnification ratio adjustment
SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification
ratio in copying (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201
with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Flash ROM program writing mode
Lead edge image position
Copy lead edge position adjustment (SPF/RSPF)
(Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the
SPF/RSPF installed)
Center offset adjustment

Sim
No.
50

hr
an

25

Operation

.te

Sub
code
15

Sim
No.
24

38
67

50

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 2

4. Descriptions of various simulations


Main
code
01

Sub
code
01

Contents

Details of function/operation

Mirror scan operation

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the home position is checked and the mirror base
performs full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio.
During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed.
The mirror home position sensor status is displayed with the "Drum replacement required lamp
(or the copy mode indicator for the AR-M200/M201)". (When the mirror is in the home position,
the lamp lights up.)
During operation, the copy lamp lights up.

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
01-01 SCAN CHK
- 100% +

2) [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO]
key
01-01 SCAN CHK
- 78% +
2) [

] key

3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key
01-01 SCAN CHK
EXECUTING... -

78% +

.c

1) Initial display

om

When [Clear] key is pressed, if the operation is on the way, it is terminated and the machine
goes to the sub code entry standby mode.

01-01 SCAN CHK


- 99% +
] key

py

2) [

01-01 SCAN CHK


- 101% +

Mirror home position sensor


(MHPS) status display

[Function]
Monitors the mirror home position sensor, and makes the "Drum replacement required lamp (or
the copy mode indicator for the AR-M200/M201)" turn on during the sensor ON status.

co

02

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display

06

hr
an

01-02 MHP-SENSOR
EXECUTING...

Aging of mirror scanning

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of
the set magnification ratio.
During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed.
After 3sec, the mirror base performs full scan again.

.te

When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed once, the ready lamp remains OFF.
The mirror home position sensor status is displayed on the "Drum replacement required lamp
(or the copy mode indicator for the AR-M200/M201)." (The lamp is ON when the mirror is in the
home position.)

01

SPF/RSPF aging operation


(Only the AR-203E/M200/
M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)

02

During aging, the copy lamp is ON.


[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
The operation is similar to simulation 01-01.
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the set magnification ratio is obtained. For the
SPF, the single-face document transport is performed. For the RSPF, the duplex document
transport is performed.
However, the operating conditions don't matter and the operation is not stopped even in case of
a jam. Also the magnification ratio is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
The operation is similar to simulation 01-01.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 3

Main
code
02

Sub
code
02

Contents

Details of function/operation

SPF/RSPF sensor status


display (Only the AR-203E/
M200/M201 with the
SPF/RSPF installed)

[Function]
The ON/OFF status of the SPF/RSPF sensors can be checked with the LCD/LED.
When a sensor is ON, the sensor name is displayed on the LCD/LED.
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
SPID

Sensor
Document set sensor
RSPF document transport sensor
RSPF paper feed cover open/close
sensor
RSPF paper exit sensor

SPPD
SDSW

Display item
(AR-203E)
TD cartridge replacement required
lamp
Misfeed lamp

SPOD

1) Initial display

2) When the sensor is ON:

02-02 SPF SENSOR

08

Resist clutch ON (SPF)


(AR-203E only)
RSPF paper feed solenoid
operation check
(Only the AR-M200/M201
with the RSPF installed)

.c

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the motor rotates for 10sec at the speed corresponding to the set magnification ratio.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
The operation is similar to simulation 01-01.
When the [START] key is pressed, the SPF resist clutch (SRRC) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF
(500 ms) 20 times.
[Function]
The RSPF paper feed solenoid (SPUS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by
the use of the solenoid drive control Bios.

py

06

SPF/RSPF Motor ON
(Only the AR-203E/M200/
M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)

02-02 SPF SENSOR


SPID SPPD SDSW SPOD

[Operation]
1) Initial display

co

03

om

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)

09

hr
an

02-08 SPF SPUS CHK


EXECUTING...

RSPF reverse solenoid


operation check
(Only the AR-M200/M201
with the RSPF installed)

[Function]
The RSPF reverse solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the
use of the solenoid drive control Bios.
[Operation]

1) Initial display

03

03

.te

02-09 RSPF SPFS CHK


EXECUTING...

Shifter operation check


(AR-M200/M201)

[Function]
The shifter is moved back and forth in four reciprocations.
[Operation]

03-03 SHIFTER CHK


EXECUTING...

1) Initial display

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 4

Main
code
05

Sub
code
01

Contents

Details of function/operation

Operation panel display


check

[Function]
<LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)>
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, all the LCD's on the operation panel are turned
ON (all pixels ON).
After 5sec of ON, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
When [Mode Select] key is pressed under the all ON state, the mode is shifted to the individual
ON mode, where the LED's are turned on one by one from the left upper end to the left lower
side then from the right upper side to the right lower side. (All the pixels of LCD are lighted
simultaneously.) After lighting all the LCD's sequentially, all the LCD's are lighted simultaneously. After 5sec from lighting all the LCD's simultaneously, the machine goes into the sub
code entry standby mode. (Cycle of individual ON mode: ON 300ms, OFF 20ms)

om

When [Clear] key is pressed in the LED check mode, the machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
When [START] key is pressed, the machine goes into the key input check mode.

py

.c

<Key input check mode>


When the machine goes into the key input check mode, the value display section indicates "
" (For the AR-M200/M201, 0 of the LCD is indicated).
When any key is pressed after pressing a key on the operation panel, "+1" is added to the
value.
Once a key is pressed, it is not recounted.
When [START] key is pressed, counting is made and the machine goes into the LED ON check
mode (LED all ON status) after 3sec.
When [Clear] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second
time, the key check mode is retained as well as when another key is pressed.
(Note in the key input check mode)
Be sure to press [START] key at the last. (If it is pressed on the way, the machine goes into
the LED ON check mode.) (LED all ON status)

co

Multi key input is ignored.

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
<LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)>

hr
an

1) Initial display

2) When [Mode Select] key is pressed, the machine goes into the individual ON mode.

<Key input check mode>


1) Initial display

2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key

05-01 LCD/LED CHK.

Fusing lamp, cooling fan


operation check

02

03

05-01 LCD/LED CHK.

.te

Copy lamp ON

**

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON for 500ms and OFF
for 500ms 5 times. During this period, the cooling fan motor rotates.
Note:
When the CE mark setting is ON, the slow start function may operate depending on the
employed frequency. If the state of the heater lamp cannot be checked, temporarily set SIM 2630 to "0" and check the lamp state. After confirming that the heater lamp is ON, set SIM 26-30
to "1" again.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
05-02 HT LAMP CHK
EXECUTING...
[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the copy lamp turns ON for 5sec.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
05-03 C-LAMP CHK
EXECUTING...

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 5

Main
code
06

Sub
code
01

Contents

Details of function/operation

Paper feed solenoid ON

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the selected paper feed solenoid repeats ON for
500ms and OF for 500ms 20 times.
When tray select key (or [Numeric] key or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) is pressed,
the paper feed solenoid setting is switched.
Code number
0
1
2

Setting
CPFS1
CPFS2
MPFS

Remark
Operation is possible only when No. 2 cassette is installed.

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
2) [Numeric] key or [
06-01 PSOL CHK
1:CPFS2

06-01 PSOL CHK


0:CPFS1

2) [Numeric] key or [
06-01 PSOL CHK
2:MPFS
Resist solenoid ON

] key

4) Returns to the initial


display.

py

1) Initial display
06-02 RES.R SOL CHK
EXECUTING...

[Function]
Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies.
When the simulation is executed, warm-up is started and warm-up time is added for every second from 0 and displayed.
When warm-up is completed, addition is stopped. When [Clear All] key is pressed, the ready
lamp lights up.
After that, enter the copy quantity with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201)
and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to repeat copying of the set quantity (interval 0sec).
To cancel the simulation, turn off the power or execute a simulation which causes hardware
reset.

co

Warm-up display and aging


with jam

hr
an

01

06-01 PSOL CHK


EXECUTING...

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the resist solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and
OFF for 500ms 20 times.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)

07

3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key

.c

02

] key

om

1) Initial display

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display

2) After 10sec
07-01 W-UP/AGING

07-01 W-UP/AGING

.te

Intermittent aging

06

08

10

[Function]
Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies.
When the simulation is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted.
Enter the copy quantity with the [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and
press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key, and copying is executed to make the set quantity of copies,
and the ready state is kept for 3sec, and copying is executed again to make the set quantity of
copies. These operations are repeated.
To cancel the simulation, turn off the power or execute a simulation which executes hardware reset.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display (Basic display of copy)
READY TO COPY
100%
A4

Shift to copy with the


warm-up display

[Function]
Enter the simulation code, and warm-up is started and warm-up time is counted for every second from 0 and displayed.
When [Clear All] key is pressed during counting up, "0" is displayed on the display and counting
is stopped. However, warm-up is continued.
After completion of warm-up, counting is terminated. (The aging function is removed from simulation 07-01.)
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display

2) After 10sec
07-08 W-UP C-MODE

07-08 W-UP C-MODE


0

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 6

10

Main
code
08

Sub
code
01

Contents

Details of function/operation

Developing bias

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the developing bias signal is turned ON for 30sec.
When, however, an actual output value is measured, use simulation 25-01.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
08-01 DVLP BIAS SET.
EXECUTING...

02

Main charger (Grid high)

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid
voltage HIGH move.

om

After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
08-02 MHV(H) SET.
EXECUTING...
Grid voltage (Low)

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid
voltage LOW move.

.c

03

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display

06

co

08-03 MHV(L) SET.


EXECUTING...

py

After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.

Transfer charger

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the transfer charger is outputted for 30sec.

hr
an

After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display

08-06 THV SET.


EXECUTING...

09

01

Duplex motor normal


rotation operation check
(AR-M201 only)

[Function]
Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the normal direction (paper exit direction) for 30sec.

.te

After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.

[Operation]

Duplex motor reverse


operation check
(AR-M201 only)

02

1) Initial display

04

09-01 DPLX ROT.


EXECUTING...

[Function]
Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the reverse direction for 30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
09-02 DPLX ROT.REV.
EXECUTING...

Duplex motor rotation speed


adjustment (AR-M201 only)

[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [Numeric] key and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key. The
entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. The
greater the set value is, the higher the speed is. The smaller the set value is, the lower the
speed is. (Setting range: 1 - 13, Default: 8)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED
8( 1-13)

2) [Numeric] key
09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED
7( 1-13)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 7

3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key
09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED
7( 1-13)

Main
code
10

Sub
code

Contents

Details of function/operation

Toner motor aging

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the toner motor is rotated for 30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the main code entry standby mode.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
10-00 TONER MOTOR
EXECUTING...

14

Cancel of troubles other than


U2

[Function]
Used to cancel troubles other than U2.
Cancel troubles such as H trouble which writes data into EEPROM, and perform hardware
reset.

om

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
14-00 TRBL CANC.
CLEARED

[Function]
Used to cancel U2 trouble.
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, check sum of the total counter in the EEPROM is
rewritten and hardware reset is made.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
16-00 U2 TRBL CANC.
CLEARED

01

Maintenance counter clear

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the maintenance count value is cleared and
"000,000" is displayed.
[Operation]

hr
an

AR-M200/M201
1) Initial display

co

20

.c

Cancel of U2 trouble

py

16

20-01 M-CNT CLR.


CLEARED
000,000

01

Maintenance cycle setting

w
w
w

The count value is displayed in 3 digits X 2


times repeatedly.
<Display example: 012,345>
012 Blank 345 Blank 012
0.7s
0.3s
0.7s
1.0s
0.7s

[Function]
The currently set code of the maintenance cycle is displayed, and the newly set data are saved.
Enter the code number with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/
M201) and press [START] key. The entered value is saved and the display returns to the sub
code input standby state.

.te

21

AR-203E/5420

Code number
0
1
2
3
4
5

Setting
3,000 sheets
6,000 sheets
9,000 sheets
13,000 sheets
25,000 sheets
Free (999,999 sheets)

Remark

Default

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) The current set value is
displayed.
21-01 M-CYCLE
4:25,000
( 0-5 )

2) [

] key or [Numeric] key

21-01 M-CYCLE
5:FREE
( 0-5 )
2) [

] key or [Numeric] key

21-01 M-CYCLE
3:13,000
( 0-5 )

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 8

3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key
21-01 M-CYCLE
5:FREE
( 0-5 )

Main
code
22

Sub
code
01

Contents

Details of function/operation

Maintenance counter display

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the maintenance counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

22-01 M-CNT
***,***
02

Maintenance preset display

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the preset value (25,000 sheets, etc.) corresponding to the code set with simulation 21-01 is displayed.

om

[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

04

JAM total counter display

[Function]
The JAM total counter is displayed.
[Operation]

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

22-04 JAM TTL CNT


***,***
Total counter display

[Function]
The total counter value is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

hr
an

1) Initial display

co

05

py

AR-M200/M201

.c

22-02 M-CNT PRESET


***,***

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

22-05 TTL CNT

***,***

06

Developer counter display

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is obtained and displayed.
[Operation]

.te

AR-M200/M201

1) Initial display

AR-203E/5420
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

22-06 DVLP CNT

SPF/RSPF counter display


(Only the AR-203E/M200/
M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)

08

11

***,***

[Function]
The SPF/RSPF counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

22-08 SPF CNT


***,***

FAX-related counter display


(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

[Function]
The FAX-related counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT COUNTER
1:PAGE
2:TIME
[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
2) Select 1
SEND PAGE:xxx,xxx
RECV PAGE:xxx,xxx

2) Select 2
TX TIME:xxxxx:xx.xx
RX TIME:xxxxx:xx.xx

("xxx,xxx" is the current value.)

("xxxxx: xx. xx" is the current value.)

[Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

[Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 9

Main
code
22

Sub
code
12

Contents

Details of function/operation

Drum counter display

[Function]
The drum counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

22-12 DRUM CNT


***,***
[Function]
The CRUM type currently set (written) in the CRUM chip is displayed.
Code number
00
01
02
03
99

CRUM type
Not set
BTA-A
BTA-B
BTA-C
Conversion

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) The CRUM type is displayed.

ROM version display

[Function]
The P-ROM version is displayed.
Press [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key or [
play version.

][

] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the dis-

co

14

py

22-13 CRUM TYPE


01:BTA-A

Display item
0
BTA-A
BTA-B
BTA-C
CONVERSION

om

CRUM type display

.c

13

Version
Main unit Program
F-IMC Program
LCD DATA

hr
an

Code number
0
1
2

Display item
MAIN PROG.
F-IMC PROG.
LCD DATA

[Operation]

AR-M200/M201

1) Initial display

Duplex counter display


(AR-M201 only)

16

.te

22-14 ROM VER.


MAIN PROG.
00.00

] key

22-14 ROM VER.


F-IMC PROG.
00.00
2) [Numeric] key or [

] key

22-14 ROM VER.


LCD DATA
00.00
AR-203E/5420
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

[Function]
The duplex counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-16 DPLX CNT
***,***

Copy counter display

17

2) [Numeric] key or [

[Function]
The copy counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

22-17 COPIES CNT


***,***

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 10

Main
code
22

Sub
code
18

Contents

Details of function/operation

Printer counter display

[Function]
The printer counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

22-18 PRT.CNT
***,***
Scanner mode counter
display
(AR-203E/M200/M201)

[Function]
The scanner mode counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

om

19

22-19 S-MODE CNT


***,***
Scanner counter display

[Function]
The scanner counter is displayed.

.c

21

[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

22-21 SCAN CNT


***,***
SPF/RSPF JAM counter
display (Only the AR-203E/
M200/M201 with the
SPF/RSPF installed)

[Function]
The SPF/RSPF JAM counter is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
1) Initial display

co

22

py

1) Initial display

AR-203E
The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

24

01

hr
an

22-22 S JAM CNT


***,***

JAM total counter clear

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the JAM total counter is cleared to 0 and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

.te

AR-M200/M201

24-01 JAM TTL CLR.


CLEARED
000,000

SPF/RSPF counter clear


(Only the AR-203E/M200/
M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)

04

05

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the SPF/RSPF counter value is cleared to 0 and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

24-04 SPF CLR.


CLEARED
000,000

Duplex counter clear


(AR-M201 only)

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the duplex counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-05 DPLX CLR.
CLEARED
000,000

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 11

Main
code
24

Sub
code
06

Contents

Details of function/operation

Developer counter clear

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

24-06 DVLP CLR.


CLEARED
000,000
07

Drum counter clear

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the drum counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.

om

[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

24-07 DRUM CLR.


CLEARED
000,000

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the copy counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.

.c

Copy counter clear

[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

co

24-08 COPIES CLR.


CLEARED
000,000
Printer counter clear

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the printer counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.

hr
an

09

py

08

[Operation]

AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

24-09 PRT.CLR.
CLEARED
000,000

FAX counter clear


(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the FAX count value is set to 0 and "000,000" is
displayed on the LCD.

.te

10

[Operation]

Scanner counter clear

13

1) Initial display

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the scanner counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]

w
14

24-10 FAX CLR.


CLEARED
000,000

AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

24-13 SCAN CLR.


CLEARED
000,000

SPF/RSPF JAM total


counter clear (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with
the SPF/RSPF installed)

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the SPF/RSPF JAM total counter value is cleared
to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

24-14 S JAM TTL CLR.


CLEARED
000,000

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 12

Main
code
24

Sub
code
15

Contents

Details of function/operation

Scanner mode counter clear


(AR-203E/M200/M201)

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the scanner mode counter value is cleared to 0,
and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display.
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E

1) Initial display

The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.

24-15 S-MODE CLR.


CLEARED
000,000
01

Main motor operation check


(Cooling fan motor rotation
check)

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the main motor (and the duplex motor in the case
of a duplex model) is operated for 30sec.
To reduce toner consumption, if the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the main
charger, and the grid are also outputted.
In this case, laser discharge is required when stopping the motor, the polygon motor is also
operated at the same time. Check for installation of the developing unit. If it is not installed, the
high voltage above is not outputted and only the motor is rotated.
To check the developing bias, install the developing unit.
After completion of 30sec operation, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.

.c

om

25

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)

25-01 MAIN MOTOR CHK


EXECUTING...
Polygon motor ON

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the Bios is called to rotate the polygon motor for
30sec.
After completion of 30sec operation, the operation is turned off with the Bios and the machine
goes into the sub code entry standby mode.

co

10

py

1) Initial display

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)

hr
an

1) Initial display

25-10 LSU CHK


EXECUTING...

26

02

SPF/RSPF setup

[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set SPF/RSPF is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired SPF/RSPF and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the
setting.

.te

Code number
0
1
2

SPF/RSPF
SPF NO
SPF YES
RSPF YES

Display item
SPF OFF
SPF ON
RSPF ON

For the AR-203E/5420, the code number cannot be set to 2.


For the AR-M200/M201, the code number cannot be set to 1.

AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

1) The current set value is


displayed.
26-02 SPF/RSPF
1:SPF ON
(0- 2)

w
03

[Operation]

2) [Numeric] key or [
26-02 SPF/RSPF
0:SPF OFF (0- 2)

Second cassette setup

] key

2) [Numeric] key or [

] key

26-02 SPF/RSPF
2:RSPF ON (0- 2)
3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key

1) Press [ ] [ ] key to
change the code number.
2) Press [START] key to fix
the code number.

26-02 SPF/RSPF
2:RSPF ON (0- 2)

[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set second cassette is displayed. Enter the code
number corresponding to the desired second cassette and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to
save the setting.
Code number
0
1

Second cassette
Second cassette NO
Second cassette YES

Display item
OFF
ON

For the AR-203E/5420/M200/M201, the code number cannot be set to 1.


[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 13

Main
code
26

Sub
code
04

Contents

Details of function/operation

Machine duplex setup

[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set duplex is displayed. Enter the code number
corresponding to the desired duplex and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting.
Code number
0
1

Duplex
Duplex NO
Duplex YES*

Display item
OFF
ON

* AR-203E/5420/M200: cannot be executed.

Code number
0
1
2

Destination
Inch series
EX Japan AB series
Japan AB series

* Code number 2 cannot be selected.

Machine conditions check

Display item
INCH
AB

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current machine setting is displayed.
CPM
20 CPM

py

07

om

Destination setup

.c

06

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set destination is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired destination and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the
setting.

Copy quantity
20

co

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)

Remark

1) The machine setting is displayed.


26-07 CPM
20 CPM
Rear edge void setup

[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set rear edge void is displayed. Enter the code
number corresponding to the desired rear edge void and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to
save the setting.

hr
an

20

Code number
0
1

Cancel of stop at developer


life over

37

39

Display item
OFF
ON

Remark
Default

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set CE mark support control is displayed. Enter
the code number corresponding to the desired CE mark support control and press [OK]/
[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting.

.te

CE mark support control


ON/OFF

30

Setting
Rear edge void NO
Rear edge void YES

Memory capacity check

Code number
0
1

Setting
CE mark support control OFF
CE mark support control ON

Display item
OFF
ON

Remark
Default (100V series)

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number and
press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to change the setting.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 21-01.
[Function]
When the simulation is executed, the currently installed SDRAM of the main unit is displayed.
Code number
8
16

Setting
8 MBYTE
16 MBYTE

Remark

[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Memory capacity display
26-39 MEM.CHK
8 MBYTE
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 14

Sub
code
40

42

Contents

Details of function/operation

Polygon motor OFF time


setup (Time required for
turning OFF after completion
of printing)

[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired setting and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting.

Transfer ON timing control


setup

Code number

Setting

0
1
2
3

0sec
30sec
60sec
90sec

Display item
AR-M200/M201
AR-203E/5420
0 SEC.
0
30 SEC.
30
60 SEC.
60
90 SEC.
90

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]

Remark
Default

om

Main
code
26

AR-203E/5420

When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.
Enter the code number and press the [START] key, and the setting will be changed. (For any
number different from the following ones, the default time is automatically set.)
<Paper lead edge adjustment table>
Setting
Default (236 msec)
+2 msec
+4 msec
+6 msec
+8 msec
+10 msec
+12 msec
+14 msec
+16 msec
+18 msec
+20 msec

.c

Code number
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

py

Setting
Default (236 msec)
20 msec
18 msec
16 msec
14 msec
12 msec
10 msec
8 msec
6 msec
4 msec
2 msec

co

Code number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

hr
an

* The default value, "11," of the transfer ON timing indicates "236msec passed from PS
release."
* When set to "0," it is same as setting to the default, "11."
* The transfer ON timing can be adjusted to 236msec 2ms.
AR-M200/M201

For the AR-M200/M201, the adjustment can be made individually for each of the following
modes.

.te

Mode
Front surface paper lead edge
Front surface paper rear edge
Back surface paper lead edge
Back surface paper rear edge

Display item
F-REAR
F-END
B-REAR
B-END

Default
11
50
11
50

Setting range
0 - 21
1 - 99
0 - 21
1 - 99

<Front/back surface of paper rear edge adjustment table>


Code
1
...
49
50
51
...
99

<Paper lead edge adjustment table> is the same as that of the AR-203E/5420 above.
Setting
98 msec
...
2 msec
0 msec
+2 msec
...
+98 msec

Remark

Default

* The default "50" of the transfer OFF timing indicates "210msec passed from PPD1OFF."
* The transfer OFF timing can be adjusted to 210msec 2ms.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
<Front surface lead edge setting>
26-42 TC ON TIMING
F-REAR
11( 0-21 )
2) [

][

] key: Mode selection

26-42 TC ON TIMING
F-END
50( 1-99 )

3) [Numeric] key: Value entry


26-42 TC ON TIMING
F-END
51( 1-99 )
4) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key:
Settles the entered value. The display is
shifted to the sub code input standby
menu.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 15

Main
code
26

Sub
code
43

Contents

Details of function/operation

Side void setup

[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the currently set code of the side void quantity is displayed (initial display), and the set data are saved. (Setting range: 0 10, Default: 4 (= One side 2.0mm))
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5

Setting
0 mm
0.5 mm
1.0 mm
1.5 mm
2.0 mm
2.5 mm

Remark

Code
6
7
8
9
10

Default

Setting
3.0 mm
3.5 mm
4.0 mm
4.5 mm
5.5 mm

Remark

om

* When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the side void is changed as follows:
Side void adjustment: The side void is increased by 0.5mm. (The side void of "Set value x
0.5mm" is made.)
[Operation]
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

1) Initial display

1) Press [ ] [ ] key to change the code


number.

26-43 SIDE VOID


4( 0-10)

.c

2) Press [START] key to fix the code number.

2) [Numeric] key

py

26-43 SIDE VOID


5( 0-10)
3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key
26-43 SIDE VOID
5( 0-10)
life correction setting

[Function]
Used to set the life correction.
When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed.
Enter the desired code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting.
(Setting range: 0 1, default: 1)

Energy-save mode copy


lamp setup

Paper sensor status display

01

Code number
0
1

30

Display item
OFF
ON

Remark
Default

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
Used to set half-ON /OFF of the copy lamp in the pre-heat mode.
When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired
code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting.

.te

62

Setting
OFF
ON

hr
an

Code number
0
1

co

54

Setting
Copy lamp OFF
Copy lamp half-ON

Display item
OFF
ON

Remark
Default

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
The paper sensor status is displayed on the LCD/LED.
Sensor
Paper exit sensor
No. 1 tray paper width sensor
(AR-M200/M201 only)
No. 2 tray paper width sensor
(AR-M200/ M201 only)
Paper entry sensor
Duplex sensor (AR-M201 only)
No. 2 tray paper feed sensor
New drum cartridge sensor

Display item
Display lamp (AR-203E/5420)
(AR-M200/M201)
POD
Photoconductor cartridge replacement lamp
PD1

PD2
PPD1
PPD2
PPD3
DRST

Developer cartridge replacement lamp


JAM lamp
2nd cassette lamp
Zoom lamp

Since the manual paper feed sensor is a single bypass sensor, its status is not displayed.
The width sensor is available only in the FAX models.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
30-01 P-SENSOR

2) When sensor ON
30-01 POD PD1 PD2
PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 DRST

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 16

Main
code
41

Sub
code
06

Contents

Details of function/operation

OC cover float detection


level adjustment (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with
the SPF/RSPF installed)

[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. When [OK]/[ENTER]/
[START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the SPF/RSPF scan position to acquire
the OC cover float detection level.
When the mirror base unit returns to the home position, the acquired value is displayed.
If the adjustment is NG, the following message is displayed.
AR-203E/5420: Misfeed lamp lights up, and the 7seg display remains unchanged.
AR-M200/M201: The LCD indicates "ERR."
Note that, this simulation must be executed with the OC cover closed.
If the value is 0, float detection is not performed in normal jobs.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display

<Canceling - when [Clear]/[Clear All] key is pressed->


After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
THE JOB IS BEING
CANCELED.

om

41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL


0
2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START]
key

3) When the level is


acquired:
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL
**** OK

[Function]
For the number of pixels between black markers on the SPF/RSFP scanning position saved in
"41-06: (OC cover float detection level adjustment)", if the number of pixels between the markers when processing float detection is less than the number of pixels set with this simulation, it
is judged as the float error.
When the set value of this simulation is "0," no float error occurs.
When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201), and press
[START] key. The setting is saved and the display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu.
Setting range: 0 99 (Copes with margin 0 99 pixels.)
Default: 30 (30 pixels)

py

OC cover float detection


margin setting (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with
the SPF/RSPF installed)

co

07

3) When the level is not


acquired:
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL
**** ERR

.c

41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL


EXECUTING...

hr
an

01

Fusing temperature setting


(Normal copy)

.te

43

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 09-04.
[Function]
Used to set the fusing temperature of 3rd or later sheet. (For 1st and 2nd sheets, simulation 4314 is used.)
When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Press [ ] [ ] key
(or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the setting and press [OK]/[ENTER]/
[START] key to save the setting into the EERPOM. The machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
The [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) is used to select
the mode.
Code
0
1
2
3
4

Set temperature (C)


170
175
180
185
190

Remark

Code
5
6
7
8

Set temperature (C)


195
200
205
210

Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed
TRAY1
Manual paper feed
MFT
* The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly.
Mode

Remark
Default

Display item
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp

[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
1) Initial display <Main cassette paper feed
& 2nd cassette paper feed setting>
43-01 FU TEMP
TRAY1
6( 0-8 )
2) [

][

] key: Mode selection

43-01 FU TEMP
MFT
6( 0-8 )
3) [Numeric] key: Value entry
43-01 FU TEMP
MFT
6( 0-8 )

4) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key
Settles the entered value. The display is
shifted to the sub code input standby
menu.
AR-203E/5420
1) Press [Exposure mode selector] key to
change the mode.
2) Press [ ] [ ] key to set the value.
3) Press [START] key to fix the code
number.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 17

Sub
code
04

Contents

Details of function/operation

Fusing temperature setting


in multi copy

[Function]
For 20th sheet or later in multi copy, the fusing temperature is automatically changed from the
temperature set with simulation 43-01 to the temperature set with this simulation.
When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the code
number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to change the setting.
Code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Set temperature (C)


165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200

Remark

om

Main
code
43

Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
TRAY1

Mode

.c

Main cassette paper feed & 2nd


cassette paper feed
Manual paper feed
Main cassette paper feed & 2nd
cassette paper feed (small-size)
Manual paper feed (small-size)

Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp

py

MFT
TRAY1 SH
MFT SH

Default
3

TEXT mode lamp


PHOTO mode lamp

3
1

AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp

The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly.

co

Fusing temperature setup in


duplex copy (AR-M201 only)

hr
an

05

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 43-01.
[Function]
In the case of duplex copy, the shift temperature set with this simulation is applied to the fusing
temperature.
When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed.
Enter the desired code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting.

Fusing start temperature


setting

14

Remark
Default

Code Shift temperature (C)


5
0
6
+2
7
+4
8
+6
9
+8

Remark

.te

Code Shift temperature (C)


0
0
1
8
2
6
3
4
4
2

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
When this simulation is started, the currently set code number is displayed.
Press [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the setting, and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save it to the EEPROM. The machine goes to the
sub code entry standby mode.
Code Set temperature (C)
0
160
1
165
2
170
3
175
4
180
5
185

Remark

Code Set temperature (C)


6
190
7
195
8
200
9
205
10
210

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 43-01.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 18

Remark
Default

Contents

Details of function/operation
[Function]
Copy density is set for each mode.
When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased,
the copy becomes lighter.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy,
Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too.
Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode.
The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 99)
The setting procedure of the magnification ratio is the same as that to copy operation.
Mode
AE mode (300dpi)
TEXT mode (300dpi)
PHOTO mode
TS mode (TEXT)
(300dpi)
TS mode (AE)
(300dpi)

Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT
TSAE

[Operation]
AR-M200/M201
1) Initial display

Default
50
50
50
50
50

co

46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300


AE
100% 62( 1-99)

] key: Mode selection

* To cancel manual feed paper empty MSG,


press any key.

46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300


TSAE 100% 50( 1-99)

] key: Mode selection

hr
an

2) [

Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
AE mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp

4) To fix the set value without printing, press


[OK]/[ENTER] key.

46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300


AE
100% 50( 1-99)
2) [

LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

om

Copy density adjustment


(300dpi)

.c

Sub
code
01

py

Main
code
46

46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300


TEXT 100% 50( 1-99)

3) [Numeric] key: Value entry


46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
AE
100% 62( 1-99)

4) [START] key: Fixing and printing value


(No change on the LCD)

* When performing the AE mode exposure


adjustment, place the test chart on the document table so that the center area of 10cm is
not covered.
AR-203E/5420
1) Press [Exposure mode selector] key to
change the mode.
2) Press [ ] [ ] key to set the value.
3) [START] Fixing and printing value
* Print is started in the set mode.

.te

* Print is started in the set mode.


46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
AE
100% 62( 1-99)

Copy density adjustment


(600dpi)

02

[Function]
Copy density is set for each mode.
When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased,
the copy becomes lighter.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy,
Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too.
Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode.
The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 99)
Mode
AE mode (600dpi)
TEXT mode (600dpi)
PHOTO mode
TS mode (TEXT)
(600dpi)
TS mode (AE)
(600dpi)

Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT
TSAE

LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 19

Display lamp
Default
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
50
TEXT mode lamp
50
PHOTO mode lamp
50
TEXT mode lamp
50
PHOTO mode lamp
AE mode lamp
50
PHOTO mode lamp

Main
code
46

Sub
code
12

Contents

Details of function/operation

Density adjustment in the


FAX mode (Collective
adjustment) (Executable
only when the FAX is
installed.)

[Function]
When [START] key is pressed, scan is executed with the entered exposure adjustment value
and the data stored on the FAX side is rewritten into the entered value.
All data of the exposure adjustment values are rewritten into the same value.
For the density adjustment table data, refer to simulation 46-13 (density adjustment (Normal
text) in the FAX mode).
[Operation]
1) Initial display
EXP.

AUTO
XX

("XX" is the exposure adjustment value of


normal text stored on the FAX side.)
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure
adjustment value.
ADJUST

EXP.

AUTO
YY

AUTO
YY

4) Print is started (self print).


ADJUST
PRINT

EXP.

AUTO
YY

.c

[Function]
Scan is started with the exposure adjustment value entered with [START] key, and the stored
data of the selected mode on the FAX side is rewritten into the input value.

py

FAX mode density


adjustment (Normal text)
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

EXP.

After completion of printing, returns to 2)


display.

("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment


value.)
13

ADJUST
SCAN

om

ADJUST

3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED


of [START] key is turned off.

Density adjustment value data table


Photo
off
on
off
on
off

Exposure adjustment value

co

Mode
STD (Normal text)
Fine (Fine text)
Sfine (Super fine)

hr
an

When initializing each data: 50


[Operation]

1) Initial display
ADJUST

EXP.

STD
XX

("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of normal text mode stored on the
FAX side.)

.te

2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure


adjustment value with [Numeric] key.

FAX mode density


adjustment (Fine text)
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

14

ADJUST

EXP.

STD
YY

3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED


of [START] key is turned off.
ADJUST
SCAN

EXP.

STD
YY

4) Print is started (self print).


ADJUST
PRINT

EXP.

STD
YY

After completion of printing, returns to 2)


display.

("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment


value.)

[Function]
When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and
the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
For the density adjustment value table data, refer to simulation 46-13 (FAX mode density
adjustment (Normal text).)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
ADJUST

EXP.

3) Scan start (self print)


FINE
XX

("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the fine text mode stored on
the FAX side.)
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure
adjustment value with [Numeric] key.
ADJUST

EXP.

ADJUST
SCAN

EXP.

FINE
YY

4) Print start (self print)


ADJUST
PRINT

EXP.

AUTO
YY

After completion of printing, returns to 2)


display.

FINE
YY

("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment


value.)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 20

Main
code
46

Sub
code
15

Contents

Details of function/operation

FAX mode density


adjustment (Super fine)
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

[Function]
When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and
the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
For the density adjustment value table data, refer to simulation 46-13 (FAX mode density
adjustment (Normal text).)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
EXP.

ADJUST
SCAN

S-FINE
XX

("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the super fine mode stored on
the FAX side.)
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure
adjustment value with [Numeric] key.
ADJUST

EXP.

S-FINE
YY

Image contrast adjustment


(300dpi)

4) Print start (self print)


ADJUST
PRINT

EXP.

S-FINE
YY

After completion of printing, returns to 2)


display.

[Function]
Contrast is set for each mode.
When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is
decreased, the contrast becomes lower.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast,
Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too.
Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the
mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1
99)

hr
an

co

py

18

S-FINE
YY

.c

("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment


value.)

EXP.

om

ADJUST

3) Scan start (self print)

Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE mode (300dpi)
AE
TEXT mode (300dpi)
TEXT
PHOTO mode
PHOTO
TS mode (TEXT)
TSTXT
(300dpi)
TS mode (AE)
TSAE
(300dpi)

.te

Mode

LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

* No density display on LCD/display.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 21

Display lamp
Default
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
50
TEXT mode lamp
50
PHOTO mode lamp
50
TEXT mode lamp
50
PHOTO mode lamp
AE mode lamp
50
PHOTO mode lamp

Main
code
46

Sub
code
19

Contents

Details of function/operation

Exposure mode setup

[Function]
< table setting>
When this simulation is executed, the code number of the current set gamma table is displayed.
(Default: 2)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired gamma table, and press [Exposure mode
selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the mode and write into the
EEPROM.

om

<AE operation mode>


] key for the AR-M200/
When setting the table, press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
M201) to change to the AE operation mode, and the current set code number of the AE operation mode is displayed. (Default: 0)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired AE operation mode and press [Exposure
mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the mode and write
into the EEPROM.

Display item
Display lamp
Code
(AR-M200/M201) (AR-203E/5420) number

py

Mode

.c

<PHOTO image process setting>


When [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
] key for the AR-M200/M201) is pressed in AE
operation mode setting, the mode is changed to the PHOTO image process setting and the
code number of the current set PHOTO image process setting is displayed. (Default: 1)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired PHOTO image process setting and press
[Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the mode
and write into the EEPROM.

GAMMA

OFF

AE

AE

PHOTO

PHOTO

SPF/RSPF exposure
correction (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with
the SPF/RSPF installed)

Mode

RSPF/SPF

Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
SPF

Display lamp
(AR-203E)
TEXT mode lamp

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.

0
1
1
2

Image quality priority


mode
Toner consumption
priority mode
Lead edge stop
Real time process
Error diffusion process
Dither process

Remark

Default
Default
Default

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 43-01.
[Function]
Used to adjust the exposure correction amount in the SPF/RSPF mode. The adjustment is
made by adjusting Vref voltage variation for the OC mode.
When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy.
When the set value is increased, copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, copy
becomes lighter. (Adjustment range: 1 99)

.te

20

AE

hr
an

PHOTO

co

Setting content

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 22

Default
50

Remark

Contents

Details of function/operation

Image contrast adjustment


(600dpi)

[Function]
Contrast is set for each mode.
When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is
decreased, the contrast becomes lower.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast,
Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too.
Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode.
The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 99)
Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE mode (600dpi)
AE
TEXT mode (600dpi)
TEXT
PHOTO mode
PHOTO
TS mode (TEXT)
TSTXT
(600dpi)
TS mode (AE)
TSAE
(600dpi)
Mode

LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

* No density display on LCD/display.

Default
50
50
50
50
50

py

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
[Function]
Used to set the limit value in AE and AE (toner save).
Change the setting and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to write the setting into the EEPROM.
The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
By pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201), setting is
changed. (Setting range: 0 31, Default: 0)

AE limit adjustment

co

30

Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
AE mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp

om

Sub
code
29

.c

Main
code
46

hr
an

Mode

Limit value for AE


Limit value for AE (toner save)

Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE
TEXT

Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp

Remark

<Remark>

When simulation 26-06 (Destination setting) or simulation 46-19 Auto Exposure mode is
changed, the setting of this simulation is also changed to the default in connection.

.te

Image sharpness
adjustment

31

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-19.
[Function]
Used to adjust sharpening/blurring of image in each mode.
Image quality
Blurring
Standard
Sharpening

Setting No
0
1
2

Remark
Default

When this simulation is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set
value is displayed. (Default: 1)
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions.
To change the mode, press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/
M201). The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the LCD/display.
Mode
AE mode
TEXT mode
PHOTO mode
TS mode (TEXT)
TS mode (AE)

Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE
TEXT
PHOTO
TSTXT
TSAE

LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 23

Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
AE mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp

Default
1
1
1
1
1

Main
code
46

Sub
code
32

Contents

Details of function/operation

Copier color reproduction


setup

[Function]
Used to set color reproduction in each mode. Colors easy to be copied and colors difficult to be
copied can be switched.
Set value
0
1
2

Colors easy to be copied


Purple, Blue, Red
Water blue, Green, Blue
Yellow, Red, Green

Colors difficult to be copied


Yellow, Green, Water blue
Purple, Red, Yellow
Blue, Water blue, Purple

* This setting has virtually no effect on black-and-white documents.

Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
AE

Mode

LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp

Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp

Default
0

TEXT

PRINT mode lamp

TEXT mode lamp

PHOTO

SCAN mode lamp

PHOTO mode lamp

co

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
[Function]
When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered sharpness adjustment value,
and the data of the selected mode stored on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.

hr
an

FAX mode sharpness


adjustment (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)

Remark
Default

py

AE mode
(including TS)
TEXT mode
(including TS)
PHOTO mode

39

Setting No
0
1
2

.c

Specification component
Green
Red
Blue

om

When this simulation is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set
value is displayed. (Default: 0)
Press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions . At that time, color components are
changed for used in copying.
To change the mode, press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/
M201). The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the LCD/display.

Sharpness adjustment value data table


1:
2:
3:
4:
5:

Mode
STD
FINE
S-FINE
FINE/PHOTO
S-FINE/PHOTO

Sharpness adjustment value

.te

When initializing each data: 1

[Operation]
1) Initial display

SHARPNESS SETTING
PRESS ,

2) [

][

] key or after 2sec

4) Enter a one-digit value (0-2) as the sharpness adjustment value with [Numeric]
key.
SHARPNESS SETTING
ZZZZ(0-2)
Y

Every time when [


] key is pressed,
the second line is changed in the
sequence of No. 1 2 3 4 5
1.

("Y" is the entered sharpness adjustment


value.)

When [
] key is pressed, the sequence
is reversed.

5) Scan start (self print)

SHARPNESS SET (1-5)


1:STD
3) Select the arrow key 1-5, and the LED of
[START] key is lighted.
SHARPNESS SETTING
ZZZZ(0-2)
X
("ZZZZ" is the mode selected among STD,
FINE, S-FINE, FINE/PHOTO, and S-FINE/
PHOTO.)

[Clear] key: Returns to 2) display.

SHARPNESS SETTING
SCAN
Y
6) Print start (self print)
SHARPNESS SETTING
PRINT
Y
After completion of printing, returns to 4)
display.

("X" is the corresponding sharpness adjustment value of the selected mode stored on
the FAX side.)
[Clear] key: Returns to 2) display.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 24

Main
code
48

Sub
code
01

Contents

Details of function/operation

Front/rear (main scanning)


direction and scan (sub
scanning) direction
magnification ratio
adjustment

[Function]
Used to adjust the magnification ratio in the main scan (front/rear) direction and sub scan direction.
Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201). Press
[START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (When the adjustment value is increased
by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.)
The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 99, Default: 50)

][

Display item
LED
Display lamp
Default
(AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201) (AR-203E/5420)
Main scan direction
F-R
PRINT mode
TEXT mode lamp
50
magnification ratio
lamp
OC mode sub scan
SCAN
SCAN mode
PHOTO mode
50
direction magnification ratio
lamp
lamp

.c

SPF/RSPF mode sub scan


direction magnification ratio
in copying (Only the
AR-203E/M200/M201 with
the SPF/RSPF installed)

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
[Function]
Used to display the current SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio on the LCD/
display.
When [START] key is pressed, the entered data is acquired and saved into the EEPROM, and a
copy is made. (When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by
0.1%.)

py

05

om

Mode

The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 99, Default: 50)

][

co

When adjusting the RSPF, the mode is set to "Duplex Single," single copies of two sheets are
performed.
For printing, regardless of the density mode and the density level,
Density mode = MANUAL
Density level = 3

Display item
LED
Display
Initial value of
(AR-M200/ (AR-M200/
lamp
duplex setting
M201)
M201)
(AR-203E)
S-S
SIDE1
COPY mode AE mode
lamp
lamp

hr
an
Mode

D-S

SIDE2

PRINT
mode lamp

.te

Sub scan magnification


ratio adjustment on the
front surface of SPF/RSPF
document
Sub scan magnification
ratio adjustment on the
back surface of RSPF
document (AR-M200/
M201)

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.

* When there is no document in SPF/RSPF, copy is inhibited.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 25

Default
50

50

Main
code
49

Sub
code
01

Contents

Details of function/operation

Flash ROM program writing


mode

[Function]
When this simulation is executed, "d" is displayed on the display (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is
displayed on the LCD for the AR-M200/M201), the machine goes into the program writing mode
from PC to Flash ROM.
Use the writing tool on the PC and write the program.
During writing, the display shows as follows:
After completion of download, turn OFF/ON the power to reset.
AR-M200/M201
Status

AR-203E/5420
Pre-heat
Ready
lamp
lamp
"d" ON
ON
OFF

Display item

OFF
Blink
Blink

ON
OFF
Blink

om

E2PROM WRITING
LCD DATE WRITING
FLASH ROM SUM
CHECK
BOOT SUM CHECK

AR-M200/M201
"d" ON
"d" ON
"d" ON

AR-M200/M201
AR-M200/M201

"d" ON

ON

ON

.c

During BOOT SUM


CHECK
During EEPROM SUM
CHECK
Download complete

RECEIVING
LOADER COPYING
FLASH ERASE
BOOT WRITING
PROGRAM WRITING

EEPROM SUM CHECK

py

Download data receiving


Loader function transfer
Date delete start
Data write (Boot section)
Data write (Program
section)
Data write (EEPROM)
Data write (LCD)
During SUM CHECK

DOWNLOAD
COMPLETE!

Error state

Remark

Display

"0FF" ON

OFF

OFF

"E " ON

OFF

OFF

AR-M200/M201
AR-M200/M201

AR-203E/5420

* "" in an error display indicates the error position.

co

Data reception error


Loader function transfer
FLASH ROM delete
FLASH ROM writing (Boot section)
FLASH ROM writing (Program section)

hr
an

1
2
3
4
5

6
7
8
9
10

Sum check (Loader section)


Sum check (Boot section)
Sum check (Program section)
Sum check (EEPROM section)
Data error

In case of an error in download, the following message is displayed on the LCD.


(AR-M200/M201)

.te

Error status
PC data receiving
Loader function transfer
FLASH ROM delete
Boot section FLASH ROM write
Program section FLASH ROM write
Loader section SUM CHECK
Boot section SUM CHECK
Program section SUM CHECK
E2PROM SUM CHECK
E2PROM write
E2PROM read Verify
E2PROM collating Verify
Boot section lens check
Program section lens check
E2PROM lens check
Total data size check
IMC communication error
IMC FRASH ROM write
LCD section lens check
LCD section FLASH ROM write
LCD section SUM CHECK

Display item
E-01 PC TRANS
E-02 LOADER COPY
E-03 FLASH ERASE
E-04 BOOT WRITE
E-05 PROGRAM WRITE
E-06 LOADER SUM
E-07 BOOT SUM
E-08 PROGRAM SUM
E-09 E2PROM SUM
E-10 E2PROM WRITE
E-11 E2PROM READ
E-12 E2PROM COLLATE
E-13 BOOT LENGTH
E-14 PROGRAM LENGTH
E-15 E2PROM LENGTH
E-16 DATE SIZE
E-17 IMC TRANS
E-18 IMC FLASH WRITE
E-19 LCD DATE LENGTH
E-20 LCD DATE WRITE
E-21 LCD DATE SUM

To enter the download mode, there is a method to use key operations as well as to use a simulation. With the power OFF, press and hold [Clear All] key + [
] key, turn on the power.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
DOWNLOAD MODE

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 26

Contents

Details of function/operation
[Function]
Used to adjust the copy image position and the lead edge void amount on copy paper. The
adjustment is made by adjusting the image scan start position at 100% and the print start position (resist roller ON timing). When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed
in 2 digits. (Center value: 50)
When [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) is pressed, the
setting mode and the display are changed.
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy.
When the adjustment is made by the main cassette paper feed, the adjustment values of all the
paper feed ports become the same. (When the set value is increased by 1, shift is made by
0.1mm.)
Mode
Print start position (Main
cassette paper feed)
(*) Print start position
(2nd cassette paper feed)
Print start position
(Manual paper feed)
Image lead edge void
amount
Image scan start position

Display item
(AR-M200/M201)
TRAY1
TRAY2
MFT
DEN-A
RRC-A

Image rear edge void


amount (Cassette paper
feed)

DEN-B

Image rear edge void


amount (Manual paper
feed)

RRC-B

LED
(AR-M200/M201)
COPY mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp
PRINT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
PRINT mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp

Display lamp
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
AE mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
AE mode lamp
Manual feed lamp
TEXT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
AE mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode lamp
Manual feed lamp

om

Lead edge image position

.c

Sub
code
01

co

py

Main
code
50

Default
50
50
50
50
50
50

50

(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
* When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size.

hr
an

* When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.


[Adjustment procedure]
1) Set the print start position (AE lamp ON) (A), the lead edge void amount (TEXT lamp ON)
(B), and the scan start position (PHOTO lamp ON) (C) to 0, and make a copy of a scale at
100%. (AR-203E/5420)
For the AR-M200/M201, the following LEDs are lighted:
AE lamp/COPY mode lamp: (A)
TEXT lamp/PRINT mode lamp: (B)
PHOTO lamp/SCAN mode lamp: (C)

.te

2) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale.


Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.)
When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)

3) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position.
Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.)
When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is moved to the paper lead
edge by 1mm. (Default: 50).

4) Set the lead edge void amount to


B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50)

(Example)
Distance from the paper lead edge
to the image lead edge, H = 5mm

When the value of B is increased by


10, the void is extended by about
0.1mm. (For 25 or less, however,
the void amount is regarded as 0.)
The SPF/RSPF adjustment is made
by adjusting the SPF/RSPF image
scan start position after OC
adjustment.

Image loss, R = 4mm

5mm

10mm

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation
46-01.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 27

Main
code
50

Sub
code
06

Contents

Details of function/operation

Copy lead edge position


adjustment (SPF/RSPF)
(Only the AR-203E/M200/
M201 with the SPF/RSPF
installed)

[Function]
Used to adjust the SPF/RSPF copy lead edge.
When the adjustment value of the document scan position adjustment is increased by 1, the
scan start timing is advanced by 0.1mm.
The print result is shifted to the opposite direction of the scan start position.
The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 99, Default: 50)

][

When scanning a back surface of document, the mode must be changed to operate the SPF/
RSPF by pressing [2-SIDED SCAN]/[2-SIDED COPY] key.
Display item
(AR-M200/
M201)
SIDE1

LED
(AR-M200/
M201)
COPY mode
lamp

D-S

SIDE2

PRINT mode
lamp

S-S

END

Display lamp
(AR-203E)
AE mode
lamp

Default

om

Front surface
document scan
position adjustment
Back surface
document scan
position adjustment
(AR-M200/M201)
Rear edge void
adjustment (RSPF)

Initial value
of duplex
setting
S-S

.c

Mode

SCAN mode
lamp

PHOTO
mode lamp

50

50

50

co

Center offset adjustment

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
[Function]
Used to adjust the center offset position of copy images on copy paper and that in scanning
document.
When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. (When
the set value is changed by 1, the center is shifted by 0.1mm.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the center is shifted to right. When decreased, the
center is shifted to left.
The modes can be selected by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
][
] key for the
AR-M200/M201).
When the set value is changed largely, the area outside the shading area may be scanned to
cause black streaks on the edges. When the SPF/RSPF is used, select the mode for use of the
SPF/RSPF by [2-SIDED SCAN]/[2-SIDED COPY] key.

hr
an

10

py

When there is no document in the SPF/RSPF, copy is inhibited.


When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

.te

Mode

Print center offset


(Main cassette
paper feed)
(*) Print center offset
(2nd cassette paper
feed)
Print center offset
(Manual paper feed)
(**) 2nd print center
offset (Main cassette
paper feed)

Display item
LED
Display lamp
Default
(AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201)
(AR-203E/5420)
TRAY1
COPY mode lamp
AE mode lamp
50
Main cassette lamp Main cassette lamp
TRAY2

COPY mode lamp


2nd cassette lamp

AE mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp

50

MFT

COPY mode lamp


Manual paper feed
lamp
PRINT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp

AE mode lamp
Manual paper feed
lamp
TEXT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp

50

SIDE2

50

(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
(**): For Simplex models, skip.
* When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size.
* In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as 1to2/Short Edge from OC
regardless of duplex setting.
* When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 28

Main
code
50

Sub
code
12

Contents

Details of function/operation

Document off-center
adjustment

[Function]
Used to adjust document scan off-center adjustment.
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
[
] key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 99, Default: 50)

When the adjustment value is increased, the print result is shifted to left.

Platen document scan


SPF document front
scan
RSPF document back
scan (AR-M200/M201)

Initial value Display item


LED
of duplex
(AR-M200/
(AR-M200/
setting
M201)
M201)
S-S
OC
COPY mode
lamp
S-S
SPF
PRINT mode
lamp
D-S
RSPF
SCAN mode
lamp

* When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

50
50
50

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
[Function]
When this simulation is executed, the current set correction value is displayed.

.c

Memory reverse position


adjustment in duplex copy
(Only the AR-M201, or the
AR-M200 with the RSPF
installed)

Default

Enter the correction value and press [START] key to save the entered correction value. (Correction value range; 1 99, Default: 50)

py

18

Display lamp
(AR-203E/
5420)
AE mode
lamp
TEXT mode
lamp

om

Mode

For S-D mode front surface print and print of even paged in D-S mode, reverse memory copy
operation is performed from the rear edge of documents.
When, therefore, the print position adjustment of output images is required, adjust as follows:

co

In the reverse memory coping, when the document scan is made in the arrow direction, the output image is printed from the rear edge of scan image.
When, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference
position is on the rear edge, and use this simulation to adjust the set value so that the print lead
edge is matched.

hr
an

Since printing is made from the image data most lately stored in memory to the lead edge data
from the print start position, the image lead edge adjustment is made by changing the end data
position stored in memory by the set value of this simulation.
Since it is performed by changing the scan end position, the image position adjustment is made
by changing the scan end position and the end data stored in memory.
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [
Mode

Display item

D-S

LED

Default

COPY mode
lamp

50

SPF

PRINT mode
lamp

50

Document transport direction


Scan lead edge

Document transport direction


Print lead edge
Lead edge void (1)
Print start position

Scan end position


(Default: Scan cut by void (1))
Scan direction

] key.

OC

.te

OC memory reverse
output position
(AR-M201 only)
SPF/RSPF memory
reverse output position

Initial value of
duplex setting
S-D

][

Rear edge void


Print rear edge

Scan rear edge

* The initial value of duplex setting is "1to2/Long Edge" for the duplex model, or "2to1" for the
simplex model.
When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 29

Main
code
50

Sub
code
19

Contents

Details of function/operation

Duplex copy rear edge void


adjustment
(AR-M201 only)

[Function]
Used to adjust the rear edge void amount in duplex copy.
When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value:
50.) The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [
][
] key. (Adjustment range; 1
99)
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (The
paper information is cleared for every copy.)
When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by about 0.1mm.
Mode
Paper rear edge void amount
Print start position (Duplex back surface)

Display item
DEN-B
RRC-D

LED
PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

Default
50
50

When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

02

Resist quantity adjustment

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
[Function]
Used to adjust the contact pressure of the main unit resist roller and the SPF/RSPF resist roller
onto paper. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed.

.c

51

om

* The initial value for duplex setting is "1to2/Short Edge" for the OC setting, or "2to2" for the
RSPF setting.

py

The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [
[
] key for the AR-M200/M201).

Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and
press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy.
Display item
LED
(AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201)
Main cassette
TRAY1
COPY mode lamp
paper feed
Main cassette lamp
(*) 2nd cassette
TRAY2
COPY mode lamp
paper feed
2nd cassette lamp
Manual paper feed
MFT
COPY mode lamp
Manual paper feed
lamp
RSPF document
SIDE1
COPY mode lamp
paper feed
PRINT mode lamp
(Front surface)
SCAN mode lamp
(AR-M200/M201)
Main cassette lamp
RSPF document
SIDE2
COPY mode lamp
paper feed
PRINT mode lamp
(Back surface)
Main cassette lamp
(AR-M200/M201)
(*) Duplex back
DUP-2
PRINT mode lamp
surface
SCAN mode lamp
(AR-M201 only)
Main cassette lamp

Display lamp
Default
(AR-203E/5420)
AE mode lamp
50
Main cassette lamp
AE mode lamp
50
2nd cassette lamp
AE mode lamp
50
Manual paper feed lamp

50

50

TEXT mode lamp


PHOTO mode lamp
Main cassette lamp

(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.

.te

hr
an

co

Mode

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 30

50

Main
code
53

Sub
code
08

Contents

Details of function/operation

SPF/RSPF scan position


automatic adjustment (Only
the AR-203E/M200/M201
with the SPF/RSPF
installed)

[Function]
Place a A4 paper (white chart) so that it covers the SPF/RSPF scan glass and the OC glass
together, and close the SPF/RSPF.
When this simulation is executed, the current adjustment value is displayed as the initial display.
* Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about 0.127mm
* If the values are kept as the default values, SPF/RSPF scan is not performed properly. The
front area of the proper scan position may be scanned.
In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from the home position to the
SPF/RSPF scan position with the adjustment value displayed. The SPF/RSPF glass cover edge
position is calculated from the difference between the SPF/RSPF glass cover edge and the OC
side document glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED lights up with the current set value displayed.

SPF/RSPF scan position


auto adjustment
SPF/RSPF scan position
manual adjustment

Display item
LED
Display lamp
(AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201)
(AR-203E)
AUTO
COPY mode lamp AE mode lamp
MANU

.c

Mode

om

During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, execution is performed
again.

PRINT mode lamp TEXT mode lamp

Default
1
1

OK/ERR display in AUTO


<When OK>

<When ERR>

Polygon motor check


(HSYNC output check)

OK

ERR

[Function]
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is
rotated for 30sec.

hr
an

03

53-08 SPF AUTO


AUTO 100% **

co

53-08 SPF AUTO


AUTO 100% **
61

py

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. (In MANUAL)

At that time, the ZOOM lamp (or the COPY mode lamp for the AR-M200/M201) is lighted for
100msec every time when HSYNC is detected.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display

61-03 LSU CHK


EXECUTING...

01

Shading check

[Function]
Used to display the detection level of white plate for shading.

.te

63

When the light quantity is stabilized, revision is made for every second, and the level of one
pixel at the center of CCD which is not corrected is detected and the value is displayed in decimal values on the LCD/display. (3 digits)
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display
63-01 SHADING CHK
EXECUTING...
000

When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for
shading and the copy lamp is lighted.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 31

Main
code
63

Sub
code
02

Contents

Details of function/operation

Black level automatic


correction

[Function]
Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance.
When this simulation is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit
hexadecimal number.
Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the
density 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of
the plate left center.

10

om

Chart back surface

.c

When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the correction value.
After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the LCD/display.

py

* Default: 0

* If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.


[Operation] (AR-M200/M201)
1) Initial display

After canceling, the machine goes into the sub


code entry standby mode.

co

63-02 BLACK LEVEL


000

<During canceling - When [Clear]/[Clear All] key is


pressed->

2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key:
Correction start

Light quantity stabilization


wait time setting

3) After execution
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** OK
3) In case of an error
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** ERR

[Function]
Used to set the wait time before entering the light quantity level stable evaluation process in the
light quantity stable process of white balance. (Note: The light quantity stable level in the previous light quantity stable state is used as the target. When the light quantity level reaches the
target during the wait time, the set time of this simulation is ignored and the operation enters the
stable evaluation process.)
When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and
press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
Setting range: 0 99 (Complying with the light quantity stable wait time of 0 99sec.)
Default: 15 (15sec)

.te

12

hr
an

63-02 BLACK LEVEL


EXECUTING...

THE JOB IS BEING


CANCELED.

13

Light quantity stabilization


band setting

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 09-04.
[Function]
When the difference between the maximum and the minimum values of the light quantity level
sampled for 3.2sec in the cycle of 100msec in the white balance light quantity stable process is
within the range set with this simulation, it is judged as the light quantity is stable. (Note: The
magnification ratio of the AFE gain setting is automatically reflected on the stable width.)
When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and
press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
Setting range: 1 99 (Light quantity stable width: Complying with 1 99 in 4095 gradations.)
Default: 16
[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 09-04.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 32

Sub
code
01

Contents

Details of function/operation

Self print (1by2 mode)

[Function]
The status of the optical section is ignored and printing of one page is made. Also when the
print command is received from the host, printing is made.
When this simulation is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. (Since,
however, the scanner is disabled, initializing is not made.)
Enter the code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to start paper feed from the
selected cassette and print in the selected pattern.
Code number
0
1
2
3

Pattern
1by2
Grid pattern
White paper
Black background

Display item
1 BY 2
CHECK
WHITE
BLACK

om

Main
code
64

* For 4 99, flip.

01

FAX soft SW setting


(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

.c

66

[Operation]
The operation is similar to simulation 26-02.
[Function]
Use to check the FAX soft SW setting.
Every time when the key is pressed, the bit on the first line is switched 0 and 1.
[Operation]
1) Initial display

3) Select 1

[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.

co

2) Enter a 3-digit value of soft SW No. (To


enter the fourth digit, shift to the left.),
and the press [OK]/[ENTER] key.
No.###
CHANGE?

xxxxxxxx
1:YES 2:NO

hr
an

"xxxxxxxx" is the set content.

Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry


display.

FAX soft SW initializing


(excluding the adjustment
values) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)

4) Change with 1-8 of [Numeric] key and


the press [OK]/[ENTER] key.
No.###
STORED?

xxxxxxxx
1:YES 2:NO

"xxxxxxxx" is the set content.


Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry
display.
5) Select 1
STORED
After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".

[Function]
Use to initializing FAX soft SW.
[Operation]

1) Initial display

.te

02

No.###
xxxxxxxx
USE # KEY
12345678

py

ENTER FAX SOFT SW. #


(3 DIGITS)
SW.___

INITIALIZED

After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 33

Main
code
66

Sub
code
03

Contents

Details of function/operation

FAX PWB memory check


(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

[Function]
Use to check the FAX PWB memory.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT CHECK MEMORY
PRESS ,
][

] key or after 2sec

Every time when [


2 3 1.
When [

] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1

] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.

SELECT MEMORY (1-3)


1:DRAM

SELECT MEMORY (1-3)


2:SRAM

[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.


3) [OK]/[ENTER] key

.c

CHECKING MEMORY
4) After completion of check

MEMORY CHECK RESULT


OK
In case of sum check error

In case of data bus check


error

MEMORY CHECK RESULT


XXXXXXXX A-BUS NG

MEMORY CHECK RESULT


XXXXXXXX D-BUS NG

In case of data check error

In case of erase check error

MEMORY CHECK RESULT


XXXXXXXX DATA
NG

MEMORY CHECK RESULT


XXXXXXXX ERASE NG

co

MEMORY CHECK RESULT


XXXXXXXX SUM
NG

In case of address bus


check error

py

When the result is OK

SELECT MEMORY (1-3)


3:FLASH

om

2) [

[Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".


Signal send mode (Max.
value) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]
Use to set the signal send mode (Max. value).

hr
an

04

Facsimile simulation design specifications.


NO SIGNAL
33600bps(V34)
31200bps(V34)
28800bps(V34)
26400bps(V34)
24000bps(V34)
21600bps(V34)
19200bps(V34)
16800bps(V34)
14400bps(V34)
12000bps(V34)
9600bps(V34)

.te

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

7200bps(V34)
4800bps(V34)
2400bps(V34)
14400bps(V33)
12000bps(V33)
14400bps(V17)
12000bps(V17)
9600bps(V17)
7200bps(V17)
9600bps(V29)
7200bps(V29)
4800bps(V27ter)

[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL
(2 DIGITS)
No.___
2) 2-digit (1-35) with [Numeric] key / [
Pressing [

] key or [

No. (1-35)
1:NO SIGNAL

][

] key / 2sec after

] key reverses the sequence.


.....

No. (1-35)
35:LINE ON HOOK

[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.


3) [OK]/[ENTER] key: Send after setting
OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
[Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 34

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

2400bps(V27ter)
300bps(FLAG)
2100Hz(CED)
1100Hz(CNG)
300bps(V21)
2100Hz(ANSam)
DUMMY RING
NO VOICE ANSWER
NO RING BACK TONE
LINE OFF HOOK
LINE ON HOOK

Sub
code
05

Contents

Details of function/operation

Signal send mode (Soft SW


set value) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]
Use to set the signal send mode (Soft SW set value).
Facsimile simulation design specifications.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

NO SIGNAL
33600bps(V34)
31200bps(V34)
28800bps(V34)
26400bps(V34)
24000bps(V34)
21600bps(V34)
19200bps(V34)
16800bps(V34)
14400bps(V34)
12000bps(V34)
9600bps(V34)

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

7200bps(V34)
4800bps(V34)
2400bps(V34)
14400bps(V33)
12000bps(V33)
14400bps(V17)
12000bps(V17)
9600bps(V17)
7200bps(V17)
9600bps(V29)
7200bps(V29)
4800bps(V27ter)

[Operation]
SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL
(2 DIGITS)
No.___
Pressing [

] key or [

No. (1-35)
1:NO SIGNAL

][

] key / 2sec after

py

2) 2-digit (1-35) with [Numeric] key / [

2400bps(V27ter)
300bps(FLAG)
2100Hz(CED)
1100Hz(CNG)
300bps(V21)
2100Hz(ANSam)
DUMMY RING
NO VOICE ANSWER
NO RING BACK TONE
LINE OFF HOOK
LINE ON HOOK

.c

1) Initial display

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35

om

Main
code
66

] key reverses the sequence.


.....

No. (1-35)
35:LINE ON HOOK

co

[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.

3) [OK]/[ENTER] key: Send after setting


OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP

hr
an

[Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

07

Image memory content print


(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

[Function]
Use to print the image memory content.
[Operation]

When print is allowed


PRINT STORED

Image memory content clear


(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

10

.te

After completion of printing,


FAX control is terminated.

When there is no print data


NO DATA

When print is inhibited


CAN NOT PRINT

After 2 sec, FAX control is


terminated.

After 2 sec, FAX control is


terminated.

[Function]
Use to clear the image memory content.
[Operation]
When there are some print data
CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY
After completion of memory clear, the buzzer
sounds.
CLEARED
PLEASE POWER OFF

When there are no print data


CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY
After completion of memory clear
CLEARED
After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.

Remains unchanged until the power is turned


off.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 35

Main
code
66

Sub
code
11

Contents

Details of function/operation

300bps signal send (Max.


value) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]
Use to set the 300bps signal send (Max. value).
1: NO SIGNAL
2: 11111
3: 11110
4: 00000
5: 010101
6: 00001
[Operation]
1) Initial display

2) [

][

om

SELECT SIGNAL
PRESS ,
] key or after 2sec

Every time when [


] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1
2 3 4 5 6 1.
] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.

SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)


1:NO SIGNAL

.....

SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)


6:00001

.c

When [

3) [OK]/[ENTER] key
OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP

py

[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.

[Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".


300bps signal send (Soft
SW set value) (Executable
only when the FAX is
installed.)

[Function]
Use to set the 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value).
1: NO SIGNAL
2: 11111

hr
an

3: 11110

co

12

4: 00000

5: 010101
6: 00001

[Operation]

1) Initial display

.te

SELECT SIGNAL
PRESS ,

2) [

][

] key or after 2sec

Every time when [


] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1
2 3 4 5 6 1.

When [

] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.

SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)


1:NO SIGNAL

.....

SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)


6:00001

[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.


3) [OK]/[ENTER] key
OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
[Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 36

Main
code
66

Sub
code
13

Contents

Details of function/operation

Dial test (Executable only


when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]
Use to the dial test.
[Operation]
Dial test (PULSE)

Dial test (DTMF)

1) Initial display

1) Initial display

SELECT SIGNAL
1:PULSE
2:DTMF

SELECT SIGNAL
1:PULSE
2:DTMF

[Clear] key: FAX control is


terminated.

[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.


2)

2) Select 1

SELECT HIGH LEVEL


1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
__

3) Enter the make time in 2 digits.


INPUT DIAL #
XXXX

4) [OK]/[ENTER] key

Switched to 10/20PPS set with


pulse selection inside.

hr
an

6) After setting

SENDING yyPPS xxms

7) After completion of sending


TERMINATE ?
1:YES 2:NO

Select 2: Returns to 4) display.


8) Select 1

.te

TERMINATED

After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".

Select 2

INPUT VALUE
(0-15)

__

INPUT DIAL #
XXXX

XXXX: Default

After deleting with [Clear] key, input can be


made.
4) [OK]/[ENTER] key
H:xx
1:YES 2:NO

L:yy

"xx" indicates HI, and "yy" indicates Low Soft SW.


Select 2: Returns to 4) display.
5) Select 1
HI/LO is selected with the signal level inside.
6) After setting the signal send level
SENDING DTMF
7) After completion of sending
TERMINATE ?
1:YES 2:NO
Select 2: Returns to 4) display.
8) Select 1
TERMINATED
After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".

DTMF signal send (Max.


value) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)

17

4) Select 1

co

Select 2: Returns to 2) display.


5) Select 1

"yy" is the selected pulse 10 or 20.


"xx" is the input value.

Select 1

py

SEND yyPPS xxms


1:YES 2:NO

__

SELECT LOW LEVEL


1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.

.c

After deleting with [Clear] key, input


can be made.

INPUT VALUE
(0-15)

3)

XXXX: Default

Select 2

om

INPUT MAKE TIME


(0-15)

Select 2

[Function]
Use to set the DTMF signal send (Max. value).
[Operation]
1) Initial display
INPUT DIAL #
[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
2) [Numeric] key input

3) Communication is started after setting the


signal send level.
SENDING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
[Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

The content selected with signal send


level selection is set inside.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 37

Main
code
66

Sub
code
18

Contents

Details of function/operation

DTMF signal send (Soft SW


set value) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]
Use to set the DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value).
[Operation]
1) Initial display

3) Communication is started after setting the


signal send level.

INPUT DIAL #

SENDING SIGNAL SSW


PRESS CLEAR TO STOP

[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.

[Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

2) [Numeric] key input


The content selected with signal send
level selection is set inside.
FAX information print
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

[Function]
Use to print the FAX information.

om

21

[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT REPORT (1-3)
PRESS ,
] key or after 2sec

When [

.c

][

Every time when [


3 1.

] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 2

] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.

SELECT REPORT (1-3)


1:USER SW. LIST

py

2) [

SELECT REPORT (1-3)


2:SOFT SW. LIST

SELECT REPORT (1-3)


3:PROTOCOL

co

[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.


3) [OK]/[ENTER] key

When print is allowed

After completion of printing,


FAX control is terminated.

24

CAN NOT PRINT

hr
an

PRINT STORED

When print is inhibited

FAST SRAM clear


(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

After 2sec, FAX control is


terminated.

[Function]
Use to clear the FAST SRAM.
[Operation]

1) Initial display

2) After completion of clearing

TEL/LIU status change


check (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)

30

.te

CLEAR FAST SRAM

CLEARED
After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.

[Function]
Use to check the TEL/LIU status change.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
HS2 :xxx
RHS :xxx

HS1 :xxx
EXHS:xxx

The display is switched every 2sec.

CHECKING
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 38

Main
code
66

Sub
code
33

Contents

Details of function/operation

Signal detection check


(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

[Function]
Use to check the signal detection.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
CHECKING
NONE
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
When a signal is detected, the display is changed from NONE to the following.
CI/CNG/CED/BT/DT/Flag/SDT/DTMF
[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.

Communication time
measurement (Executable
only when the FAX is
installed.)

[Function]
Use to measurement the communication time.

om

34

[Operation]
1) Initial display
COMM. TIME
xx:xx:xx:xxx msec
[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.

Speaker sound volume


setting (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)

[Function]
Use to set the speaker sound volume.
1:
2:
3:
4:

NO SOUND
LOW
MID
HIGH

py

37

co

[Operation]
1) Initial display

.c

"xx:xx:xx:xxx" indicates o'clock, minute, second, millisecond.

SELECT SPEEKER VOL.


PRESS ,
][

] key or after 2sec

hr
an

2) [

Every time when [


3 4 1.
When [

] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 2

] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.

SELECT (1-4)
1:NO SOUND

SELECT (1-4)
2:LOW

[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.


3) [OK]/[ENTER] key

.te

STORED
xxx

xxx: Set content

After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 39

.....

Main
code
66

Sub
code
38

Contents

Details of function/operation

Time setting/check
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)

[Function]
Use to check the time setting.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT TO SET
1:DATE
2:TIME
[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
2) Select 2

2) Select 1
xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)
CHANGE?
1:YES 2:NO

xx:xx
CHANGE?

1:YES 2:NO

"xx:xx" is the current value.

3)

3) Select 1

Select 1

INPUT YEAR
(4 DIGITS)____.__.__

INPUT HOUR
(0-24)

Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".

.c

4) Enter o'clock in 2 digits.

INPUT MONTH
(1-12)
1998.__.__

INPUT MINUTE
(00-59)

5) Enter the month in 2 digits.

xx:xx
STORED?

6) Enter the day in 2 digits.

01:__

5) Enter minute in 2 digits.

py

INPUT DAY
(1-31)
1998.01.__

1:YES 2:NO

"xx:xx" is the current value.


Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".

co

xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)
STORED?
1:YES 2:NO

"xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) is the entered value.

Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".

6) Select 1
STORED
After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".

hr
an

STORED

__:__

Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".

4) Enter the year in 4 digits.

7) Select 1

om

"xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)" is the current value. (No


revision of display)

After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".

67

50

USB receive speed


adjustment (USB1.1)
(AR-203E only)

Used to set the limitation on the print data receive speed of USB2.0 (Full speed) port (USB port
on the machine).
When print images from USB2.0 (Full speed) port are disturbed, change the setting and try
again.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.

Code number
1
2
3
4

Setting
FAST
NORMAL1
NORMAL2
SLOW

Speed
Fast

Slow

.te

Enter the code number corresponding to the adjustment value, and press [START] key to
change the setting.

5. Trouble codes

A. Trouble codes list

Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
E1
00 IMC communication trouble
10 IMC trouble
13 IMC flash ROM error
81 IMC communication interface error (Parity)
82 IMC communication interface error (Overrun)
84 IMC communication interface error (Framing)
E7
01 Duplex model memory setup error, memory notdetected error
02 LSU trouble
10 Shading trouble (Black correction)
11 Shading trouble (White correction)

Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
E7
16 Abnormal laser output
F2
02 Toner supply abnormality
04 Improper cartridge (Destination error, life cycle error)
F5
02 Copy lamp lighting abnormality
F6
10 FAX board trouble
H2
00 Thermistor open
H3
00 Heat roller high temperature detection
H4
00 Heat roller low temperature detection
L1
00 Feeding is not completed within the specified time
after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch
is locked)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 40

.te

om

hr
an

co

Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
E1
00 Content IMC communication trouble
Detail
An abnormality occurs in communication
between the CPU and the IMC.
Cause IMC abnormality
IMC memory defect/data abnormality
Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one.
and
remedy
10 Content IMC trouble
Detail
An abnormality occurs in the IMC.
Cause USB chip error/CODEC error on the IMC.
Check Replace the MCU PWB with a new one.
and
remedy
13 Content IMC flash ROM error
Detail
An abnormality occurs in the IMC flash
ROM.
Cause IMC abnormality
Check Replace the MCU PWB with a new one.
and
If downloading of the program is abnormally
remedy terminated, it may cause an error. Download
the program again to avoid this.
81 Content IMC communication interface error (Parity)
Detail
A parity error occurs in communication
between the CPU and the IMC.
Cause IMC abnormality
IMC memory defect/data abnormality
Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one.
and
remedy
E1
82 Content IMC communication interface error
(Overrun)
Detail
An overrun error occurs in communication
between the CPU and the IMC.
Cause IMC abnormality
IMC memory defect/data abnormality.
Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one.
and
remedy
84 Content IMC communication interface error
(Framing)
Detail
A framing error occurs in communication
between the CPU and the IMC.
Cause IMC abnormality
IMC memory defect/data abnormality.
Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one.
and
remedy

.c

B. Details of trouble codes

Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
E7
01 Content Duplex model memory setup error, memory
not-detected error
Detail
The memory is not set properly or the
memory capacity is not set to the duplex
setup (6M).
Check Set SIM 26-39 code number to 2.
and
remedy
02 Content LSU trouble
Detail
The BD signal from the LSU cannot be
detected in a certain cycle. (Always OFF or
always ON)
Cause LSU connector or LSU harness defect or
disconnection
Polygon motor rotation abnormality
Laser beams are not generated.
MCU PWB abnormality.
Check Check connection of the LSU connector.
and
Execute SIM 61-03 to check the LSU
remedy operations.
Check that the polygon motor rotates
normally.
Check that the laser emitting diode
generates laser beams.
Replace the LSU unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
10 Content Shading trouble (Black correction)
Detail
The CCD black scan level is abnormal when
the shading.
Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat
cable
CCD unit abnormality
MCU PWB abnormality
Check Check connection of the CCD unit flat cable.
and
Check the CCD unit.
remedy
11 Content Shading trouble (White correction)
Detail
The CCD white scan level is abnormal when
the shading.
Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat
cable
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, and the reference
white plate
Copy lamp lighting abnormality
CCD unit abnormality
MCU PWB abnormality
(When occurred in the SPF/RSPF scan
position.)
Improper installation of the mirror unit
Check Clean the mirror, lens, and the reference
and
white plate.
remedy Check the light quantity and lighting status of
the copy lamp (SIM 05-03).
Check the MCU PWB.
16 Content Abnormal laser output
Detail
When the laser output is stopped, HSYNC is
detected.
Cause Laser abnormality
MCU PWB abnormality.
Check Check the laser emitting diode operation.
and
Replace the MCU PWB.
remedy

py

Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
L3
00 Scanner return trouble
L4
01 Main motor lock detection
32 Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble
L6
10 Polygon motor lock detection
U1
03 FAX board battery error
U2
04 EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication
error)
11 Counter check sum error (EEPROM)
40 CRUM chip communication error

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 41

py

.c

om

Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
H3
00 Content Heat roller high temperature detection
Detail
The fusing temperature exceeds 240C.
Cause Thermistor abnormality
Control PWB abnormality
Fusing section connector disconnection.
Check Use SIM 5-02 to check the heater lamp
and
blinking operation.
remedy When the lamp blinks normally.
Check the thermistor and its harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit on the
control PWB.
When the lamp keeps ON.
Check the power PWB and the lamp control
circuit on the MCU PWB.
Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic
display.
H4
00 Content Heat roller low temperature detection
Detail
1) When the target temperature (165C) is
not reached in 55 sec after starting
warming-up.
2) When the temperature below 100C is
detected for 300ms under the ready print
state.
"Starting warming-up" means not only that
in power supply but also reset that in reset
from shut-off and in side door close. (The
timing of generating H4 is not limited to
that in power supply.)
Cause Thermistor abnormality
Heater lamp abnormality
Thermostat abnormality
Control PWB abnormality
Check Use SIM 5-02 to check the heater lamp
and
blinking operation.
remedy When the lamp blinks normally.
Check the thermistor and its harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit on the
control PWB.
When the lamp does not light up.
Check for disconnection of the heater lamp
and the thermostat. Check the interlock
switch.
Check the power PWB and the lamp control
circuit on the MCU PWB.
Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic
display.

.te

hr
an

co

Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
F2
02 Content Toner supply abnormality
Detail
The maximum toner supply time is greatly
exceeded.
Cause CRUM chip trouble
Improper developing unit
Check Replace the CRUM chip.
and
Replace the developing unit.
remedy
04 Content Improper cartridge (Destination error, life
cycle error)
Detail
The destination of the main unit differs from
that of the CRUM.
When the life cycle information is other than
Not Used (FFh).
Cause CRUM chip trouble
Improper developing unit
Check Replace the CRUM chip.
and
Replace the developing unit.
remedy
F5
02 Content Copy lamp lighting abnormality
Detail
The copy lamp does not turn on.
Cause Copy lamp abnormality
Copy lamp harness abnormality
CCD PWB harness abnormality.
Check Use SIM 5-3 to check the copy lamp
and
operations.
remedy When the copy lamp lights up.
Check the harness and the connector
between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB.
When the copy lamp does not light up.
Check the harness and the connector
between the copy lamp unit and the MCU
PWB.
Replace the copy lamp unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
F6
10 Content FAX board trouble
Detail
Communication trouble between MCU and
FAX control PWB
Cause FAX control PWB connector disconnection
Defective harness between FAX control
PWB and MCU PWB
Motherboard connector pin breakage
FAX control PWB ROM error/Data error
IC on FAX PWB causes abnormality
Check Check connector/harness of FAX control
and
PWB and MCU PWB.
remedy Check the grounding of the copier.
Check FAX control PWB ROM.
Replace the FAX PWB.
H2
00 Content Thermistor open
Detail
The thermistor is open.
The fusing unit is not installed.
Cause Thermistor abnormality
Control PWB abnormality
Fusing section connector disconnection
The fusing unit is not installed.
Check Check the harness and the connector
and
between the thermistor and the PWB.
remedy Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic
display.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 42

py

.c

om

Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
L4
32 Content Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble
Detail
The error detection is started after 2 sec
from starting rotation of the exhaust fan
motor.
1) The continuous rotation state of 250ms is
not detected for 1 sec after starting
detection.
2) When the lock sensor (in the exhaust fan)
detects the HIGH level (unstable) after
detection the lock state (stable state).
Cause Exhaust fan motor connector connection
trouble
Exhaust fan motor trouble
MCU PWB trouble
Check Exhaust fan motor connector connection
and
check
remedy Exhaust fan motor replacement
Replace the MCU PWB.
L6
10 Content Polygon motor lock detection
Detail
The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does
not return within a certain time (about 20
sec) from starting the polygon motor
rotation.
Cause Polygon motor unit abnormality
Improper connection or disconnection of the
polygon motor and the harness.
MCU PWB abnormality
Check Use SIM 61-1 to check the polygon motor
and
operations.
remedy Check connection of the polygon motor
harness/connector.
Replace the polygon motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.
U1
03 Content FAX board battery error
Details The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX
PWB falls.
Cause The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX
PWB falls.
Check Check voltage of the SRAM back up battery.
and
Replace the battery.
remedy
U2
04 Content EEPROM read/write error (Serial
communication error)
Detail
EEPROM access process error
Cause EEPROM abnormality
Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
and
Use SIM 16 to cancel the trouble.
remedy Replace the MCU PWB.
11 Content Counter check sum error (EEPROM)
Detail
Check sum error of the counter area in the
EEPROM
Cause EEPROM abnormality
Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
and
Use SIM 16 to cancel the trouble.
remedy Replace the MCU PWB.
40 Content CRUM chip communication error
Detail
An error occurs in MCU-CRUM chip
communication.
Cause CRUM chip trouble
Defective contact of developing unit
MCU PWB trouble
Check Replace the CRUM chip.
and
Check installation of the developing unit.
remedy Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power.
Replace the MCU PWB.

.te

hr
an

co

Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
L1
00 Content Feeding is not completed within the
specified time after starting feeding. (The
scan head locking switch is locked)
Detail
The white area and the black marking on the
shading plate are used to obtain the
difference in the CCD level values for
judgment of lock. When the difference in the
levels of which and black is small, it is judged
that the black mark could not be scanned by
lock and the trouble code "L1" is displayed.
Cause The scan head is locked by the lock switch.
Mirror unit abnormality
The scanner wire is disconnected.
The origin detection sensor abnormality
Mirror motor harness abnormality
Check Check to confirm that the scan head lock
and
switch is released.
remedy Use SIM 1-1 to check the mirror
reciprocating operations.
When the mirror does not feed.
Check for disconnection of the scanner wire.
Check the harness and the connector
between the mirror motor and the MCU
PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
When the mirror does feed.
Use SIM 1-2 to check the mirror home
position sensor.
L3
00 Content Scanner return trouble
Detail
When the mirror base is returned for the
specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing
after turning on the power, the mirror home
position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON.
Or when the mirror base is returned for the
specified time (about 6 sec) after start of
copy return, the mirror home position sensor
(MHPS) does not turn ON.
Cause Mirror unit abnormality
Scanner wire disconnection
Origin detection sensor abnormality
Mirror motor harness abnormality
Check Use SIM 1-1 to check the mirror
and
reciprocating operations.
remedy When the mirror does not return.
Check for disconnection of the scanner wire.
Check the harness and the connector
between the mirror motor and the MCU
PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
When the mirror does feed.
Use SIM 1-2 to check the mirror home
position sensor.
L4
01 Content Main motor lock detection
Detail
When the main motor encoder pulse is not
detected for 100 msec.
Cause Main motor unit abnormality
Improper connection or disconnection the
main motor and the harness.
MCU PWB abnormality
Check Use SIM 25-01 to check the main motor
and
operations.
remedy Check connection of the main motor
harness/connector.
Replace the main motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 43

[11] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance table
: Check (Clean, adjust, or replace when required.)
Section
Developing

Process peripheral

Parts
Developer
DV blade
DV side seal (F/R)
DV doctor
Drum

25K

50K

75K

: Clean

100K

: Replace

125K

: Adjust

: Lubricate

Remark

White streaks are made on the image.

Life
Remaining quantity
LED
Machine
Life
LED
Machine

Developer

8K
EMPTY

NEAR EMPTY
About 12.5%
ON
Operation allowed

Flash
Stop
25K

ON at 25K of the developer count.


Selection is available between Not Stop and Stop by Service Simulation (SIM 26-37) Setup.
(If Stop is selected, the LED will flash and stop at 25K.)

.c

Toner

py

Default: Not Stop

Clear: SIM 24-06


Selection is available among 25K, 13K, 9K, 6K, 3K, and free (no lighting) with SIM 21-1.
Default: 25K

LED

Clear: SIM 20-1


Not stop.

Machine

co

Maintenance

om

2. Maintenance display system

Note: When developer is replaced, be sure to execute simulation No. 24-06 to reset the counter.

TONER FULL

hr
an

3. Remaining toner indication

Display for users

Remaining toner indication

100%

.te

75%

Lo

50%

75-51%

50-26%

25-13%

12.5% or less

100-76%

LOW LEVEL

25%

The remaining toner indication is based on the number of revolutions of the toner motor.
The toner END indication appears when the END is detected by the toner sensor.
The remaining toner indication is a rough indication of the remaining toner quantity.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 MAINTENANCE 11 - 1

[12] USER PROGRAM


The conditions of factory setting can be changed according to the
use conditions.

3) To enter the toner save mode, press the light (


) key. The
light and dark indicator marked "1" will light up, indicating the
toner save mode is selected.

1. Functions that can be set with user


programs
Toner save mode
Reduces toner consumption by approximately 10%.

When the unit enters the preheat mode, the power save ( ) indicator will light up and other indicators will remain on or off as
before. In this condition, the fuser in the unit is maintained at a
lower heat level, thereby saving power. To copy from the preheat
mode, make desired copier selections and press the start (
)
key using the normal copying procedure.
Auto power shut-off mode

Auto clear

The unit returns to the initial settings a preset amount of time after
the end of job.

The user programs allow the parameters of certain functions to be


set, changed, or canceled as desired.
Set the power save modes, auto clear time, preheat mode,
SPF automatic original discharge time, resolution of AUTO &
MANUAL mode and reset factory setting.
1) Press and hold down the light (
) key simultaneously for
more than 5 seconds until all the alarm indicators
(
,
,
, ) blink and "
" appears in the display.
2) Use the left copy quantity (
) key to select a user program
number (1: Auto clear time, 2: Preheat mode, 3: Auto power
shut off mode, 4: Auto power shut off timer, 6: SPF automatic
original discharge time, 10: Resolution of AUTO & MANUAL
mode, 21: Reset factory, 24: Prevention of OC copies when
the SPF is up function, 25: Copy effective paper width setting
function (Bypass tray), 26: Copy effective paper width setting
function (Tray), 28: Selection of copy start state (Polygon rotation on/off), 29: Fusing temperature setting when the bypass
tray is used). The selected number will blink in the left side of
the display.

hr
an

This preset amount of time (auto clear time) can be changed.

3. User programs (AR-203E/5420)

co

When the unit enters the auto power shut-off mode, the power
save ( ) indicator will light up and other indicators except the
ONLINE indicator will go out. The auto power shut-off mode saves
more power than the preheat mode but requires a longer time
before starting copying. To copy from the auto power shut-off
mode, press the start (
) key. Then make desired copier selections and press the start (
) key using the normal copying procedure.

Note: To return to the standard mode, repeat the procedure but


use the dark (
) key to select exposure level "5" in step
3).

om

Preheat mode

4) Press the exposure mode selector key. The PHOTO (


)
indicator will stop blinking and light up steadily. The light and
dark indicator marked "3" will light up. The toner save mode is
now active.

.c

The unit has two power save modes of operation: preheat mode
and auto power shut-off mode.

py

Power save modes

Resolution of AUTO & MANUAL mode

You can set the copy resolution used for AUTO and MANUAL
(
) exposure mode.

2. Toner save mode (AR-203E/5420)

.te

1) Press the exposure mode selector key to select the MANUAL


(
) mode.

2) Press and hold down the exposure mode selector key for
approximately 5 seconds. The MANUAL (
) indicator will
go out and the PHOTO (
) indicator will begin to blink. The
light and dark indicator marked "5" will light up, indicating the
standard toner mode is active.

3) Press the start (


) key. The entered program number will be
steadily lit and the currently selected parameter number for the
program will blink on the right side of the display.
4) Select the desired parameter using the right copy quantity
(
) key. The entered parameter number will blink on the
right of the display.
Program
Mode
No.
1
Auto clear time

3
4

10
21
24

Parameters

1 10 sec., 2 30 sec.,
*3 60 sec., 4 90 sec.,
5 120 sec., 6 OFF
Preheat mode
*1 30 sec., 2 60 sec.,
3 5 min., 4 30 min.,
5 60 min., 6 120 min.,
7 240 min.
Auto power shut off mode *1 ON, 2 OFF
Auto power shut off timer *1 5 min., 2 30min.,
3 60 min., 4 120 min.,
5 240 min.
SPF automatic original
1 5 min., *2 30 min.,
discharge time
3 60 min., 4 120 min.,
5 240 min., 6 OFF
Resolution of AUTO &
*1 300dpi, 2 600dpi
MANUAL mode
Reset factory
1 YES, *2 NO
Prevention of OC copies
*1 ON, 2 OFF
when the SPF is up
function

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 1

Program
Mode
No.
25
Copy effective paper width
setting function (Bypass
tray)
26
Copy effective paper width
setting function (Tray)
28

3) Press the [
] key [
] or [
ting of the selected item.

Parameters
*1 Large (A4 width/
LETTER), 2 Small (B5R
width/INVOICE)
*1 Large (A4 width/
LETTER), 2 Small (B5R
width/INVOICE)
*1 ON, 2 OFF

Selection of copy start


state (Polygon rotation on/
off)
Fusing temperature
1 Low, *2 High
setting when the bypass
tray is used

29

] key [

] to change the set-

See "1. User programs" for the program code.


PREHEAT MODE
1:1 MIN

PREHEAT MODE
1:1 MIN

1
2
2

1
2
1

2
1

NOTE:
If you mistakenly select the wrong item, press the [Clear] key
(
) and repeat the procedure from step 2).
To cancel a setting for a user program, press the [MENU] key.

5) Press the start (


) key. The right-hand number in the display
will be steadily lit and the entered value will be stored.

4)

6) Press the light (

) key to return to the normal copy mode.

4. User programs (AR-M200/M201)

Press the [OK]/[ENTER] key.

Your selection appears briefly and then the previous screen


appears.
NOTE:

When "AE LEVEL ADJUST" is selected in the user programs and


the [OK]/[ENTER] key is pressed, the automatic exposure
adjustment screen appears. Adjust the exposure and press the
[OK]/[ENTER] key.

.c

Note: To change the setting or to set another mode, press the


clear key. The unit will return to step 2).

MAIN MENU
1:USER PROGRAM

1
2
1

2
1

2) Press the [
] key [
] or [
] key [
] to select the item
that you wish to configure in the USER PROGRAM items, and
then press the [OK]/[ENTER] key.
See "1. User programs" for the program name and program
code.

You can also select a program by directly entering the program number with the numeric keys.

2
1

The beep patterns of each type of beep signal are as follows:


Key entry beep: One beep
Base setting beep: Three beeps

Invalid key beep: Two beeps

Base settings
The base settings are preset standard selections for each copy
setting. The base settings are as follows:
Copy ratio: 100%
Light and Dark level: Center

1
2
1

USER PROGRAM
2:PREHEAT MODE

.te

USER PROGRAM
2:PREHEAT MODE

1
2
2

The machine sounds three different types of beep signals: a key


entry beep that sounds when a valid key is pressed, an invalid
key beep that sounds when an invalid key is pressed, and a base
setting beep that sounds when a setting is the same as the base
setting (base settings are explained below). The base setting
beep is initially disabled. If you wish to enable the base setting
beep, see "SOUND AT DEFAULT". If you wish to change the volume of the beep signals or disable them, see "KEY TOUCH
SOUND".

hr
an

1
2
2

Audible signals (key entry beep, invalid key beep, base


setting beep)

co

MAIN MENU
1:USER PROGRAM

py

1) Press the [MENU] key and then press the [OK]/[ENTER] key.
In printer mode, the user programs are accessed by simply
pressing the [MENU] key.

om

Factory default settings are indicated with an asterisk (*).

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 2

Paper feed location:


Tray 1 (Upper paper tray)
AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO: AUTO

A. Copy mode
Program
number

Program name

Setting codes
(factory default setting
appears in bold)

Explanation

AUTO CLEAR

1: 10 SEC.
2: 30 SEC.
3: 60 SEC.
4: 90 SEC.
5: 120 SEC.
6: OFF

Auto clear time automatically returns the copy settings to the initial settings
if no keys are pressed for a preset period of time following the end of a copy
job.
This program is used to select the period of time. Auto clear time can also
be disabled.

PREHEAT MODE

1: 30 SEC.
2: 1 MIN.
3: 5 MIN.
4: 30 MIN.
5: 60 MIN.
6: 120 MIN.
7: 240 MIN.

This function automatically switches the machine to a low power


consumption state if the set duration of time elapses without the machine
being used when the power is on. The power save indicator lights up,
however, the keys on the operation panel can be used. Normal operation
automatically resumes when a key on the operation panel is pressed, an
original is placed, a print job is received.

AUTO SHUT-OFF

1: ON
2: OFF

Use this setting to enable or disable auto power shut-off mode.

AUTO SHUT-OFF
TIME

1: 5 MIN.
2: 30 MIN.
3: 60 MIN.
4: 120 MIN.
5: 240 MIN.

This function automatically switches the machine to a state that consumes


even less power than preheat mode if the set duration of time elapses
without the machine being used when the power is on. All lights except the
power save indicator go off. To resume normal operation, press the
[START] key ( ). Normal operation also resumes automatically when a
print job is received or scanning is begun from a computer. While in auto
power shut-off mode, no keys (except the [START] key ( )) can be used.

LAYOUT IN 2IN1

1: PATTERN 1
2: PATTERN 2

Use this setting to select the layout pattern when two original pages are
copied onto a single sheet of paper.

OFFSET
FUNCTION

1: ON
2: OFF

When enabled, this function offsets the position of each set of copies in the
output tray in copy mode, and each print job in printer mode.

ROTATE ORIG.
IMAGE
(AR-208D only)

1: ON
2: OFF

10

AE/TEXT
RESOLUTION

1: 300dpi
2: 600dpi

11

2-SIDED COPY
MODE
(AR-208D only)

1: HI-SPEED
2: NORMAL

If the memory fills up when two-sided copying is performed, "NORMAL"


can be selected to make copying possible. However, "NORMAL" results in
a slower copying speed. Normally "HI-SPEED" is selected to enable fast
two-sided copying.

12

MARGIN WIDTH

1: 1/4"
2: 1/2"
3: 3/4"
4: 1"

Use this setting to set the margin width.

13

MEM. FOR
PRINTER

1: 30%
2: 40%
3: 50%
4: 60%
5: 70%

Use this to change the proportion of machine memory used for printer
mode.

14

AUTO KEY REPEAT

1: ON
2: OFF

Use this setting to select whether or not holding down a key causes
repeated input of the key. For keys that normally cause a set value to
decrease or increase when held down (for example, the [
] key (
) or
[
] key (
)), this program can be used to have the set value not
change when the key is held down.
Use this setting to select how long a key must be pressed for the input to be
accepted. By selecting a longer time, you can prevent settings from being
changed by the accidental pressing of a key.

.c

py

co

When two-sided copying is performed, this function rotates the image on


the back of the original. This is convenient when binding the copies at the
top (tablet binding).

This setting is used to change the copy resolution in AUTO and TEXT
mode from 600 x 300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high-quality mode). Scanning is
slower when high-quality mode is used.

hr
an

.te

w
w

om

15

KEY PRESS TIME

1: NORMAL
2: 0.5 SEC.
3: 1.0 SEC.
4: 1.5 SEC.
5: 2.0 SEC.

16

KEY TOUCH
SOUND

1: LOW
2: HIGH
3: OFF

This sets the volume of beep signals.

17

SOUND AT
DEFAULT

1: ON
2: OFF

Use this to sound a beep when a base setting is selected.

18

TONER SAVE
MODE

1: ON
2: OFF

This mode reduces toner usage by about 10% when copying. Toner save
mode is effective when the exposure mode is AUTO or TEXT.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 3

Setting codes
(factory default setting
appears in bold)

Program
number

Program name

19

AE LEVEL ADJUST

1: SPF/RSPF
(Adjustment to 5 levels
is possible.)
2: DOCUMENT GLASS
(Adjustment to 5 levels
is possible.)

This is used to adjust the exposure level.


The automatic exposure level can be adjusted separately for the document
glass and the RSPF.
For the procedure for adjusting the exposure and guidelines for numeric
values. The factory default setting for the exposure level is center.

20

LANGUAGE

1: AMERICAN ENGLISH
2: ENGLISH
3: FRENCH
4: SPANISH
:
:

This is used to set the language used in the display.

21

RESET FACTORY

1: Yes
2: No

This is used to return all settings to the factory default settings.

22

SORT AUTO
SELECT

1: ON
2: OFF

Use this setting to enable or disable sort auto select mode.

24

CHECK RSPF
OPEN

1: ON
2: OFF

You can set the operation that takes place if the [START] key ( ) is
pressed when the RSPF is not completely closed. (Valid only when the
multi-bypass paper feed is used.)

25

VALID COPY
WIDTH

1: 8.5x11
2: 5.5x8.5

Set the allowed paper sizes for copying from the bypass tray. When
"5.5x8.5" is selected, a copy of a letter size original will only be printed up
to invoice size.

28

LSU SETTING

1: ON
2: OFF

Select whether copying is only allowed when the polygon motor is rotating,
or also when the polygon motor is stopped.

29

PAPER TYPE

1: PLAIN PAPER
2: HEAVY PAPER

Set the temperature of the fusing unit when the bypass tray is used.
Normally "HEAVY PAPER" should be selected.

30

DISPLAY
CONTRAST

1: LIGHTER
2: LIGHT
3: NORMAL
4: DARK
5: DARKER

Program
number

Program name
FORCED OUTPUT

USB 2.0 MODE


SWITCH *1

AUTO TRAY
SWITCH*2

1: ON
2: OFF

1: FULL-SPEED
2: HI-SPEED

co

py

.c

om

Setting codes
(factory default setting
appears in bold)

.te

Set the contrast of the display.

hr
an

B. Print mode

Explanation

1: ON
2: OFF

Explanation

When this function is enabled, printing in printer mode will automatically


continue using a different size of paper if the specified size of paper runs out
in all trays. This feature does not function in copy mode.
This sets the USB 2.0 data transfer speed. To obtain the fastest speed when
using the USB 2.0 connector, first verify that your computer meets the
system requirements (operating system and driver), and then use this
program to change the USB 2.0 mode to "Hi-Speed". Note that the setting
should not be changed while running a TWAIN driver.
If the paper runs out during printing and there is paper of the same size in
another tray, this function automatically switches to that tray (excluding the
bypass tray). The function can be disabled.

*1: The scanning speed increases when the USB 2.0 mode is set to "HI-SPEED", however, the printing speed does not increase considerably.

*2: When the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 4

CCD Driver

MCU-PWB

5V

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 1

12V

Driver

24V

USB I/F

MainMotor

Sensor/SW
PAPD,PPD3,
PD2,CED2

Mechanical load
CPFS2

2nd Cassette
(AR-203E Optional only)

Fan Motor
(2speed with Lock detect)

USB1T20

Scanner CLK(48MHz)

A
G
C

A5V

M
P
X

AD

KRONOS ASIC

Mirror Motor

Driver

(296pin)

Lamp Inverter
for CCFL

CCFL x 2

LASER

LSU

PWM

3.3V

HC151

MHPS

Driver

POWER SUPPLY

OP-CLK
OP-LATCH
OP-DATA

AC Code

.c

py
PSW

TC, GRID, MC, BIAS

HVU

EEPROM
(CRUM)

I2C Bus
8Kbyte
EEPROM

I2C Bus

SELIN1,2,3
KEYIN1,2

PSL

ONL

co

CPU CLK(19.6608MHz)

SSCG

CPU
H8S/2321
(19.6608MHz)

/POFF,HL,PR
FW
3.3V,5VEN,5V,12V,24V

SRAM
1Mbit
Flash ROM 16Mbit

D[150]

A[191]

Reset IC

System Reset

16Mbyte
or 8Mbyte

SDRAM

HOME
POSITION
SENSOR

SPF Motor (AR-203E optional only)

hr
an

Polygon
Motor

DC-DC

0 - 24V

.te

8bits(MSB/LSB)

5V

Reg

Toner Motor

Driver

3.3V

16bits

3.3V

C
D
S

Printer CLK
(18.3856MHz)

R
G
B

/MMD

CCD
(ILX558X)

NF

AFE(HT82V24)

MMCLK

USB2.0
FullSpeed
(expect for
AR-5420)

5V

/MMRDY

12V

PMD

CCD PWB

PMCLK

Carriage Unit

16bit

LED Driver

om

HC151 x 2

PSL LED

ONL LED

OPE PWB

LED

Interlock SW
Cassette detector X 2
Drum Initial detector
PPD1
POD
MFD
PPD2
SPOD
PD1

START KEY

KEY Matrix

CPU I/O

CPU INTERRUPT
SPPD

Sensor/SW
(Electorical detector/SW/Sensor)

MPFS,RRS,CPFS1

Mechanical Load

[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION

1. Block diagram

A. Overall block diagram (AR-203E/5420)

Fan Motor

Shifter Motor

Duplex Motor

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 2

Driver

Driver

C
D
S

A
G
C

18.3856MHz

Printer CLK

/MMD

Sensor/SW
PPD3,
PD2, CED2

M
P
X

/MMLD

Main Motor

Mechanical load
CPFS2

Driver

24V 12V

2nd Cassette

Duplex Model Only

A5V

SSCG
Scanner CLK (12MHz x4 48MHz)

MCU-PWB

CCD Driver

R
G
B

Reg

AFE(HT86V26)

12V

MMCLK

5V

CCD
(ILX558K)

12V

Mirror Motor

Driver

LSU
LASER

D[150]

A[191]

Reset IC

3.3V

Polygon
Motor

OP-CLK
OP-LATCH
OP-DATA

EEPROM

I2C Bus
8Kbyte

UART

/ESPRD

AC Code

/POFF,HL,PR
FW
3.3V,5VEN,5V,12V,24V

POWER SUPPLY

TC, GRID, MC, BIAS

HVU

EEPROM
(CRUM)

CPU CLK (19.6608MHz)

SSCG

CPU
H8S/2321
(19.6608MHz)

System Reset

D[158]

CPUCLK

MHPS

Driver

PSL

SDRAM

256Mbx2

LCD E
LCD RS
LCD R/W (TBD)
LCD DB7-4

PSW

KEYSCAN1 - 3

SELIN1,2,3
KEYIN

8Mb
or 16Mb

OA982

P-Bus

OPE PWB

Flash ROM

8bit

.c
LCD
(2 x 20)

START KEY

LED

USB2.0
High-speed

NW PWB

Network Box
100Base-T

AR-NB2A
(Option)

om

Buzzer

KEY Matrix

LED Driver

18.3856MHz

ISP1583

12MHz

FAX I/F

Speaker

AR-FX13 (Option)

FAX Main PCBA

HC238
(3 to 8 decode) 8bit

HC151

PSL LED

py

co

D[7..0]
RD
CS
INT

RSPF Motor (AR-M200/M201 optional only)

hr
an

Image BUS(PI-Bus)
Image BUS(PO-Bus)

SDRAM
8Mbyte

SRAM
1Mbit
Flash ROM 16Mbit

8
8

IO ASIC

DC-DC
PWM

HOME
POSITION
SENSOR

.te

0 - 24V

Lamp Inverter
for CCFL

CCFL x 2

8bits (MSB/LSB)

KRONOS ASIC
(296pin)

Toner Motor

Driver

3.3V

AD
16bits

3.3V

PMRDY
PMD

PMCLK

Carriage Unit

Sensor/SW
(Electorical detector/SW/Sensor)

AR-FX13

CPU I/O

LED

SPID
SRJD
SCOD

Interlock SW
Cassette detector X 2
Drum Initial detector
PPD1
POD
MFD
PPD2

CPU INTERRUPT
SPPD

KEY Matrix

FAX OPE PWB

FAX Model Only

Ethernet

(RSPF UNIT) SPUS,SRVC

MPFS,RRS,CPFS1

Mechanical Load

B. Overall block diagram (AR-M200/M201)

24V
P-GND
/PMD
PMRDY
PMCLK_A

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 3

1
2
3
4
5

MPFS
SOLENOID

PPD1

CED1
D-GND

CASSETTE PAPER
SOLENOID

RESIST ROLLER
SOLENOID

TONER MT

CED1

LD

- HSYNC
D-GND
+5V
D-GND
- LDEN
- VIDEO
- S/H
D-GND

5
4
3
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2

POLYGON MT

MAIN MT

INT24V
PGND
/MMD
MMLD
/MMCLK

POD

CN22
1 LEDPPD2
2 PPD2
3 D-GND
4 RTH_IN
5 D-GND
B5B-PH-K-S

DHAI-0272QSZZ

1
2
3
4
5

DSW

CN16
1 LEDPPD1
2 PPD1
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-R

DHAI-0289QSZZ

CN15
1 24V
2 24V1(DSWS)
B2P-VH-R

CN26
24V
/MPFS
5
MFD
DGND
B5B-PH-K-R

CN7
1 CED1
2 D-GND
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-K

1
2
3
B3B-PH-K-S

CN10
24V
/CPFS1

1
2
3
B3B-PH-K-E

CN12
24V
/RRS

CN23
1 TMA_O
2 TMB_O
B2P-VH

CN6
1 INT24V
2 PGND
3 /MMD
4 MMLD
5 /MMCLK
B5B-PASK-1

DHAI-0269QSZZ

DHAI-0514QSPZ

CN41
1 24V
2 P-GND
3 /PMD
4 PMRDY
5 PMCLK_A
B05B-CZHK-B

DHAI-0529QSPZ

CN25
1
2 PD1
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-M

CN42
1 /SYNC
2 D-GND
3 INT5V
4 D-GND
5 /LDEN
6 /VIDEO
7 SHOLD
8 D-GND
B08B-CZHK-B

CN19
1 LEDPOD
2 POD
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-S

CN11
1 VFMOUT
2 FANLK
3 /VFMCNT
4 PGND
B4B-PH-K-S

DHAI-0287QSZZ

1
2

1
2
3

DHAI-0530QSPZ

DHAI-0286QSZZ

RTH_IN
D-GND

1
2

Thermistor

Fan MT

LEDPPD2
PPD2
D-GND

1
2
3

DHAI-0519QSPZ

PPD2

CN1
D-GND
9
P-GND
10
D-GND
11
3.3VIN
12
EN5V
13
3.3VIN
14
5V
15
/POFF
16
12VIN
17
24V
18
FW
19
24V
20
/PR
21
HLOUT
22
P-GND
23
P-GND
24
B24B-PNDZS-1

1
2
3
4
/BIAS
5
/TC
6
/GRIDL
7
/MC
8
B24B-PNDZS-1

CN1
INT5V
INT24V

CN5
24V
1
TCS
2
DVSEL
3
D-GND
4
B4B-PH-K-R

P-GND
P-GND
VCL
VCL
12V
12V
EN5V
D-GND
(VSAMP)
CCD-TG
D-GND
CCD-RS
(BSAMP)
CCD-CP
(AFE_SDI)
CCD_PHI2
D-GND
CCD_PHI1
(AFE_SEN)
(ADCLK)
D-GND
(AFE_SCK)
(AFE_DB7)
MHPS
(AFE_DB5)
(AFE_DB6)
D-GND
(AFE_DB4)
(AFE_DB3)
(AFE_DB2)
(AFE_DB1)
(AFE_DB0)

CN304
D-GND
KIN1
SELIN3
OP-STB
SELIN1
OP-CLK
SELIN2
OP-LATCH
OP-DATA
5VEN
D-GND
PSL
ONL
PSW
KIN2
5V
DRST
D-GND

2 5VEN
4 (CRUMSDA)
3 (CRUMSCL)
1 PGND
P18-FX-4S-C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

DHAI-0525QSPZ

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2

D-GND
P-GND
D-GND
3.3VIN
EN5V
3.3VIN
5V
/POFF
12VIN
24V
FW
24V
/PR
HLOUT
P-GND
P-GND

/BIAS
/TC
/GRIDL
/MC

INT5V
INT24V

BIAS
F-GND

DHAI-0526QSPZ

VCL
P-GND

L
N

HLN

HLL

BC

TC

MCFB
GRID

.c
MC

1
2
3

24V
TCS
DVSEL
D-GND
BIAS

DHAI-0273QSZZ

DHAI-0515QSPZ

1
2
6
5
8

1
2

1
2
6
5
8

INVERTER
PWB

1
2

1
4

AC-INLET
L
N
PGND

DHAI-0536QSPZ

DHAI-0267QSPZ

DHAI-0292QSZZ

HLL
HLN

SCANNER
UN

SCANNER MT

om

1
2

OPE
PWB

CCD
PWB

HVT PWB

POWER
SUPPLY
PWB

CRUM

py

DHAI-0516QSPZ

DHAI-0268QSZ4

DHAI-0513QSPZ

co
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
9
10
B10B-PHDSS-B

CN5
5VEN
(CRUMSDA)
(CRUMSCL)
PGND
24V
TCS
DVSEL
D-GND

hr
an

MCU
PWB

.te
CN3
P-GND
1
P-GND
2
VCL
3
VCL
4
12V
5
12V
6
EN5V
7
D-GND
8
(VSAMP)
9
CCD-TG
10
D-GND
11
CCD-RS
12
(BSAMP)
13
CCD-CP
14
(AFE_SDI)
15
CCD_PHI2
16
D-GND
17
CCD_PHI1
18
(AFE_SEN)
19
(ADCLK)
20
D-GND
21
(AFE_SCK)
22
(AFE_DB7)
23
mt_at_home
24
(AFE_DB5)
25
(AFE_DB6)
26
D-GND
27
28
(AFE_DB4)
29
(AFE_DB3)
30
(AFE_DB2)
31
(AFE_DB1)
32
(AFE_DB0)
FF4-32-S15D5

CN4
OUTA+
1
OUTB+
2
OUTA3
OUTB4
B4B-PH-K-R

CN2
D-GND
1
KEYIN1#
2
SELIN3
3
STROBE
4
SELIN1
5
OP-CLK
6
SELIN2
7
OP-LATCH
8
OP-DATA
9
EN5V
10
D-GND
11
PSL
12
ONL
13
PSW
14
KEYIN2#
15
5V
16
DRST
17
D-GND
18
IMSA-9619S-18A

AC-CORD

1
2

TCS

CL

CL

DHAI-0537QSPZ

DV
un

HL

THERMOSTAT

2. Actual wiring diagram

A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420)

1
2
3
4
5

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 4

MPFS
SOLENOID

PPD1

CED1

PD1

CED1
D-GND

CASSETTE PAPER
SOLENOID

RESIST ROLLER
SOLENOID

TONER MT

MAIN MT

INT24V
PGND
/MMD
MMLD
/MMCLK

5
4
3
2
1

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

1
2

POLYGON MT

24V
P-GND
/PMD
PMRDY
PMCLK_A

LD

- HSYNC
D-GND
+5V
D-GND
- LDEN
- VIDEO
- S/H
D-GND

FAX Model only

POD

Duplex Model only

DUPLEX MT

SHIFTER MT

DHAI-0519QSPZ
1
2
3

D-GND

LEDPPD2
PPD2
D-GND

1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5

CN27
24VSFTMT
/SFTMT_0
/SFTMT_1
/SFTMT_2
/SFTMT_3

CN16
1 VFMOUT
2 FANLK
3 /VFMCNT
4 PGND
B4B-PH-K-S

CN11
1 LEDPPD2
2 PPD2
3 D-GND
4 RTH_IN
5 D-GND
B5B-PH-K-S

DSW
DHAI-0272QSZZ

CN24
1 LEDPPD1
2 PPD1
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-R

DHAI-0289QSZZ

CN10
1 24V
2 24V1(DSWS)
B2P-VH-R

CN14
24V
1
/MPFS
2
5
3
MFD
4
DGND
5
B5B-PH-K-R

CN21
1 CED1
2 D-GND
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-K

CN15
1 24V
2 /CPFS1
3
B3B-PH-K-S

CN18
1 24V
2 /RRS
3
B3B-PH-K-E

CN25
1 TMA_O
2 TMB_O
B2P-VH

CN12
1 INT24V
2 PGND
3 /MMD
4 MMLD
5 /MMCLK
B5B-PASK-1

CN28
1
2 PD1
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-M

DHAI-0269QSZZ

DHAI-0514QSPZ

DHAI-0423QSZZ

CN41
1 24V
2 P-GND
3 /PMD
4 PMRDY
5 PMCLK_A
B05B-CZHK-B

DHAI-0529QSP1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

CN2
D-GND
9
P-GND
10
D-GND
11
3.3VIN
12
EN5V
13
3.3VIN
14
5V
15
/POFF
16
12VIN
17
24V
18
FW
19
24V
20
/PR
21
HLOUT
22
P-GND
23
P-GND
24
B24B-PNDZS-1

CN2
INT5V
1
INT24V
2
P-GND
3
P-GND
4
/BIAS
5
/TC
6
/GRIDL
7
/MC
8
B24B-PNDZS-1

CN6
24V
1
TCS
2
DVSEL
3
D-GND
4
B4B-PH-K-R

2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
9
10
B10B-PHDSS-B

CN7
5VEN
(CRUMSDA)
(CRUMSCL)
D-GND
24V
TCS
DVSEL
D-GND

CN4
P-GND
1
P-GND
2
VCL
3
VCL
4
12V
5
12V
6
EN5V
7
D-GND
8
(VSAMP)
9
CCD-TG
10
D-GND
11
CCD-RS
12
(BSAMP)
13
CCD-CP
14
(AFE_SDI)
15
CCD_PHI2
16
D-GND
17
CCD_PHI1
18
(AFE_SEN)
19
(ADCLK)
20
D-GND
21
(AFE_SCK)
22
(AFE_DB7)
23
mt_at_home
24
(AFE_DB5)
25
(AFE_DB6)
26
D-GND
27
(AFE_DB4)
28
(AFE_DB3)
29
(AFE_DB2)
30
31
(AFE_DB1)
(AFE_DB0)
32
FF4-32-S15D5

CN22
OUTA+
1
OUTB+
2
OUTA3
OUTB4
B4B-PH-K-R

CN3
D-GND
BL
INFOLED
OP_LATCH
D-GND
OP_CLK
OP_DATA
PSW
PSL
DRST
LCDD7
LCDD6
LCDD5
LCDD4
LCDE
LCDRS
LCDCONT
BZR
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
KEYIN
SELIN3
SELIN2
SELIN1
D-GND
EN5V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
VCC3
D-GND

DHAI-0525QSPZ

DHAI-0525QSPZ

DHAI-0516QSPZ

DHAI-0268QSZ4

DHAI-0517QSPZ

P-GND
P-GND
VCL
VCL
12V
12V
EN5V
D-GND
(VSAMP)
CCD-TG
D-GND
CCD-RS
(BSAMP)
CCD-CP
(AFE_SDI)
CCD_PHI2
D-GND
CCD_PHI1
(AFE_SEN)
(ADCLK)
D-GND
(AFE_SCK)
(AFE_DB7)
MHPS
(AFE_DB5)
(AFE_DB6)
D-GND
(AFE_DB4)
(AFE_DB3)
(AFE_DB2)
(AFE_DB1)
(AFE_DB0)

CN302
D-GND
BL
INFOLED
OP_LATCH
D-GND
OP_CLK
OP_DATA
PSW
PSL
DRST
LCDD7
LCDD6
LCDD5
LCDD4
LCDE
LCDRS
LCDCONT
BZR
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
KEYIN
SELIN3
SELIN2
SELIN1
D-GND
EN5V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
VCC3
D-GND

CRUM

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2

MC

D-GND
P-GND
D-GND
3.3VIN
EN5V
3.3VIN
5V
/POFF
12VIN
24V
FW
24V
/PR
HLOUT
P-GND
P-GND

INT5V
INT24V
P-GND
P-GND
/BIAS
/TC
/GRIDL
/MC

MCFB
GRID

POWER
SUPPLY
PWB

L
N

HLN

HLL

BC

TC

1
2
3

1
2

om

BIAS
F-GND

CCD
PWB

VCL
P-GND

CN301
F-KEYSC3
F-KEYSC2
F-KEYSC1
F-KEYIN7
F-KEYIN6
F-KEYIN5
F-KEYIN4
F-KEYIN3
F-KEYIN2
F-KEYIN1
LED_V3
LED_V2
LED_V1
DATA1
D-GND

1
4

1
2

24V
TCS
DVSEL
D-GND
BIAS

DHAI-0267QSPZ

DHAI-0292QSZZ

DHAI-0273QSZZ

1
2
6
5
8

CN3
AC VOUT
GND

INVERTER
PWB

CN2
AC VOUT
GND

DHAI-0515QSPZ

1
2
6
5
8

CN401
15 F-KEYSC3
14 F-KEYSC2
13 F-KEYSC1
12 F-KEYIN7
11 F-KEYIN6
10 F-KEYIN5
9 F-KEYIN4
8 F-KEYIN3
7 F-KEYIN2
6 F-KEYIN1
5 LED_V3
4 LED_V2
3 LED_V1
2 DATA1
1 D-GND

HLL
HLN

DHAI-0491QSZZ

AC-INLET

For 200V area

AC-CORD

For 120V area

1
2

1
3

1
3

SCANNER
Carriage
UN

SCANNER
MT

DHAI-0543QSPZ

DHAI-0510QSP1 (for 100V area)


DHAI-0536QSPZ (for 200V area)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

LCD_OPE
PWB

HVT PWB

2 5VEN
4 (CRUMSDA)
3 (CRUMSCL)
1 P-GND
P18-FX-4S-C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

DHAI-0526QSPZ

.c

py

co

MCU
PWB

hr
an

CN42
1 /SYNC
2 D-GND
3 INT5V
4 D-GND
5 /LDEN
6 /VIDEO
7 SHOLD
8 D-GND
B08B-CZHK-B

CN26
1 LEDPOD
2 POD
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-S

CN20
1 24VDupMT
2 /DMT_0
3 /DMT_1
4 /DMT_2
5 /DMT_3
B05B-XASK-1

.te

DHAI-0287QSZZ

DHAI-0530QSP1

DHAI-0286QSZZ

Fan MT

Thermistor

PPD2

1
2

DV
un

HL

THERMOSTAT

AC-CORD

DHAI-0511QSP1 (for 100V area)


DHAI-0537QSPZ (for 200V area)

TCS

CCFL

CCFL

FAX_OPE
PWB

FAX Model/FX13 Optional KIT only

B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201)

C. SPF unit (AR-203E optional only)

MCU
PWB

CN24
24VSPFMT
24VSPFMT
SPMT_0
SPMT_2
SPMT_1
SPMT_3
SPID
DGND
LEDSPID
SPPD
DGND
LEDSPPD
B12B-PH-K-S

DHAI-0532QSP1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

5
2
4
6
3
1

COMA
COMB
A
/A
B
/B

1
2
3

SPID
DGND
LEDSPID

SPID

1
2
3

SPPD
DGND
LEDSPPD

SPPD

SPMT

D. RSPF unit (AR-M200/M201 optional only)


DHAI-0533QSPZ

DHAI-0541QSPZ

1
2

LED_SRJD
D-GND
SRJD

3
2
1

3
2
1
3
2
1

LED_SPPD
D-GND
SPPD

3
2
1

3
2
1

LED_SPID
D-GND
SPID

3
2
1

1
2

24V
SRVC

1
2

1
2

24V
_SPUS

LEDSRJD
DGND
SRJD

.c

3
2
1

SRJD

DHAI-0540QSPZ
3
2
1

LEDSPPD
DGND
SPPD

SPPD

3
2
1

LEDSCOD
DGND
SCOD

SCOD

3
2
1

LEDSPID
DGND
SPID

SPID

py

1
3
5
2
4
6
7
9
11
8
10
12
17
19
21
23
14
22
16
20
24
18
13
15

co

MCU
PWB

CN30
LED_SRJD
DGND
SRJD
LED_SPPD
DGND
SPPD
LED_SCOD
DGND
SCOD
LED_SPID
DGND
SPID
24VSPFSOL
SPUS
24VSPFSOL
SRVC
SPMT_3
24VSPFMT
SPMT_1
SPMT_0
24VSPFMT
SPMT_2
24VSPFSOL
NC

om

SPF UNIT

DHAI-0539QSPZ

hr
an

B24B-PNDZS-1

SPUS

RSPF UNIT
SRVC

.te

1
2
3
4
5
6

/B
COMB
B
A
COMA
/A

SPMT

E. 2nd cassette unit (AR-203E/M200/M201 optional only)

CPFS2

5V
PPD3
D-GND

3
2
1

PD2

PD2
D-GND

1
2

CED2

CED2
D-GND

1
2

w
PPD3

2
1

/CPFS2
24V

2
1

DHAI-0442QSZZ

14
13
11
8
7
6
4
2
1
9
12
10
5
3

/CPFS2
24V
5V
PPD3
D-GND
PD2
D-GND
CED2
D-GND
FG

1
2
4
7
8
9
11
13
14
6
3
5
10
12

DHAI-0441QSZZ

AR-203E: CN18
AR-M200/AR-M201: CN19
1 /CPFS2
2 24V
4 5V
7 PPD3
8 D-GND
11 PD2
12 D-GND
13 CED2
14 D-GND
3
5
6
9
10
B14B-PHDSS-B

MCU PWB

2nd CASSETTE UN

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 5

F. Network box and FAX (AR-M200/M201 optional only)


FAX Model / FX13 Optional Model Only

DHAI-0538QSPZ
CN5
1 MODEM_IN
2 D-GND
3 MCU_D6
4 MCU_D7
5 MCU_D4
6 MCU_D5
7 MCU_D2
8 MCU_D3
9 MCU_D0
10 MCU_D1
11 MCU_nCS
12 /RD
13 PB_DATA7
14 MCU_INT
15 PB_DATA5
16 PB_DATA6
17 PB_DATA3
18 PB_DATA4
19 PB_DATA1
20 PB_DATA2
21 PB_ADDR7
22 PB_DATA0
23 PB_DATA5
24 PB_ADDR6
25 PB_ADDR3
26 PB_ADDR4
27 PB_ADDR1
28 PB_ADDR2
29 PB_NCS1
30 PB_ADDR0
31 PB_NWE
32 PB_NAE0
33 FAX_RST
34 PB_NOE
35 24V
36 MDM_IRQ
37 VCC3
38 EN5V
39 D-GND
40 P-GND

PJ1
VCC
GND

VBUS
DD+
GND
FG

1
2
3
4
5

1
2
3
4
5

CN1
5V
DD+
GND
FG

CN9

NW Box
PWB
2
3

1
2

AR-NB2A Optional Model only

.te

Name
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
AFE
HV bias signal
1st CS pickup solenoid
2nd CS pickup solenoid
DUP motor
DUP motor
DUP motor
DUP motor
FAX PWB reset signal
HV grid signal
Laser
HV MC signal
FAX PWB interrupt
Main motor
Main motor
Multi bypass solenoid
Polygon motor
Low voltage power
Heater lamp

L
N

DHAI-0544QSPZ
1
2

CN3
1 L
3 N

MJ2
1 BT1
2 LT1
3 TEL1
4 TEL2
5 LT2
6 BT2

To
TEL
Communication
Line

MJ1
1 NC
2 NC
3 L1
4 L2
5 NC
6 NC

To
TEL
Communication
Line

POWER
SUPPLY
PWB

hr
an

3. Signal name list


Signal name
(ADCLK)
(AFE_DB0)
(AFE_DB1)
(AFE_DB2)
(AFE_DB3)
(AFE_DB4)
(AFE_DB5)
(AFE_DB6)
(AFE_DB7)
(AFE_SCK)
(AFE_SDI)
(AFE_SEN)
(BSAMP)
(VSAMP)
/BIAS
/CPFS1
/CPFS2
/DMT_0
/DMT_1
/DMT_2
/DMT_3
/FAX_RST
/GRIDL
/LDEN
/MC
/MDM_IRQ
/MMCLK
/MMD
/MPFS
/PMD
/POFF
/PR

FAX
Main
PWB

co

AC adapter

Speaker

.c

USB Cable
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

CN3
1 BT1
2 LT1
B02B-PH-K-S

py

To
LAN

CN8
TPTX+
TPTXTPRX+
NC
NC
TPRXNC
NC
ST_LED
5V
LK_LED
5V

CN2
MODEM_IN
D-GND
MCU_D6
MCU_D7
MCU_D4
MCU_D5
MCU_D2
MCU_D3
MCU_D0
MCU_D1
MCU_nCS
/RD
PB_DATA7
MCU_INT
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA2
PB_ADDR7
PB_DATA0
PB_DATA5
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR2
PB_NCS1
PB_ADDR0
PB_NWE
PB_NAE0
FAX_RST
PB_NOE
24V
MDM_IRQ
VCC3
EN5V
D-GND
P-GND

om

MCU
PWB

2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
10
9
12
11
14
13
16
15
18
17
20
19
22
21
24
23
26
25
28
27
30
29
32
31
34
33
36
35
38
37
40
39

Function/Operation
AFE control signal
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
Image scan data
AFE control signal
AFE serial data
AFE control signal
AFE control signal
AFE control signal
HV bias drive

DUP motor phase control


DUP motor phase control
DUP motor phase control
DUP motor phase control
Main charger grid control
Laser circuit control signal
Main charger control
Clock signal to the polygon motor
Polygon motor drive signal
Polygon motor drive signal
Output power control
Power relay control

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 6

Section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Process section
Paper transport section
2nd cassette section
Duplex drive section
Duplex drive section
Duplex drive section
Duplex drive section
FAX optional section
Process section
LSU
Process section
FAX optional section
Main drive section
Main drive section
Paper transport section
LSU
Power section
Power section

co

py

Fan lock detection signal


Zero cross detection
Heater lamp control
Key detection control
Key scan output
Key scan output
Key scan output
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD
Signal for LCD

.c

Horizontal sync signal from the LSU


Transfer charger grid control
Fan rotation speed control
Laser drive signal
Buzzer
CCD control signal
CCD control signal
CCD control signal
CCD control signal
CCD control signal

Section
FAX optional section
Paper transport section
RSPF section
Shifter motor section
Shifter motor section
Shifter motor section
Shifter motor section
RSPF section
RSPF section
LSU
Process section
Optical section
LSU
Operation section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Scanner unit section
Paper transport section
2nd cassette section
Developing section
Optical section
Power section
Power section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Paper exit section
Paper transport section
Fusing section
RSPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
Optical section
Main drive section
FAX optional section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
Optical drive section
Optical drive section

om

Shifter motor phase control


Shifter motor phase control
Shifter motor phase control
Shifter motor phase control

.te

Function/Operation
MCU bus control signal

hr
an

Name
Control signal
1st transport solenoid
Reverse solenoid
Shifter motor
Shifter motor
Shifter motor
Shifter motor
Paper feed solenoid
Reverse clutch
Laser
HV TC signal
Fan speed signal
Laser
Buzzer signal
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
Machine cassette detection
2nd CS cassette detection
Developing tank detection
Fusing fan
Low voltage power
Heater lamp
Key scan input
Key scan output
Key scan output
Key scan output
LCD control signal
LCD data signal
LCD data signal
LCD data signal
LCD data signal
LCD control signal
LCD control signal
POD sensor power
PPD sensor power
PPD2 sensor power
SCOD sensor power
SPID sensor power
SPID sensor power
SPPD sensor power
SPPD sensor power
SRJD sensor power
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
MCU interrupt
Control signal
MHPS sensor
Main motor
FAX connection detection signal
Online LED
LED driver control
LED driver control
LED driver control
Scanner motor
Scanner motor

Signal name
/RD
/RRS
/RSV_SOL
/SFTMT0
/SFTMT1
/SFTMT2
/SFTMT3
/SPUS
/SRVC
/SYNC
/TC
/VFMCNT
/VIDEO
BZR
CCD_PHI1
CCD_PHI2
CCD-CP
CCD-RS
CCD-TG
CED1
CED2
DVSEL
FANLK
FW
HLOUT
KEYIN
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
LCDCON
LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
LCDE
LCDRS
LEDPOD
LEDPPD1
LEDPPD2
LEDSCOD
LEDSPID
LEDSPID
LEDSPPD
LEDSPPD
LEDSRJD
MCU_D0
MCU_D1
MCU_D2
MCU_D3
MCU_D4
MCU_D5
MCU_D6
MCU_D7
MCU_INT
MCU_NCS
MHPS
MMLD
MODEM_IN
ONL
OP_CLK
OP-DATA
OP-LATCH
OUTAOUTA+

MCU bus control signal


MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
MCU bus control signal
Carriage HP detection
Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal

Scanner motor phase control


Scanner motor phase control

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 7

.te

om

Section
Optical drive section
Optical drive section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
FAX optional section
Paper transport section
2nd cassette section
LSU
LSU
Paper exit section
Paper transport section
Fusing section
2nd cassette section
Operation section
Operation section
Fusing section
RSPF section
Operation section
Operation section
Operation section
LSU
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
SPF section
RSPF section
Operation section
Developing section
Toner motor drive section
Toner motor drive section
Toner motor drive section
Toner motor drive section
USB section
USB section
Scanner unit section
Optical section

co

py

.c

Function/Operation
Scanner motor phase control
Scanner motor phase control
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
Peripheral bus control signal
1st CS paper width sensor
2nd CS paper width detection
Clock signal to the polygon motor
Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal
Paper transport detection
Paper transport detection
Paper transport detection
2nd CS paper transport detection

hr
an

Name
Scanner motor
Scanner motor
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Address signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Data signal
Control signal
Control signal
Control signal
Control signal
PD SW sensor
PD2 SW sensor
Polygon motor
Polygon motor
POD sensor
PPD sensor
PPD2 sensor
PPD3 sensor
Power save LED
Start button control
Thermistor
SCOD sensor
Select signal
Select signal
Select signal
Laser
SPID sensor
SPID sensor
RSPF motor
SPF motor
RSPF motor
SPF motor
RSPF motor
SPF motor
RSPF motor
SPF motor
SPPD sensor
SPPD sensor
SRJD sensor
LED driver control
Toner sensor
Toner motor
Toner motor
Toner motor
Toner motor
USB signal
USB signal
Copy lamp
Fusing fan

Signal name
OUTBOUTB+
PB_ADDR0
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR7
PB_DATA0
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA7
PB_NAE0
PB_NCS1
PB_NOE
PB_NWE
PD1
PD2
PMCLK_A
PMRDY
POD
PPD1
PPD2
PPD3
PSL
PSW
RTH_IN
SCOD
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
SHOLD
SPID
SPID
SPMT_0
SPMT_0
SPMT_1
SPMT_1
SPMT_2
SPMT_2
SPMT_3
SPMT_3
SPPD
SPPD
SRJD
STROBE
TCS
TMA_O
TMA_O
TMB_O
TMB_O
USB +D
USB -D
VCL
VFMOUT

Fusing section thermistor temperature detection


RSPF cover open sensor
HC151 select signal
HC151 select signal
HC151 select signal
Laser APC signal
RSPF UN paper entry sensor
SPF UN paper entry sensor
RSPF motor phase control
SPF motor phase control
RSPF motor phase control
SPF motor phase control
RSPF motor phase control
SPF motor phase control
RSPF motor phase control
SPF motor phase control
RSPF transport detection
SPF transport detection
RSPF paper exit sensor
Toner quantity detection
Toner motor phase control
Toner motor phase control
Toner motor phase control
Toner motor phase control

Copy lamp control


Fan drive signal

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 8

15pF

15pF

27pF

27pF

C5(*5)

C1(*6)

CPU3.3

(2) /CS2
(3) /CS1
(3) /CS0

(8) PSL

(2) /SCANSP
(2) /SCANST
(2) /TRANSST
(5) PMCLK
(4) SPFMT3
(4) SPFMT2/MIRCNT
(4) SPFMT1
(4) SPFMT0

*R3,R4,C1, and C5 are temtative

OPEN

0J

680J

R3(*2)

0J

OPEN

OPEN

OPEN

22J

R8(*4)

0J

R6

TP255

N.M.

R2

10u/16V

C19

PSL

TP2

TP231
TP232
TP233
TP234
TP235
TP236
TP237
TP238

(3) RY/BY

33Jx4

BR21

VCC3

4
3
2
1

/CS3#
/CS2#
/CS1#
/CS0#

TP245

TP240
TP241
TP242
TP243
TP244

TP246

(8) ONL
(4) (KEYIN2)

(2) /PRINTST
(2,3) /RD
(3) /HWR
(2) /LWR

TP257
1
8
5
2

R18 /SCANSP# TP239


33J

/MSU_ST1

/ES_PAGE

0J (1608)

XIN/CLKIN
XOUT
SSCLK
VSS

CY25811SC

VDD
FRSEL
S0
S1

IC1

L1
ZJSR5101-223(open)

L11

7
6
4
3

C1
*6

C5

IC2

R12
R13
R14

ONL
(KEYIN2)
/ESSRDY
RY/BY

TP222
TP224
TP226

R4

33J
33J
33J

TP131
TP132

C6

12p

/PRINTST
/RD#
/HWR#
/LWR#

*4

*3

P35/SCK1
P34/SCK0
P33/RxD1
P32/RxD0
P31/TxD1
P30/TxD0
VCC
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
Vss
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
PD0/D8
PE7/D7
PE6/D6
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
Vss
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
VCC

64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39

HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321)

A[20..0] (2,3)

TP252
TP249
TP251
TP250
TP261
TP178
TP177

H8S/2321

CPU3.3

TP209
TP208
TP207
TP206
TP205
TP204
TP203
TP202
TP201
TP200
TP199
TP198
/CS5

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

TP24
TP25
TP30
TP31
TP32
TP33
TP125
TP126

TP127
TP128
TP129
TP130

CCD_TG
(SPPD)
(PSW)

ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC

1
2
3
4

TP6
TP8
TP9
TP10

DMT0
DMT1
DMT2
DMT3
MMCLK
RESETOUT1

8 BR20
7 33Jx4
6
5

BR19
33Jx4

BR18
33Jx4

TP190
TP189
TP188
TP187
TP186
TP185
TP184
TP183

TP194
TP193
TP192
TP191

TP195

TP196

TP197

MCNT (5)

D_CONT (4)
STROBE (4)
CRUMSCL (12)
CRUMSDTA (12)

DMT0 (6)
DMT1 (6)
DMT2 (6)
DMT3 (6)
MMCLK (5)

ARB_INT (2)
(FW) (4)
CPU_SYNC (2)
mt_at_home# (4)
CCD_TG (2,4)
(SPPD) (7)
(PSW) (7)

TP182
TP181
TP180
TP179

D3
D2
D1
D0

D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4

D15
D14
D13
D12

100p

100p

(2,3)

SCL
RxD
SDA
TxD
POFF

DMT0
DMT1
DMT2
DMT3

10kJx4

BR1

1
2
3
4

10kJx4

BR14

8
7
6
5

VCC3

8
7
6
5

5
6
7
8

8
7
6
5

RESETOUT1

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

10kJx4

BR10

10kJx4

BR8

10kJx4

BR5

10kJx4

BR2

CT

4
3

R22
10kJ

R21

33J

C26
47p

TP258

0.01uF

C17

TP259

ASIC_RESET

BU4212F

GND

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

TP260

C18
N.M.

VCC3

R20
100kJ

Reset Circuit

D3
D2
D1
D0

D7
D6
D5
D4

D11
D10
D9
D8

D15
D14
D13
D12

VDD VOUT

IC3

10kJ(open)
10kJ
10kJ
10kJ

(USB_IN) (4)
SCL (3)
RxD (9)
SDA (3)
TxD (9)
POFF (2,5)

1
2
3
4

10kJx4

BR12

10kJx4

BR7

R245
R246
R247
R248

1
2
3
4

SPFMT3
4
SPFMT2/MIRCNT 3
SPFMT1
2
SPFMT0
1

RY/BY
/ESSRDY
(KEYIN2)
TP263

MCNT
/CS5
CRUMSCL
/PRINTST

/STBY
NMI
/WDTOVF
TP262

om

D[15..0]

R19
10kJ

C4

C3

.c

py

8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5

8 BR17
7 33Jx4
6
5

MCNT

STROBE
CRUMSCL
CRUMSDTA

co

hr
an

C78
100p

EXTAL

XTAL

.te

33J
33J
100J

R8

R7

X1
HC-49U/S
19.6608MHz

*1

AVcc
Vref
P40/AN0
P41/AN1
P42/AN2
P43/AN3
P44/AN4
P45/AN5
P46/AN6/DA0
P47/AN7/DA1
AVss
Vss
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0
MD0
MD1
MD2
PG0/CAS
PG1/CS3
PG2/CS2

*5
TP256

103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128

*2

TP1
R9
TP218 R10
TP220 R11

R3

Spreading Range : +/- 1.2%

5
TP248
6
TP154 7
8
TP155

SPFMT3
SPFMT2/MIRCNT
SPFMT1
SPFMT0

/SCANST
/TRANSST

C11
N.M.

(4) (KEYIN1)

(5) RTH
(5) (TCS_AN)
(4) (SIN1)
(4) (SIN2)
(4) (SIN3)

TP253

0.1u

C2

(4) SELIN3
(4) SELIN2
(4) SELIN1

N.M.

R5

TP254

N.M.

R1

VCC3

33p

R4(*1)

0.1u

C20

C14
N.M.

R7(*3)

0.1u

C21

33p

C8

0.1u

C22

33p
C9

NOT mounted

0.1u

C23

C12
22pF

C7

C13
N.M.

TP229

mounted

0.1u

C24

BR22
33Jx4

8
7
6
5
TP156
TP157
TP158
TP159
A0
A1
A2
A3

1
2
3
4
TP160
1
TP161
2
TP162
3
TP163
4
TP164
TP165
TP166
TP167
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11

When IC1 is,

0.1u

C25

BR25
33Jx4

TP168 1
TP169 2
TP170 3
TP171 4
TP172
TP173
TP174
TP175

C15
N.M.

TP228
TP227
TP225
TP223
TP221
TP219
TP7
TP216

8 BR23
7 33Jx4
6
5
1
2
3
4

TP230

EXTAL
XTAL

TP215
TP214

BR24
8
7 33Jx4
6
5
BR26
8
7 33Jx4
6
5
1
2
3
4
TP176

A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19

R16
33J

MCU PWB (CPU section) (AR-203E/5420)

TP247

CPUCLK(NC)

TP217

(2,4)

/RESET1

/STBY
TP213
NMI
TP212
TP211
/WDTOVF
TP210

102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
P53/ADTRG
P52/SCK2
Vss
Vss
P51/RxD2
P50/TxD2
PF0/BREQ
PF1/BACK
PF2/LCAS/ WAIT/BREQO
PF3/LWR
PF4/HWR
PF5/RD
PF6/AS
VCC
PF7/0
Vss
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
STBY
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
P20/PO0/TIOCA3
P21/PO1/YICOB3
P22/PO2/TIOCC3
P23/PO3/TIOCD3
P24/PO4/TIOCA4
P25/PO5/TIOCB4
P26/PO6/TIOCA5
P27/PO7/TIOCB5
P63/TEND1
P62/DREQ1
P61/TEND0/CS5
Vss
Vss
P60/DREQ0/CS4
Vss

PG3/CS1
PG4/CS0
Vss
NC
VCC
PC0/A0
PC1/A1
PC2/A2
PC3/A3
Vss
PC4/A4
PC5/A5
PC6/A6
PC7/A7
PB0/A8
PB1/A9
PB2/A10
PB3/A11
Vss
PB4/A12
PB5/A13
PB6/A14
PB7/A15
PA0/A16
PA1/A17
PA2/A18
PA3/A19
Vss
PA4/A20/IRQ4
PA5/A21/IRQ5
PA6/A22/IRQ6
PA7/A23/IRQ7
P67/CS7/IRQ3
P66/CS6/IRQ2
Vss
Vss
P65/IRQ1
P64/IRQ0

1
2
3
4
5
TP133 6
TP134 7
TP135 8
TP136 9
10
TP137 11
TP138 12
TP139 13
TP140 14
TP141 15
TP142 16
TP143 17
TP144 18
19
TP145 20
TP146 21
TP147 22
TP148 23
TP149 24
TP150 25
TP151 26
TP152 27
28
TP153 29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
A20

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 9


8
7
6
5

C10
1uF

C16
0.1u

10kJx4

BR11

10kJx4

BR6

10kJx4

BR3

/ASIC_RST (2,4,12)

/RESET0 (2,3,4)

R421

STROBE

10kJx4

BR16

10kJx4

BR15

R17
R261
R262
R263

4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4

R249
R250
R251
R252

4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

/ES_PAGE
/MSU_ST1
RxD
CRUMSDTA

(SIN1)
(SIN2)
(SIN3)
(KEYIN1)

/TRANSST
/SCANST
/SCANSP#
TP267

POFF
TxD
SDA
SCL

CPUCLK(NC)
/RD#
/HWR#
/LWR#

ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC
CCD_TG

/CS0#
/CS1#
/CS2#
/CS3#

VCC3

10kJ

10kJ
10kJ
10kJ
10kJ

5
6
7
8

8
7
6
5

N.M._10kJ
10kJ
2kJ
2kJ

5
6
7
8

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

1/12

4. Circuit diagram

A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420)

33J

10kJx4
8 RAMDB11
7 RAMDB10
6 RAMDB9
5 RAMDB8

BR48
1
2
3
4

L10

VCC3

TP449

10kJx4
8
7
6
5

BR45
1
2
3
4

0J (1608)

C74
N.M.

R47

N.C.

VCC

X2

GND

OUTPUT

1000p

N.C.

VCC

X3

GND

OUTPUT

SG8002DC(18.3856MHz)

CLK_CONT1

SG8002DC(48.0000MHz)

C76
0.1u
CLK_CONT1

C264

MAD7
MAD6
MAD5
MAD4

MAD12
MAD11
MAD9
MAD8

(3) DQM1
(3) SDCKE

RAMDB11
RAMDB10
RAMDB9
RAMDB8

RAMDB15
RAMDB14
RAMDB13
RAMDB12

10kJx4
8 RAMDB3
7 RAMDB2
6 RAMDB1
5 RAMDB0

BR42
1
2
3
4

RAMDB15
RAMDB14
RAMDB13
RAMDB12

RAMDB3
RAMDB2
RAMDB1
RAMDB0

RAMDB7
RAMDB6
RAMDB5
RAMDB4

RAMDB7
RAMDB6
RAMDB5
RAMDB4

(3) /SDRAS
(3) /SDCAS
(3) /SDWDE
(3) DQM0

C77
82p

R53

C231
120p

R363

1
2
3
4
BR34
1
2
3
4
BR35
1
2
3
4
BR36

33J

MM_AI0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2

MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2

PFCLKIN

(1,3) A[20..0]

(1,3) D[15..0]

33J SFCLK48

1
2
3
4
BR37
TP435
1
TP436
2
TP437
3
TP438
4
BR40
TP439
1
TP440
2
TP441
3
TP442
4
BR41
TP443
1
TP444
2
TP445
3
TP446
4
BR44
TP429
1
TP430
2
TP447
3
TP448
4
BR47
TP414
1
TP415
2
TP416
3
TP417
4
BR49
TP418
1
TP419
2
TP420
3
TP421
4
BR50
RAM_CLK_OUT

TP431
TP432
TP433
TP434

TP425
TP426
TP427
TP428

TP413
TP422
TP423
TP424

MAD10

(3) BANK1
(3) BANK0
(3) /SDCS

TP409
TP410
TP411
TP412

(6) MM_PH_A
(6) MM_AI0
(6) MM_AI1

(6) MM_PH_B
(6) MM_BI0
(6) MM_BI1

(5) MM_Y3
(5) MM_Y2
(5) MM_Y1

MAD3
MAD2
MAD1
MAD0

MM_AI1
MM_AI2

MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
MM_AI0

(10) CL

33Jx4

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

33Jx4

33Jx4

TP399
82Jx4

33Jx4

33Jx4

33Jx4

33Jx4

8
7
6 TP374
5 TP375
33Jx4
8
7
6
5
33Jx4

8
7
6
5

47p 47p 47p 47p 47p N.M. 47p 47p N.M. 47p N.M.

TP405
TP406
TP407
TP408

TP401
TP402
TP403
TP404

223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296

IC4

BR29
AFE_DB7 0Jx4
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB4
BR31
AFE_DB3 0Jx4
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB0

TP396
TP397
TP398
TP400

TP392
TP393
TP394
TP395

TP388
TP389
TP390
TP391

TP384
TP385
TP386
TP387

TP380
TP381
TP382
TP383

TP376
TP377
TP378
TP379

TP372
TP373

TP368
TP369
TP370
TP371

TP360
TP361
TP362
TP363
TP364
TP365
TP366
TP367

TP357
TP358
TP359

TP356

TP347

TP346

TP345

TP344

TP343

TP342

C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C56 C57 C58

10kJx4
8
7
6
5

(3) RAMDB[15..0]

10kJ
10kJ

10kJx4
8
7
6
5

AFE_DB7
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB4
10kJx4
AFE_DB3
8
AFE_DB2
7
AFE_DB1
6
AFE_DB0
5
10kJx4
10kJ AFE_SDI

8
7
6
5

BR33
1
2
3
4

R37
R38

VCC3

(3) MAD[12..0]

1
2
3
4
BR30
1
2
3
4
BR32
R36

VCC3

(4) AFE_DB[7..0]

0J (1608)
L13

VCC3

(4) ADCLK

(4) AFE_SEN

(4) AFE_SCK

AFE_SDI

BR39
1
2
3
4

(3) SDCLK

VCC3

(4) CCD_PHI2

(4) AFE_SDI

(4) CCD_PHI1

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

33J

33J

33J

TP348
TP349
TP350
TP351

TP352
TP353
TP354
TP355

.te

33J

33J

33J

33J

GND(CORE)
MM_Y3
MM_Y2
MM_Y1
VCC(CORE)
MM_PH_B
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
MM_PH_A
MM_AI0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2
GND(AC)
RAM_MAD3
RAM_MAD2
GND(CORE)
RAM_MAD1
RAM_MAD0
RAM_MAD10
VCC(CORE)
RAM_BANKS1
RAM_BANKS0
RAM_CS
RAM_RAS
RAM_CAS
VCC(AC)
RAM_WDE
RAM_DQM0
GND(AC)
RAM_DATA7
RAM_DATA6
RAM_DATA5
RAM_DATA4
GND(CORE)
RAM_DATA3
RAM_DATA2
RAM_DATA1
RAM_DATA0
GND(AC)
RAM_DATA15
RAM_DATA14
VCC(CORE)
RAM_DATA13
RAM_DATA12
RAM_DATA11
RAM_DATA10
RAM_DATA9
RAM_DATA8
VCC(CORE)
RAM_DQM1
RAM_CKE
GND(AC)
RAM_CLK_OUT
GND(CORE)
RAM_MAD12
RAM_MAD11
RAM_MAD9
VCC(CORE)
RAM_MAD8
RAM_MAD7
VCC(AC)
RAM_MAD6
RAM_MAD5
RAM_MAD4
GND(AC)
CPUDATA15
CPUDATA14
CPUDATA13
CPUDATA12
CPUDATA11
CPUDATA10
CPUDATA9
CPUDATA8

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

R35

R33

R32

R31

R30

R29

R27

D7
D6
D5
D4

TP341

D3
D2
D1
D0

(4) CCD_CP

33J

33J

33J

TP268

R26

R34

BR28
4
3
2
1

JTG_TCK
JTG_TMS
JTG_TDI
JTG_TDO
/OUTCS

R28

BR27
4
3
2
1

/INREQ

/PCLPRO
/FAXPRO
/ESPRD
/OUTACK

10KJ

10kJx4
5
6
7
8

10KJ

10kJx4
5
6
7
8

VCC3

1 1 1 1

1 1 1

1 1 1

1 1 1

1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1

hr
an

A9
A8
A7
A6

R25

R24

TP271

w
TP335
TP334
TP333
TP332
TP331
TP330
TP329
TP328
TP327
RAM_CLK_OUT
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1

TP340

HG73C141HFV

ASIC

TP272
TP273
PFCLK
CLKSW

TP339

TP274
TP275
PFCLKOUT
PFCLKIN

(4) BSAMP

TP269
MEM_INT
(4)
MIRCNT
(1) CPU_SYNC

TP276
SYNC#

(4) CCD_RS

(4) VIDEO#
/LEND

(1,4) CCD_TG

33J

R23

TP336

ARB_INT
(1)

TP277
TP278
(5)

TP338

1 1 1 1

1 1 1

MTAD12
MTAD13
MTAD14
MTAD15

MTAD8
MTAD9
MTAD10
MTAD11

MTAD4
MTAD5
MTAD6
MTAD7

MTAD0
MTAD1
MTAD2
MTAD3

1 1 1 1 1 1

10kJx4
5
6
7
8
10kJx4
5
6
7
8

BR68
4
3
2
1
BR69
4
3
2
1

C256
N.M.

R409
N.M._10KJ

VCC3

TP44
TP43
TP42
TP41

TP46
TP45

TP50
TP49
TP48
TP47

TP67
TP54
TP53
TP52
TP51

TP70
TP69
TP68

TP75
TP74
TP73
TP72
TP71

TP40
TP39
TP38
TP37

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

TP56

TP57
TP58
TP59
TP60

TP61
TP62
TP63

TP64
TP65
TP66

(1,4) /RESET1

33Jx4

BR60

33Jx4

BR61

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

TP307
TP306
TP305
TP304
TP303
TP302
TP301
TP300

/INIT
/SLCTIN
/AUTOFD
/STB

TP298

TP451

N.M.
N.M.

R407
R408

C257
47p

33J

R406

R49
10kJ

TP452 /OA_RST (13)

R50
N.M.

R45
N.M.

VCC3

TP299

/INIT (13)
/SLCTIN (13)
/AUTOFD (13)
/STB (13)

/ACK (13)
BUSY (13)
PE (13)
SLCT (13)

/REV (13)
/FAULT (13)

R44
10kJ

VCC3

TP309
TP308
/ACK
BUSY
PE
SLCT

TP313
TP312
TP311
TP310

PARAD4
PARAD5
PARAD6
PARAD7
/REV
FAULT

TP317
TP316
TP315
TP314

10kJ

R39

G3.3V

PARAD0
PARAD1
PARAD2
PARAD3

VCC3

10kJx4

8
7
6
5

10kJx4

8
7
6
5

VCC3

om
HL (5)
PR (5)
CPFS2 (5)

SPFON (4)
MIRON (4)
MPFS (5)

OP_LATCH (4)
OP_DATA (4)
TM (4)
TM_ (4)

OP_CLK (4)

/SCANSP (1)

TP5
TP34
TP35
TP36

(4) (/ASIC_RST)

TP55

1
2
3
4

1 1
33J
33J

33Jx4

BR62

33Jx4

BR63

R404
R403

TP322

TP117
TP118
TP119
TP120
TP121
TP122
TP123
TP124

PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7
TP76

TP115
TP116

/POACK
/PIREQ

TP113
TP114

BR71

1
2
3
4

BR70

1
2
3
4

TP112

PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7

PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
PIDATA3

G3.3V

VCC3

.c

148
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75

10kJx4
5
6
7
8

BR66
4
3
2
1

/POREQ
VCC(AC)
/PIWT
/PIACK
GND(AC)
/POACK
/PIREQ
GND(CORE)
PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7
VCC(CORE)
/TRANSST
/RECEPTST
/PRINTST
/SCANST
RCV
VPIN
VMIN
GND(CORE)
VPOUT
VMOUT
OEN
GND(AC)
SUSPEND
IE1284_PARAD0
IE1284_PARAD1
VCC(AC)
IE1284_PARAD2
IE1284_PARAD3
IE1284_PARAD4
IE1284_PARAD5
IE1284_PARAD6
IE1284_PARAD7
IE1284_REV
VCC(CORE)
IE1284_FAULT
IE1284_ACK
IE1284_BUSY
IE1284_PE
GND(CORE)
IE1284_SLCT
IE1284_INIT
IE1284_SLCTIN
VCC(CORE)
IE1284_AUTOFD
IE1284_STB
TSP_MODE
TSO0
/SCANSP
VCC(AC)
OPE_CLK
GND(AC)
OPE_LATCH
OPE_DATA
TM
/TM
VCC(CORE)
OUTP14B
OUTP13B
OUTP12B
OUTP11B
OUTP10B
OUTP09B
OUTP08B
GND(CORE)
OUTP07B
OUTP06B
OUTP05B

10kJx4
5
6
7
8

BR67
4
3
2
1

py

co
(5) PTPULSE

(4) VSAMP

TP337

MCU PWB (Graphic_ASIC section) (AR-203E/5420)

(5) MMD
(5) PMD
(5) TC
(5)
GRIDL
(5) MC
(5) BIAS

SFCLK48
/CS2
(1)

C75
22000p

C232
22000p

(1,3,4)

TP326
TP325
JTG_TDO
JTG_TDI

/RESET0
TP324
TP323
JTG_TMS
JTG_TCK
(1) /LWR
/RD
(1,3)
/ASIC_RST
(1,4,12)

TP279
TP280
TP281
TP282
TP283
TP284
TP3
TP285
VFMCNT_12V
(5)

0.1u

C230

TP99
TP100
TP101

TP287
TP4
VFM_24V
(5)

D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8

TP77
TP78
TP79
TP80
TP81
TP82
/INREQ
/OUTCS
/OUTACK
/ESPRD
/FAXPRO
/PCLPRO

TP83
TP84
TP85
MTAD15
MTAD14
MTAD13

TP86
TP87
TP88
MTAD12
MTAD11
MTAD10

TP89
TP90
TP91
MTAD9
MTAD8
MTAD7

TP92
TP93
TP94
MTAD6
MTAD5
MTAD4

TP95
TP96
TP97
TP98
MTAD3
MTAD2
MTAD1
MTAD0

TP106
TP107
TP108
TP109
TP110
TP111
PIDATA3
PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7

TP102
TP103
TP104
TP105

TP286
TP288
TP289
TP290
TP291

PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
TP292
TP293

1
1 1 1 1 1

222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
199
198
197
196
195
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
(5) RRS
(5) LDEN

1 1 1 1

1 1 1

1 1 1

(1,5) POFF

C79
47p

10J

R52
SYNC#

PFCLK

R236

R51
10kJ

R48
N.M.

VCC3

(13)

33J

R43

PARAD[7..0]

33J
33J
33J

R40
R41
R42

N.M.

TP450

RCV
VPIN
VMIN

47u/16V

C37

(4)

PFCLKOUT

10kJx4
8
7
6
5

BR54
1
2
3
4
/INIT
/SLCTIN
/AUTOFD
/STB

(/SYNC)

10kJx4
8
7
6
5

10kJx4
8
7
6
5

BR52
1
2
3
4
BR53
1
2
3
4

10kJx4
8
7
6
5

10kJx4
8
7
6
5

10kJx4
8
7
6
5

BR51
1
2
3
4

BR46
1
2
3
4

BR43
1
2
3
4

R253
R254
R255
R256

SUSPEND (11)

VPOUT (11)
VMOUT (11)
OEN (11)

/PRINTST (1)
/SCANST (1)
RCV (11)
VPIN (11)
VMIN (11)

10kJ
10kJ
10kJ
10kJ

ZJSR5101-223

R375
N.M.

R374
N.M.

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

VCC3

2/12

/TRANSST (1)

L2

N.M.

PARAD4
PARAD5
PARAD6
PARAD7

PARAD0
PARAD1
PARAD2
PARAD3

RCV
VPIN
VMIN

PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7

PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3

CLK_CONT

L12

MEM_INT
CLKSW
/POACK
/PIREQ

TP318

TP321
TP320
TP319

N.M.
C70

1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1

0.1u

0.1u
C59

N.M.
C71

1 1

1
1
1 1

1
1 1 1
1

0.1u

0.1u
C60

N.M.
C72

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0.1u
C27
0.1u

0.1u
C28
0.1u

0.1u

0.1u
C61

C38

C29
0.1u

0.1u

0.1u
C62

C39

C30
0.1u

0.1u

0.1u
C63

C40

C31
0.1u

0.1u

0.1u

C41

C32
0.1u

0.1u

C64

C42

C33
0.1u
0.1u

C43

C34
0.1u

C65

C44

C35
0.1u

0.1u
C36
0.1u

0.1u
C66

C45

0.1u
C67

C46

0.1u
C68

C47
0.1u
C69
N.M.
C73

CLPWM
VCC(AC)
AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
GND(AC)
AFESCK
VCC(CORE)
ADCLK
GND(CORE)
AFE_SEN
CCD_PH1
CCD_PH2
AFE_SDI
CCD_CP
BSAMP
CCD_RS
CCD_TG
VSAMP
GND(CORE)
TD0
TDI
TRSK
TMS
TCK
VCC(CORE)
/INREQ
/OUTCS
/OUTACK
/ESPRD
/FAXPRD
/PCLPRD
GND(AC)
MDAT15
MDAT14
MDAT13
VCC(CORE)
MDAT12
MDAT11
MDAT10
VCC(AC)
MDAT09
MDAT08
MDAT07
GND(CORE)
MDAT06
MDAT05
MDAT04
VCC(CORE)
MDAT03
MDAT02
MDAT01
MDAT00
GND(AC)
/INCS
/INACK
/OUTREQ
GND(CORE)
/HSYNC
PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
VCC(AC)
PIDATA3
PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7
/POCS

CPU_DATA7
CPU_DATA6
CPU_DATA5
CPU_DATA4
VCC(AC)
CPU_DATA3
CPU_DATA2
CPU_DATA1
CPU_DATA0
GND(AC)
MIRCNT
/CPUSYNC
MEM_INT
ARB_INT
VCC(CORE)
CPU_AD8
CPU_AD7
CPU_AD6
CPU_AD5
GND(CORE)
RAM_CLK_IN
CPU_AD4
CPU_AD3
CPU_AD2
CPU_AD1
CPU_AD0
/CPUCS
SFCLK48
GND(CORE)
/CPUWR
/CPURD
/RESET
VCC(CORE)
PFCLK
CLKSW
GND(CORE)
PFCLKOUT
PFCLKIN
GND(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
GND(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
TM2_15M
/SYNC
GND(AC)
/VIDEO
/LEND
VCC(AC)
OUTP00A
OUTP01A
OUTP02A
OUTP03A
OUTP04A
OUTP05A
OUTP06A
OUTP15A
VCC(CORE)
OUTP07A
OUTP08A
GND(CORE)
OUTP09A
OUTP10A
OUTP11A
OUTP12A
OUTP13A
VCC(CORE)
OUTP14A
OUTP00B
GND(AC)
OUTP01B
OUTP02B
OUTP03B
OUTP04B
VCC(AC)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
TP294
TP295
TP296
TP297
(5) MRPS1
(5) MRPS2
(5) MRPS3
(5) CPFS1

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 10

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 11

(1,2) D[15..0]

(1,2) A[20..0]

(1) /CS1
(1,2) /RD
(1) /HWR

/RD
/HWR

(1) SCL
(1) SDA

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16

5
28
12

1
2
3
4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
29
30
31
32

1kJ

GND
GND

VDD
VDD

I/O0
I/O1
I/O2
I/O3
I/O4
I/O5
I/O6
I/O7

C81
0.1u

9
25

8
24

6
7
10
11
22
23
26
27

8
7
6
5
VCC
WC
SCL
SDA

IC5

E0
E1
E2
VSS

1
2
3
4

0.1u

C83
0.1u

C84

VCC3 VCC3

D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15

24C02/24WC04/24WC08

VCC3

IS63LV1024L-12J-TR

CS1
OE
WE

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16

IC8

SRAM

R58

VCC3

Serial EE-PROM

A17
A1

A19
A18
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
R69

R66
10kJ

10kJ
OPEN
22000p

0.1u
OPEN

C86
C87

OPEN

0J
OPEN

R83

OPEN

R86

OPEN

OPEN
(J1,J2 in the case of N.M.:0J)

R82

A16
BYTE
GND
DQ15
DQ7
DQ14
DQ6
DQ13
DQ5
DQ12
DQ4
VCC
DQ11
DQ3
DQ10
DQ2
DQ9
DQ1
DQ8
DQ0
OE
GND
CE
A0

S29AL008D70TFI020#
S29GL016A90TFIR20#

Flash ROM

A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A19
NC
WE
RP
VPP
WP
RY/BY
A18
A17
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1

48
47
46 TP457
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25

10kJ

TP454 VPP

/HWR

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TP453 11
12
13
14
TP455 15
16
TP456 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

IC7

/RD

D15
D7
D14
D6
D13
D5
D12
D4

0.1u

C87

/CS0 (1)

D11
D3
D10
D2
D9
D1
D8
D0

MAD10
MAD0
MAD1
MAD2
MAD3

(2) DQM0
(2) /SDWDE
(2) /SDCAS
(2) /SDRAS
(2) /SDCS
(2) BANK0
(2) BANK1

RAMDB7

RAMDB5
RAMDB6

RAMDB3
RAMDB4

RAMDB1
RAMDB2

RAMDB0

IC6

VCC3

VCC3

VSS
DQ15
VSSQ
DQ14
DQ13
VCCQ
DQ12
DQ11
VSSQ
DQ10
DQ9
VCCQ
DQ8
VSS
NC
UDQM
CLK
CLKE
NC
A11
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
VSS

C89
0.1u

C90
0.1u

C91
0.1u

SDRAM (16bit x 4bank)

VCC
DQ0
VCCQ
DQ1
DQ2
VSSQ
DQ3
DQ4
VCCQ
DQ5
DQ6
VSSQ
DQ7
VCC
LDQM
WE
CAS
RAS
CS
BA0
BA1
A10
A0
A1
A2
A3
VCC

SDRAM

64Mb(1Mx16bitx4bank)

128Mb(2Mx16bitx4bank)

C88
0.1u

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

IC6

C92
0.1u

54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39 TP458
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28

C93
0.1u

VCC3

K4S641632K-UC75

K4S281632I-UC60

Vendor/Type

om

.c

py

co
A17

J1,J2

A1

1
2
3

VCC3

LH28F800BJE-PBTL90(LHF80JZP)
LH28F160BJE-BTL90(LHF16JT2)

0J

FLASH ROM

hr
an
VCC3

VPP

VCC3

FlashROM VPP Controll

R81

IC7

0J

(1) RY/BY

R68

.te

(1,2,4) /RESET0

A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A20

R59
N.M.

R56
10kJ

VCC3

N.M.

R64

N.M.

R65

N.M.

C235

10kJ

R63

N.M.
R70

0.1u
C85

N.M.
C86

MCU PWB (Memory section) (AR-203E/5420)

N.M.

C236

N.M.
R62

N.M.

C233

N.M.

C234

C94
0.1u

C82
N.M.

DQM1 (2)
SDCLK (2)
SDCKE (2)

RAMDB8

R67

RAMDB10
RAMDB9

RAMDB12
RAMDB11

RAMDB14
RAMDB13

RAMDB15

0J

MAD12
MAD11
MAD9
MAD8
MAD7
MAD6
MAD5
MAD4

MAD[12..0] (2)

RAMDB[15..0]

(2)

3/12

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 12

(7) (PD1)
(7) (PD2)

(7) (SPID)

(7) (FANLK)

(7) (PPD2)
(7) (PPD3)
(5) THOPEN
(7) (CED2)
(7) DSWS
(7) (MMLD)

(8) (SELIN1)
(8) (SELIN2)
(8) (SELIN3)

(7) (PPD1)
(7) (POD)
(7) (MFD)
(7) (CED1)
(7) (TCS)
(7) (PMRDY)
(7) DVS1
(7) (DRST)

TP482
TP483

TP480

4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12

TP471
TP472
TP473
TP474
TP475
TP476
TP477
TP478

11
10
9
7

4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12

11
10
9
7

11
10
9
7

4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12

TP484
TP485
TP486

TP463
TP464
TP465
TP466
TP467
TP468
TP469
TP470

IC10

GND

GND

IC13

GND

VCC

74HC151

A
B
C
G

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

VCC

74HC151

A
B
C
G

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

IC12

VCC

74HC151

A
B
C
G

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

5V

5V

5
TP491
6
TP492

16

5
TP489
6
TP490

16

5
TP487
6
TP488

16

5V

Digital Input Multiprexer

C104
33p

C103
0.1u

10J

TP495

33p

0.1u

TP494

C100

R86

10J

R80

5V

SIN2

SIN1

SIN3

/RESET#
TP503

AFE_SDI

R78

100J

TP500
TP501

5V/3.3V

R15
0J

TP496

TP502

TP18

2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10

2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10

IC9

(8) FW

(10) mt_at_home

(9) /SYNC

(1) SELIN1
(1) SELIN2
(1) SELIN3
(2) OP_CLK
(2) OP_DATA
(2) OP_LATCH
(2) TM
(2) TM_

(1) SPFMT0
(1) SPFMT1
(1) SPFMT2/MIRCNT
(1) SPFMT3
(2) MIRON
(2) SPFON

(2) MIRCNT

(1,2,12) /ASIC_RST

R99
10kJ

VCC3

5V/3.3V

3.3V

3.3V

0.1u(N.M.)

C258

47p

3.3V

TP506
C109

TP505

R98
N.M.

5V

2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10

2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10

VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4

1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND

IC11

IC15

VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4

GND

Y2

Y1

Vcc

GND

Y2

Y1

Vcc

NC7WZ17

A2

A1

IC35

NC7WZ17

A2

A1

IC18

74VHCT244

1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND

20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3

20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3

20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3

C95
0.1u

C98
0.1u

20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3

C105
0.1u

TP270

0.1u

C107

R75
R76
R77
R79

TP516
TP517
TP518
TP519

0.1u

0.01uF

R87
R88
R89
R90
R91
R92
R93
R94

4
3
2
1

N.M.

TP528
TP529
TP530

N.M.

C255

TP531 R100

3.3V

TP533 R101

33J

33J

(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)

(2)

(FW) (1)

(1)

.c

(SELIN1) (8)
(SELIN2) (8)
(SELIN3) (8)
(OP_CLK) (8)
(OP_DATA) (8)
(OP_LATCH) (8)
(TM) (6)
(TM_) (6)

(SPFMT0)
(SPFMT1)
(SPFMT2)
(SPFMT3)

(2) VIDEO#

(2) VSAMP
(1,2) CCD_TG
(2) CCD_RS
(2) BSAMP
(2) CCD_CP
(2) CCD_PHI2
(2) CCD_PHI1
(2) ADCLK

(1) STROBE

3.3V

3.3V

AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#6
AFE_DB#7

AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#3

AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#3
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#6
AFE_DB#7

om

(10) AFE_DB#[7..0]

(/ASIC_RST) (2)

/RESET1 (1,2)
(D_CONT) (11)

(KEYIN1) (1)
(KEYIN2) (1)

mt_at_home#

(/SYNC)

(USB_IN) (1)
(SIN1) (1)
(SIN2) (1)
(SIN3) (1)
AFE_SDI# (10)
AFE_SEN# (10)
AFE_SCK# (10)

AFE_SDI#

/RESET#

AFE_SDI#

R133
open

C102

33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J
33J

33Jx4

BR55

3.3V

5
6
7
8

33J
33J
1kJ
33J

C101

3.3V

AFE_SDI

33J
33J
33J

py

5V

TP520
TP521
TP522
TP523
TP524
TP525
TP526
TP527

3.3V

C221

VCC3

0.1u

C110

VCC3

5V

TP513
TP514
TP515

VCC3

TP12

TP11

3.3V

TP497
R71
TP498
R72
TP499
R73
TP19 R130
0J

TP507
TP508
TP509
TP510
TP511

VCC3

TP17

VCC3

co

VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4

74LCX244

1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND

IC14

74LCX244

VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4

74LCX244

1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND

hr
an

(1) D_CONT

(8) KEYIN1
(8) KEYIN2
(1,2,3) /RESET0

.te

R85
10kJ

w
33p

C97

TP493

C99

0.1u

C96

10J

R74

(11) USB_IN
SIN1
SIN2
SIN3
(2) AFE_SDI
(2) AFE_SEN
(2) AFE_SCK

5V/3.3V

R81

10kJ

MCU PWB (Driver section 1) (AR-203E/5420)

R97
10kJ

R128
10kJ

R96
10kJ

5
6
7
8

8
7
6
5

VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4

0.1u

C263

0.1u

2
3

5
1

2
3

5
1

0Jx4

BR65

0Jx4

BR64

5V

5V

4
3
2
1

1
2
3
4

20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3

20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3

TP542

AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7

AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3

AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7

VCC3

TP543
NC7ST08M5X

IC45

R422

R95

5V

5V

C262
0.1u

C108
82p
C124
82p
C125
82p
C126
N.M.
C129
N.M.
C130
82p
C132
33p
C133
82p

R54
56J
R57
56J
R61
100J
R83
47J

VCC3

TP534
TP535
TP536
TP537
TP538
TP539
TP540
TP541

VCC3

NC7ST08M5X

IC16

74LCX244(open)

1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND

VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4

74LCX244

1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND

IC44

C106

2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10

2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10

IC43

VCC3

100J

100J

R46
56J
R55
100J
R60
56J
R82
100J

C80
0.1u

TP544

CCD_TG#

CCD_RS#

CCD_CP#

AFE_DB[7..0]

(STROBE) (8)

(2)

VSAMP# (10)
CCD_TG# (10)
CCD_RS# (10)
BSAMP# (10)
CCD_CP# (10)
CCD_PHI2# (10)
CCD_PHI1# (10)
ADCLK# (10)

/VIDEO (9)

CCD_PHI2#

CCD_PHI1#

ADCLK#

BSAMP#

VSAMP#

VSAMP#
CCD_TG#
CCD_RS#
BSAMP#
CCD_CP#
CCD_PHI2#
CCD_PHI1#
ADCLK#

4/12

(1) MMCLK

(2) VFM_24V
(2) VFMCNT_12V

5
6
7
8

R142
10kJ(open)

R414
N.M._10kJ

VCC3

Q14

KRC102S

R418
N.M._10kJ

VCC3

1.5kJx4
8
7
6
5

R370 1.5kJ

BR56
1
2
3
4

R138
10kJ

4
3
2
1

R419
N.M._10kJ

(1) MCNT

(2) MC
(2) BIAS
(2) TC
(2) GRIDL

BR72
10kJx4

TP549

TP545
TP546
TP547
TP548

1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
COM

Q16

R379
R380

Q17

/MMCLK (9)

KRC102S

TP604

(2) MM_Y1
(2) MM_Y2
(2) MM_Y3
(2) PMD
(1) PMCLK
(2) LDEN
(2) /LEND

R116
10kJ

R84
10kJ

TP603

R196
10kJ

PGND

TP554
TP555
TP556
TP557
TP558
TP559
TP560

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
COM

100J

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9

PR#

TP21

(S)

(D)

TP614

Q21

R388

RLS-73

D58

0J

D34
1SS355

/VFMCNT (9)

TP265

TP615

D55

12V

1SS355

D5

TP611

INT5V

R117
10kJ Q4
KRC102S

Q3
KRA119S

CRH01

D56

0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM

CP17

CRH01

5V

TP613

TP610

24V

0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM

CP16

Q13
2SB1132

TP609

TP607

MMref0 (6)
MMref1 (6)
MMref2 (6)
/PMD (9)
PMCLK_A (9)
/LDEN (9)

Q11
2SK3018(open)

R405

R413
N.M._10kJ

Q12
2SB1132

TP606

TP561

47kJ

/MMD (9)
MRPS_1 (6)
MRPS_2 (6)
MRPS_3 (6)
/POFF (8)

TP608

R389

47kJ

D57

RLS-73

TP605

5V

3
TP266

Q20
KRA119S

INT24V

R109

PGND

SHOLD (9)

Q2
N.M._KTA1505S

PGND

R144
47kJ

1SS355

TP29
1uF/16V

C134

VFMOUT (9)

TP264

D4

R146
1.5kF

(9) RTH_IN

D33
1SS355

Q18
KRC102S

3
2

MA700

D1

R103
1MF

R364

0J

R107
4.3kF

R104
7.5kF

R192
10kJ

R191
4.7kJ

12V

+
-

3
2

12V

+
-

3
2

12V

+
-

5
6

12V

5V

R365
0J

TP624

12V

+
-

5
6

IC20B
KIA393F

IC22B
KIA358F

12V

R366
N.M.

22000p

C115

R113
10kJ

10kJ

R367

0.1u/50V

C114

R110
300J

0.1u/50V

TP621

C162
0.1u

C111

12V

VCC3

TP23

R105
1kJ

TP623

5V

1
TP620

IC22A
KIA358F

IC20A
KIA393F

12V

IC17A
KIA393F

VCC3

Analog Tonner Sensor Buffer

KDS226(open)

D46

R114
10kF

TP622

R112
1.2kF

VCC3

C112
22000p

TP618

VCC3

C160
2.2uF/10V

TP26

R155
470kJ

om
5V

VCC3

TP27

VCC3

R153
100J

KDS226(open)

D2

R106
10kF

TP617

R102
1kF

TP28

R129
N.M.

1
(12) TCS_AN

.c

py

co

TP562

N.M._47kJ

HLOUT (8)

R115
100J 1/4W

TP612

N.M._4.7kJ 1/4W

R108

24V

(2) PTPULSE

/PR (8)

D35
1SS355

/PR

hr
an

/CPFS1 (9)
/CPFS2 (9)
/MPFS (9)
/RRS (9)

KRC102S

D49
MTZ J22B

4.7kJ 1/4W

R387

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9

(G)

1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
NC

1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
NC

KID65503F

1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
G

IC25

KID65503F

1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
G

IC24

PGND

R386

24V

4.7kJ 1/4W

R194

KID65001AF

1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
E

TP22

.te

IC21

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

100J

R195

(2) PR

/MC (8)
/BIAS (8)
/TC (8)
/GRIDL (8)
/MCNT (9)

N.M._1.5kJ
N.M._1.5kJ

1.5kJx4
8
7
6
5

(2) MMD
(2) MRPS1
(2) MRPS2
(2) MRPS3
(1,2) POFF
(2) HL
FTH

24V

BR57
1
2
3
4

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9

KRC102S

KID65001AF

1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
E

(2) CPFS1
(2) CPFS2
(2) MPFS
(2) RRS

PGND

TP551

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

IC19

MCU PWB (Driver section 2) (AR-203E/5420)

E
C

8
4

1
1

1
1

8
4
8
4
8
4

Q19
2SK3018

VCC3

0.1u

C113

VCC3

(S)

(D)

N.M.

C237

KDS226(open)

D47

R111
100J

KDS226

D3

TP619

(G)

R193
10kJ

+
-

5
6

(TCS_AN) (1)

THOPEN (4)

TP479

KIA393F

IC17B

5/12

RTH (1)

FTH

12V

PR#

8
4

8
4

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 13

(SPFMT0)
(SPFMT2)
(SPFMT1)
(SPFMT3)

(5) MRPS_1
(5) MRPS_2
(5) MRPS_3

(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)

(5) MMref0
(5) MMref1
(5) MMref2

(9) OUT_A(9) OUT_A+


(9) OUT_B+
(9) OUT_B-

R125
2kJ

TP595
TP596
TP597

R134
300J

TP588
TP589
TP590

R126
1kJ

R135
620J

R136
1.2kJ

10kJx4

BR59

R127
510J

0.1u

PGND

C131

R131
1.2kJ

PGND

5V

PGND

C118
820p
TP587

(2) MM_BI0
(2) MM_BI1
(2) MM_PH_B

TP586

R121
1.5kJ

PGND

C120
0.1u

R137
100J

5V

C117
820p

R122
1kJ

PGND

0.68J 1W

R119

PGND

R123
30kJ

TP591

PGND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

5V
PGND

R141
1J 2W

PGND

R132
1J 2W

14

8
7
11
12

GND

OUT A
OUT A
OUT A/
OUT A/
OUT B
OUT B
OUT B/
OUT B/

STA7100M

Sense B

Sense A

Sync

REF

IN A
IN A/
IN B
IN B/

IC28

Vs

R124
30kJ

SPF Motor Driver

PGND

C121
0.1u

24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
TP593

10

1
2
3
4
17
18
15
16

13

PGND

24VSPFMT

C119
820p

TP592

MM_AI1 (2)
MM_PH_A (2)

MM_AI0 (2)

.te

24VSCMT

TP594

VS
SENSE 1
COMP 1
OUT 1B
I01
GND
GND
I11
PHASE 1
VREF 1
RC 1
VSS

L6219DS

OUT 1A
OUT 2A
SENSE 2
COMP 2
OUT 2B
GND
GND
I02
I12
PHASE 2
VREF 2
RC 2

IC27

Scanner Motor Driver

5V

MCU PWB (Driver section 3) (AR-203E/5420)

4
3
2
1

5
6
7
8

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 14

C116
820p

PGND

0.68J 1W

C122
47u/35V

24V

SPMT_3 (9)

SPMT_1 (9)

SPMT_2 (9)

SPMT_0 (9)

PGND

C123
0.1u/50V

.c
(4) (TM_)

(4) (TM)

py

24VDupMT

CP3
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM

24VSPFMT

CP2
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM

24VSCMT

CP1
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM

co

hr
an

R120
1.5kJ

R118

C222

0.1u

O4

O3

O2

O1

COM
COM

TD62064AF

GND
GND

I1
NC
NC
I2
NC
I3
NC
NC
I4
NC

IC26

1
8

16

5V

Vref

Vs

N.C

OUT2

OUT1

TA7291AS

GND

IN2

IN1

Vcc

IC29

Tonner Motor Driver

PGND

17
18

3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15

Duplex Motor Driver

om

(1) DMT3

(1) DMT2

(1) DMT1

(1) DMT0

R244
4.7kJ

24VDupMT

C127
10u/35V

MTZ J22B

D6

/DMT3 (9)

/DMT2 (9)

/DMT1 (9)

/DMT0 (9)

24V

For AL2040 Model Only

TMB_O (9)

TMA_O (9)

0.1u/50V

C128

6/12

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 15

C145

N.M.

C152

0.1u

C144

N.M.

C151

0.1u

(8) 12VIN

N.M.

0.1u

0J (1608)

47u/35V

22u/16V

C181

47u/25V

C177

L4
ZJSR5101-223(open)

L14

1000p

1000p

C169

C224

C223

TP14

0.1u

1000p

C225

TP15

R242
10J

0.1u

C156

0.1u

C149

N.M.

C140

PGND

C155

N.M.

C148

N.M.

C139

TP13

0.1u

C154

N.M.

C147

0.1u

C138

R241
10J

0.1u

C153

N.M.

C146

0.1u

C137

R240
10J

VCC3

C136

C135

0.1u

C183

0.1u

C179

R398
100kJ

5V

100kJ

R396

1000p

C226

TP16

24V

N.M.

C159

N.M.

C143

12V

R394
100kJ

0.1u

C158

N.M.

C142

R243
10J

0.1u/50V

C170

0.1u

C157

0.1u

C150

N.M.

C141

VCC3

22u/16V

C182

47u/35V

C175

R172
100J 2W

(8) 3.3VIN

INT24V

w
PGND

D11
1SS355

0.22J 2W

IN

N.M.

OUT

C178

0.1u

C184

R397
100kJ

0.1u

C180

0.1u

C176

KDS226

0.1u

5V

PGND

R152
1kJ 2W

INT24V

DSWS (4)

R399
100kJ

VCC3

INT5V

(9) SPID
(9) PPD3
(9) PD1
(9) PD2

PPD1
PPD2
SPPD
PSW

(9) CED1
(9) CED2
(8) DRST

(9)
(9)
(9)
(8)

5V

5V

5V

5V

5V

5V

KDS226

D27

KDS226

D23

KDS226

D21

KDS226

D18

KDS226

D14

KDS226

D28

KDS226

D24

KDS226

D22

KDS226

D19

KDS226

D15

D25

KDS226

KDS226

D50

KDS226

D16

KDS226

D9

.c

py
2

co

(12) DVSEL
(12) TCS
(9) MFD
(9) MMLD
(9) FANLK

(9) POD
(9) PMRDY

hr
an

D13

C168

EN5V

2 KIA7805

GND

22u/16V

L5
ZJSR5101-223

L15

IC30

D20
1SS355

R163
2.7kJ

R162
20kJ

TP585

1SS355

D12

.te
R161
20kJ

(9) 24V1(DSWS)

R143

MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section) (AR-203E/5420)

R175
7.5kJ

1000p

R174
15kJ

C172

R165
10kJ

1000p

C171

R164
10kJ

KDS226

D17

KDS226

D10

R176
7.5kJ

1000p

C173

R166
15kJ

R167
10kJ

1000p

C161

R145
15kJ

1000p

1000p

C186

C185

1000p

C187

1000p

C188

R177
7.5kJ

om
R173
15kJ

D51

ZENER_UDZS4.7B(open)

VCC3

KDS226

D29

KDS226

D26

D52

1000p

1000p

C248

R377
10kJ

C164
1000p

R148
10kJ

C163

R147
4.7kJ

ZENER_UDZS4.7B(open)

1000p

C189

R178
12kJ

1000p

C166

R150
15kJ

1000p

C190

R184
R185
R186

R180
R181
R182
R183

R179
3.3kJ

VCC3

R168
R169
R170
R171
R378

1000p

C165

R149
10kJ

1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ

1000p

C167

R151
10kJ

1kJ
1kJ
1kJ

1kJ
1kJ
1kJ
1kJ

1kJ
1kJ

R159
R160

(4)
(4)
(1)
(1)

(POD) (4)
(PMRDY) (4)

(PPD3) (4)
(PD1) (4)
(PD2) (4)

(SPID) (4)

7/12

(CED1) (4)
(CED2) (4)
(DRST) (4)

(PPD1)
(PPD2)
(SPPD)
(PSW)

DVS1 (4)
(TCS) (4)
(MFD) (4)
(MMLD) (4)
(FANLK) (4)

1kJ
1kJ
1kJ

1kJ
R156
R157
R158

R154

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 16

EN5V
5V
(7) 12VIN
(4) FW
(5) /PR

(5) /BIAS
(5) /GRIDL

INT5V

PGND

INT24V

PGND

R400 N.M._1608size

PGND

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24

B24B-PNDZS-1

1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23

CN1

To Power unit

.te

HLOUT (5)

/POFF (5)
24V

3.3VIN (7)

/TC (5)
/MC (5)

w
(1) ONL

Q6
KRC106S

3
(1) PSL

(4) KEYIN2
(4) KEYIN1

Q5
KRC106S

5V

R189
R190

1kJ
1kJ

KDS226

D30

1000p

C195

5V

R187
10kJ

R188
10kJ

KEYIN2#
KEYIN1#

KEYIN1#

KEYIN2#

1000p

1000p

C192

C191

om
3

EN5V

KDS226

D31

.c

py

co

hr
an
(4) (OP_DATA)
(4) (OP_LATCH)
(4) (SELIN2)
(4) (OP_CLK)
(4) (SELIN1)
(4) (STROBE)
(4) (SELIN3)

(7) PSW

(7) DRST

To Operational PWB

CP7

N.M._1608size

0.1u/50V

C194

C193

MCU PWB (Connector section 1) (AR-203E/5420)

CP8

0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM

0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM

IMSA-9619S-18A

18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CN2

8/12

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 17

PGND

24V

(White)

B2P-VH

1
2

CN23

24V

PGND

PGND

R206

PGND

1kJ

(Red)

B2P-VH-R

1
2

CN15

(White)

B4B-PH-K-S

1
2
3
4

CN11

B5B-PASK-1

1
2
3
4
5

CN6

KDS226

D42

5V
INT5V

B08B-CZHK-B

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

CN42

24V

(Black)

B3B-PH-K-K

1
2
3

CN7

/DMT0
/DMT1
/DMT2
/DMT3

(7) PD1

(White)

N.M._B4B-PH-K-S

1
2
3
4

CN17

(Green)

B3B-PH-K-M

1
2
3

CN25

To Duplex motor

(For debug)

B05B-XASK-1

1
2
3
4
5

CN13

To Paper detect

(Red)

B4B-PH-K-R

1
2
3
4

CN4

To Mirror motor

(6) OUT_A+
(6) OUT_B+
(6) OUT_A(6) OUT_B-

(1) RxD
(1) TxD

VCC3

To Cassette paper solenoid

To Cassette detect

(7) PPD1

(5) /RRS

5V

5V

24V

(7) MFD

(5) /MPFS

R208
200J 1/4W

(5) RTH_IN

(7) PPD2

(7) POD

5V

24V

5V

(Blue)

To Paper out detect

(Red)

B5B-PH-K-R

1
2
3
4
5

CN26

(White)

B5B-PH-K-S

1
2
3
4
5

CN22

To Multi unit

.c
To HL unit

py
R205
200J 1/4W

(White)

B3B-PH-K-S

1
2
3

CN19

R204
200J 1/4W

(Red)

B3B-PH-K-R

1
2
3

CN16

To Resist roller solenoid

(Red)

N.M._B03B-PH-K-R

3
2
1

CN28

(7) PD2
(7) CED2

(7) PPD3

(5) /CPFS2

om

To Paper pass detect

(5) /MCNT

24V

To Mecha. COUNTER

B3B-PH-K-E

1
2
3

CN12

R203
200J 1/4W

co

hr
an

CPU Serial

Not mounted

(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)

24VDupMT

(White)

B3B-PH-K-S

1
2
3

CN10

.te

(5) /CPFS1

(7) CED1

For AL2040 Model Only

To Interlock switch

To Fan motor

To Main motor

To Polygon motor

(5) /LDEN
(4) /VIDEO
(5) SHOLD

B05B-CZHK-B

1
2
3
4
5

1000p

1000p

(4) /SYNC

C201

C200

CN41

1000p

1000p

To Toner motor

(6) TMA_O
(6) TMB_O

(5) /PMD
(7) PMRDY
(5) PMCLK_A

To LD

(7) 24V1(DSWS)

(5) VFMOUT
(7) FANLK
(5) /VFMCNT

C199

C198

0.1u/50V

C205

(5) /MMD
(7) MMLD
(5) /MMCLK

0.1u/50V

C206

SPMT_0
SPMT_2
SPMT_1
SPMT_3
(7) SPID
(7) SPPD

(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)

PGND

2
4
6
8
10
12
14

5V

24VSPFMT

24V 5V

5V

To SPF unit

B14B-PHDSS-B

1
3
5
7
9
11
13

CN18

To 2nd. cassette

1000p
C202

INT24V

1000p
C203

MCU PWB (Connector section 2) (AR-203E/5420)

1000p
C204

R207

200J 1/4W

9/12

For AL2040 Model Only


5V 24V

N.M.

PGND

B12B-PH-K-S

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

CN24

C246

R140

N.M._1608size

200J 1/4W

C247

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 18

(2) CL

33p

R214
15kJ

C210

R215
56kJ

C207
47u/35V

24V

R209
910J

Q9 2SJ537

PGND

Q8
KTC3198

D44
11EQS06

TWKA-221K

L6
220uH

47u/35V

+ C208

.te

0.1u/50V

C209

R210
15kJ

CP6
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM

Copy Lamp Inverter

R212

MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section) (AR-203E/5420)

5.6kJ 1/4W

R213
1kJ

1000p

C211

R211
12kJ

VCC3

1
3

.c

KDS226

D43

py

co

(4) mt_at_home

hr
an
VCL

VCL

AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#6

om

(4) AFE_DB#[7..0]

(4) AFE_SCK#
(4) ADCLK#
(4) CCD_PHI1#
(4) CCD_PHI2#
(4) CCD_CP#
(4) CCD_RS#
(4) CCD_TG#

CP9

PGND

12V

31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1

AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#3
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#6
AFE_DB#7

FF4-32-S15D5

32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2

CN3

To Scanner unit

0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM

PGND

EN5V

VCL

VSAMP# (4)

AFE_SDI# (4)
BSAMP# (4)

AFE_SEN# (4)

AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#7

AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#3

CP10
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM

10/12

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 19

(2) SUSPEND

(2) RCV
(2) VPIN
(2) VMIN

(2) VPOUT
(2) VMOUT

(2) OEN

(4) (D_CONT)

(4) USB_IN

N.M.

N.M.

N.M.

C216 C217

C215

R221
R223
R224

33J
33J
33J

TP563
TP564
TP565

VCC3

3
4
5

2
9
12
13

USB1T20

SUSPEND

RCV
VP
VM
GND

NC

D+
D-

MODE

VCC

TP566
0.1u

C214

R219

1 TP567
11
10

R420

N.M.

R220
R222

24J
24J

R216

TP568
TP569

N.M.

1.5kJ

R218

24J

10kJ

R217

L8

L7

.c

BLM18BB121SN1D
BLM18BB121SN1D

ZENER_6.2V

D45

py

100p

C212

TP570
TP571

co

hr
an

14

VCC3

.te

OE#
SPEED
VPO
VMO/FSEO

IC31

MCU PWB (USB2.0 (FULL) I/F section) (AR-203E only)

L16
0J (1608)

L9
0J (1608)

om

0.1u

C213

F.G

CN33

UBS21-4K2J00(ACON)

Shield

+5V
DD+
GND

D32
HZM6.2Z4MWA(open)

1
2
3
4

11/12

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 20

(1) CRUMSCL

(1,2,4) /ASIC_RST

(1) CRUMSDTA

R231

0J

3.3V

3.3V

TP572

R139
1kJ

0.1u

C220

R232
10kJ(open)

R225
N.M.

VCC3

GND

Vcc

N.M.

2
3

5
1

EN5V

5V

TP574

TP573

R226
10kJ

C218
0.1u

EN5V

NC7ST08M5X(open)

IC34

TC7SBD385AFU(open)

OE

IC32

R376

.te
(CRUMSCL)

(CRUMSDTA)

5V

MCU PWB (CRUM I/F section) (AR-203E/5420)

TP575
TP576
R368
R369

N.M.
0J

24V

24V

2
4
6
8
10

R200
10J

(White)

PGND

KDS226

D39

3
2

0J (1608)

FB4

0J (1608)

FB3

0J (1608)

FB2

F-GND 2

N.M._300J

R202

F-GND 4

F-GND 3

(CRUMSDTA)
(CRUMSCL)

om

N.M._300J

R201

To DV Unit with CRUM


(Analog Tonner Sensor)

F-GND 1

KDS226

D40

.c

py

0J (1608)

FB1

EN5V

N.M._B10B-PHDSS-B

1
3
5
7
9

CN9

(Red)

B4B-PH-K-R

1
2
3
4

CN5

To DV Unit
(Analog Tonner Sensor)

co

hr
an

(5) TCS_AN
(7) TCS
(7) DVSEL

12/12

(6)

CPU3.3

LCDCONT

33J

(8)
(9)

TP109

(3)
(2)
(4)
(4)

C11

NM

TP724

33P
R25

33P

5
6
7
8

C9

33P

C19
10U/10V<2012>

L1
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA

FB1
0J <1608>

SPFMT3
SPFMT2
SPFMT1
SPFMT0
/RES_USB20

/SCANSP
/SCANST
/TRANSST

/ES_PAGE

PROTECT

/RES_OA982
/RES_IOASIC
/RES_GASIC

(PSFANLK)
/ES_PAGE

/CSIOASIC
/CSGASIC
/CSSRAM
/CSFROM

(2)
/SCANSP
(2)
/SCANST
(2)
/TRANSST
(6)
PMCLK
(5)
SPFMT3
(5) SPFMT2/MIRCNT
(5)
SPFMT1
(5)
SPFMT0
(10) /RES_USB20

R51

RTH
(TCS_AN)

0.1U

C20

(2,5) VIDEO#

(6)
(6)

/RES_OA982
/RES_IOASIC
/RES_GASIC

0.1U

C21

(9)
(3)
(2)

0.1U

C22

NM

0J

NM

0.1U

C2

VCC3

33JX4

BR20

33J

(9)
(9)
(9)
(4)

4
3
2
1

/CS3#
/CS2#
/CS1#
/CS0#

7
6
4
3

IC1

TP79
TP80

TP74
TP76
TP78

TP62
TP64
TP66
TP68
TP70

TP56

TP40
TP42
TP44
TP46
TP48
TP49
TP51
TP53

ES_STS
ES_CMD
/ES_SRDY
RY/BY

R16
R17
R18

R13
R14
R15

103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128

IC2

33J
33J
33J

R3

R20

0J

330J

/PRINTST
/RD#
/HWR#
/LWR#

C5

AVcc
Vref
P40/AN0
P41/AN1
P42/AN2
P43/AN3
P44/AN4
P45/AN5
P46/AN6/DA0
P47/AN7/DA1
AVss
Vss
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
P16/PO14/TIOCA2
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P14/PO12/TIOCA1
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0
MD0
MD1
MD2
PG0/CAS
PG1/CS3
PG2/CS2

33J
33J
100J

TP6

TP5

TP1
1
8
5
2

15PF

C1
15PF

.te

XIN/CLKIN
XOUT
SSCLK
VSS

CY25811SC

VDD
FRSEL
S0
S1

TP2

ES_STS
ES_CMD
/ES_SRDY
RY/BY

TP729
TP734
TP735

R7

R6

TP4

R2

NM

TP3

R1

VCC3

TP81
TP82
TP83
TP84
BR21
8
7 33JX4
6
5

1
2
3
4

(2)
/PRINTST
(2,3,4,5)
/RD
(3,4)
/HWR
(2)
/LWR

0.1U

C23

R384

R12

R8

X1
AT-49
19.6608MHz

R4

33J

22J

12P

CPUCLK#
/RESET1

EXTAL

NM
C6

XTAL

NM

(3)
(5)

HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321)

P60

A[20..0]

H8S/2321

(2,3,4)

TP72
TP73
TP75
TP77

TP57
TP59
TP61
TP63
TP65
TP67
TP69
TP71

TP50
TP52
TP54
TP55

TP47

TP41
TP43

TP38

CPU3.3

R78
R364
R22

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

/RES_NIC

33J
33J

1KJ

DMT0
DMT1
DMT2
DMT3

CCD_TG
(SPPD)
(PSW)

ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4
BR18
8
7 33JX4
6
5

8 BR16
7 33JX4
6
5

(2)
(5,9)
(2)
(5)
(2,5)
(8)
(8)

D3
D2
D1
D0

D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4

D15
D14
D13
D12

RSV_IN0

D[15..0]

SCL
RxD
SDA
TxD
POFF

100P

100P

TP7

C4

C3

(2,3,4,13)

(4)
(12)
(4)
(12)
(6)

SPFMT0
SPFMT1
SPFMT2
SPFMT3

DMT0
DMT1
DMT2
DMT3

/CS5#

10KJX4

BR12

10KJX4

BR11

/RES_FAX

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

8
7
6
5

10KJ

10KJ
10KJ

8
7
6
5

R95
R132
R131
R94
R66
R26

/RES_NIC
/RES_FAX

D3
D2
D1
D0

D7
D6
D5
D4

D11
D10
D9
D8

D15
D14
D13
D12

/RES_OA982
/RES_GASIC
/RES_IOASIC
/RES_USB20

/RES_FAX (13)

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

10KJ

10KJX4

BR6

R392

1
2
3
4

R11

/ES_SRDY
ES_CMD
ES_STS

R5
R9

10KJX4

BR1

P60

1
2
3
4

/PRINTST
/ES_PAGE

/STBY
NMI
/WDTOVF

om

SCL
RxD
SDA
TXD
POFF

.c
ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC
mt_at_home#
CCD_TG
(SPPD)
(PSW)

8 BR19
7 33JX4
6
5

8 BR17
7 33JX4
6
5

DMT0
(7)
DMT1
(7)
DMT2
(7)
DMT3
(7)
MMCLK
(6)
RESETOUT1 (5)
/RES_NIC (15)
BZR
(11)
CRUMSCL
(16)
CRUMSDA (16)
/CS5
(13)

py

co

64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39

/CS5#

P35/SCK1
P34/SCK0
P33/RxD1
P32/RxD0
P31/TxD1
P30/TxD0
VCC
PD7/D15
PD6/D14
PD5/D13
PD4/D12
Vss
PD3/D11
PD2/D10
PD1/D9
PD0/D8
PE7/D7
PE6/D6
PE5/D5
PE4/D4
Vss
PE3/D3
PE2/D2
PE1/D1
PE0/D0
VCC

hr
an

BR24
8
7 33JX4
6
5

0.1U

C24

CPUCLK

TP19

MCU PWB (CPU section) (AR-M200/M201)

0.1U

C25

TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13
TP14
TP15
TP16
TP17

A0
A1
A2
A3

C12
22P

TP8
TP9

C70
NM
/STBY
NMI

1
2
3
4

C14
NM

EXTAL
XTAL

TP20
TP21

A20

TP85
TP86
TP87
TP88
TP89
TP90
TP91
TP92
BR22
8
7 33JX4
6
5

1
2
3
4

A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11

TP101
TP102
TP103
33J

TP93
TP94
TP95
TP96
TP97
TP98
TP99
TP100
BR23
8
7 33JX4
6
5
BR25
8
7 33JX4
6
5
1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 21


R50

C8
C15
NM

/WDTOVF

TP22
TP23
TP24
TP25
TP26
TP27
TP28
TP29
TP30
TP31
TP32
TP33
TP34
TP35
TP36

TP105
TP106

C7
C13
NM

TP37

102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
P53/ADTRG
P52/SCK2
Vss
Vss
P51/RxD2
P50/TxD2
PF0/BREQ
PF1/BACK
PF2/LCAS/ WAIT/BREQO
PF3/LWR
PF4/HWR
PF5/RD
PF6/AS
VCC
PF7/0
Vss
EXTAL
XTAL
VCC
STBY
NMI
RES
WDTOVF
P20/PO0/TIOCA3
P21/PO1/YICOB3
P22/PO2/TIOCC3
P23/PO3/TIOCD3
P24/PO4/TIOCA4
P25/PO5/TIOCB4
P26/PO6/TIOCA5
P27/PO7/TIOCB5
P63/TEND1
P62/DREQ1
P61/TEND0/CS5
Vss
Vss
P60/DREQ0/CS4
Vss

PG3/CS1
PG4/CS0
Vss
NC
VCC
PC0/A0
PC1/A1
PC2/A2
PC3/A3
Vss
PC4/A4
PC5/A5
PC6/A6
PC7/A7
PB0/A8
PB1/A9
PB2/A10
PB3/A11
Vss
PB4/A12
PB5/A13
PB6/A14
PB7/A15
PA0/A16
PA1/A17
PA2/A18
PA3/A19
Vss
PA4/A20/IRQ4
PA5/A21/IRQ5
PA6/A22/IRQ6
PA7/A23/IRQ7
P67/CS7/IRQ3
P66/CS6/IRQ2
Vss
Vss
P65/IRQ1
P64/IRQ0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
TP107
TP108

C369
NM
C10
NM

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5
NM_10KJX4

BR9

NM_10KJX4

BR7

10KJX4

BR4

10KJX4

BR2

10KJ
10KJ

10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

10KJX4

BR5

10KJX4

BR3

R24
R53
R52

CRUMSDA

10KJX4

BR13

RxD
TxD

1
2
3
4

R21
R23

/SCANSP
/TRANSST
/SCANST
RY/BY

R19

10KJX4

BR10

SDA
SCL

4
3
2
1

R67

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

POFF

CPUCLK
/RD#
/HWR#
/LWR#

CCD_TG

ARB_INT
(FW)
CPU_SYNC

/CS0#
/CS1#
/CS2#
/CS3#

10KJ

10KJ
10KJ

8
7
6
5

2KJ
2KJ

10KJ

5
6
7
8

10KJ

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

1/16
VCC3

B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201)

VCC3

(4)

CCD_CP

(5)

AFE_SEN

ADCLK

AFE_SCK

(5)

(5)

(5)

10KJX4
8 RAMDB11
7 RAMDB10
6 RAMDB9
5 RAMDB8

BR53
1
2
3
4

PFCLKIN

PFCLKOUT

TP720

R68

R70

10KJX4
8 RAMDB15
7 RAMDB14
6 RAMDB13
5 RAMDB12

BR49
1
2
3
4

TP719

10KJX4
8 RAMDB3
7 RAMDB2
6 RAMDB1
5 RAMDB0

BR45
1
2
3
4

SDCLK

10KJX4
8 RAMDB7
7 RAMDB6
6 RAMDB5
5 RAMDB4

RAMDB[15..0]

MAD[12..0]

0J

0J

C74
NM

R59
33J

NM

10KJ
10KJ

10KJX4
8
7
6
5

C351

BR34
1
2
3
4

R45
R46

VCC3

AFE_SDI

AFE_DB7
8
AFE_DB6
7
AFE_DB5
6
AFE_DB4
5
10KJX4
AFE_DB3
8
AFE_DB2
7
AFE_DB1
6
AFE_DB0
5
10KJX4
10KJ AFE_SDI

BR41
1
2
3
4

(4)

(4)

1
2
3
4
BR31
1
2
3
4
BR33
R42

VCC3

(14) AFE_DB[7..0]

CCD_PHI2

CCD_PHI1

(5)

(5)

AFE_SDI

BSAMP

(5)

(5)

CCD_RS

(5)

TP866
TP867
TP868
TP869

RAMDB11
RAMDB10
RAMDB9
RAMDB8

TP826
TP827
TP828
TP829

TP822
TP823
TP824
TP825

C108

12P

C107

10P

X5
AT-49(18.3856MHz)

MAD7
MAD6
MAD5
MAD4

MAD12
MAD11
MAD9
MAD8

TP862
TP863
TP864
TP865

RAMDB15
RAMDB14
RAMDB13
RAMDB12

DQM1
SDCKE

TP858
TP859
TP860
TP861

RAMDB3
RAMDB2
RAMDB1
RAMDB0

(4)
(4)

TP854
TP855
TP856
TP857

/SDRAS
/SDCAS
/SDWDE
DQM0

(4)
(4)
(4)
(4)

RAMDB7
RAMDB6
RAMDB5
RAMDB4

BANK1
BANK0
/SDCS

(4)
(4)
(4)

TP821

MAD10

1
2
3
4
BR36
1
2
3
4
BR37
1
2
3
4
BR38

(1,3,4,13) D[15..0]

1
2
3
4
BR39
1
2
3
4
BR42
1
2
3
4
BR44
1
2
3
4
BR48
1
2
3
4
BR51
1
2
3
4
BR54
1
2
3
4
BR56
RAM_CLK_OUT

MM_PH_A
MM_AI0
MM_AI1

(7)
(7)
(7)

TP817
TP818
TP819
TP820

MM_PH_B
MM_BI0
MM_BI1

MM_Y3
MM_Y2
MM_Y1

CL

(7)
(7)
(7)

(6)
(6)
(6)

MAD3
MAD2
MAD1
MAD0

MM_AI1
MM_AI2

MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
MM_AI0

(14)

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5

33JX4

33JX4

82JX4

33JX4

33JX4

33JX4

33JX4

33JX4

33JX4

33JX4

MM_AI0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2

C80
47P

SYNC#
TP746

TP238
TP239
TP241

TP233
TP235

TP228
TP229
TP231

TP225

TP220
TP222

TP209
TP211
TP213
TP214
TP216
TP218

TP205
TP206

TP196
TP198
TP200
TP202

TP188
TP190
TP192
TP193

TP184
TP186

TP174
TP176
TP178
TP180
TP181

TP167
TP169
TP171

TP163
TP165

BR32

10J

R69

33J

33J

33J

33J

8 33JX4
7
6
5

8 33JX4
7
6
5

33J

(1,3,4)

(5)

MIRCNT
CPU_SYNC
ARB_INT

(/SYNC)

(5)
(1)
(1)

TP120

TP119

.te

33J

33J

33J

33J

33J

GND(CORE)
MM_Y3
MM_Y2
MM_Y1
VCC(CORE)
MM_PH_B
MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2
MM_PH_A
MM_AI0
MM_AI1
MM_AI2
GND(AC)
RAM_MAD3
RAM_MAD2
GND(CORE)
RAM_MAD1
RAM_MAD0
RAM_MAD10
VCC(CORE)
RAM_BANKS1
RAM_BANKS0
RAM_CS
RAM_RAS
RAM_CAS
VCC(AC)
RAM_WDE
RAM_DQM0
GND(AC)
RAM_DATA7
RAM_DATA6
RAM_DATA5
RAM_DATA4
GND(CORE)
RAM_DATA3
RAM_DATA2
RAM_DATA1
RAM_DATA0
GND(AC)
RAM_DATA15
RAM_DATA14
VCC(CORE)
RAM_DATA13
RAM_DATA12
RAM_DATA11
RAM_DATA10
RAM_DATA9
RAM_DATA8
VCC(CORE)
RAM_DQM1
RAM_CKE
GND(AC)
RAM_CLK_OUT
GND(CORE)
RAM_MAD12
RAM_MAD11
RAM_MAD9
VCC(CORE)
RAM_MAD8
RAM_MAD7
VCC(AC)
RAM_MAD6
RAM_MAD5
RAM_MAD4
GND(AC)
CPUDATA15
CPUDATA14
CPUDATA13
CPUDATA12
CPUDATA11
CPUDATA10
CPUDATA9
CPUDATA8

1
2
3
4

1
2
3
4

R41

R39

R38

R37

R36

R35

R34

TP747

223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296

IC4

TP844
TP843
TP842
TP841

TP147
TP149
TP151
TP152
TP154
TP156
TP158
TP160

BR30

R33

R32

R31

TP848
TP847
TP846
TP845

TP142
TP143
TP145

AFE_DB3
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB0

AFE_DB7
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB4

MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_BI2

47P 47P 47P 47P 47P NM 47P 47P NM 47P NM

C58 C59 C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66 C67 C68

TP877

TP876

TP836

TP873

TP875

TP834

TP874

TP835

TP878

TP110
D7
D6
D5
D4

TP879

10KJX4
5
6
7
8

BR27
4
3
2
1

JTG_TCK
JTG_TMS
JTG_TDI
JTG_TDO

/RESET0

(4,5,9,12)

10KJ

R40

10KJX4
5
6
7
8

BR26
4
3
2
1

/OUTCS

hr
an

TP495
TP493
TP490

VCC3
/PCLPRO
/FAXPRO
/OUTACK
/INREQ

TP630
TP628
TP627

CCD_TG

A[20..0]

D3
D2
D1
D0

HG73C141HFV(LF)

ASIC

TP130
TP131
TP132
TP133

TP364
TP351
TP140

TP462
TP403
TP402
TP382

TP486
TP471
TP468

(1)

/RES_GASIC

(3,5) (/ASIC_RST)

(1)
/CSGASIC
(1)
/LWR
(1,3,4,5) /RD

R134

R133

TP881

TP872

TP727

NM

33J

(1,5)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)

1000P

C97

VIDEO#
/LEND
MMD
PMD
TC
GRIDL

(6)
MC
(6)
BIAS
(6) VFMCNT_12V
(6) VFM_24V
(9) /FPOFF

TP255
TP259
TP260
TP261

RSV_OUT0
RSV_OUT1
RSV_OUT2

TP882

8
7
6
5

148
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
TP144
TP146

FWREN

(5)

CPFS1
(6)
MRPS3
(6)
MRPS2
(6)
MRPS1
(6)
LDEN
(6)
RRS
(6)
PTPULSE (6)
GASIC_READY (12)

TP248
TP249
TP250

TP240
TP242
TP243
TP244
TP245
TP246
TP247

TP232
TP234
TP236
TP237

TP230

TP221
TP223
TP224
TP226
TP227

R73
NM

R75
NM

R56
10KJ

VCC3

8
7
6
5
BR46 33JX4

VCC3

R79
0J

C411
0.1U

TP257

R314
0J

FB3
0J <1608>

R92
NM
S1
TP256

VCC3

VCC3

(6)
(6)
(6)

(9)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(6)

(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)

(5)

(1)

/PIWR
/PIACK
/POACK
/PIREQ
PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7

(9)
(9)
(9)
(9)
(9)

/POREQ

(9)

G3.3V

R60
NM

C76
0.1U

TP254

S0
S1

(15)
(15)
(15)
(15)

(15)

(15)
(15)
(15)
(15)
(15)

7
6
4
3

N.C.

GND

XIN/CLKIN
XOUT
SSCLK
VSS
CY25814SC

VDD
FRSEL
S0
S1

1
8
5
2

SFCLK48B

SFCLK48A

TP891
TP885

R49

R48

10KJX4
8
7
6
5

BR60
1
2
3
4
/INIT
/SLCTIN
/AUTOFD
/STB

TP258

TP253

R65 33J

C375
X7
AT-49(12MHz)

C402

12P

12P

10KJX4
8
7
6
5

BR59
1
2
3
4
PARAD4
PARAD5
PARAD6
PARAD7

TP892

10KJX4
8
7
6
5
PARAD0
PARAD1
PARAD2
PARAD3

BR58
1
2
3
4

VCC3

10KJX4
8
7
6
5

10KJX4
8
7
6
5

10KJX4
8
7
6
5

BR55
1
2
3
4

BR52
1
2
3
4

VCC3

BR57
1
2
3
4
RCV
VPIN
VMIN

PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7

PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3

(1)
(1)

10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ

(1)
/PRINTST
/SCANST

R356
R357
R358
R359

(9)
/TRANSST

(9)
/SC_LINE

/PR_LINE

C401
10U/10V<2012>

C400
10U/10V<2012>

MEM_INT
CLKSW
/POREQ
/PIREQ

10J

10J

C399
10U/10V<2012>

C37
10U/10V<2012>

VCC3

2/16
L2
ZJSR5101-223TA

FB2
NM_0J <1608>

R63 NM_33J
SFCLK48

SFCLK48B

C77
NM_12P

SFCLK48A

R62
10KJ

TP743

(15)

(9)

R58
NM

VCC3

OUTPUT

PFCLK

VCC

X2

10KJ

R47

PARAD[7..0]

VCC3

PODATA[7..0]

NM_SG8002DC(48MHz)

IC9

TP252

TP251 8

R61
10KJ

R57
NM

VCC3

/INIT_I
/SLCTIN_I
/AUTOFD_I
/STB_I

PARAD0
8
PARAD1
7
PARAD2
6
PARAD3
5
8BR40 33JX4 PARAD4
PARAD5
7
PARAD6
6
PARAD7
5
BR43 33JX4
33J
/REV_O
8
/FAULT_O
7
/ACK_O
6
BUSY_O
5
PE_O
BR47 33JX4
33J
SLCT_O

(9)

PIDATA[7..0]

om
HL
PR
CPFS2

/IMC_READY
KEYSC3
KEYSC2
KEYSC1
SPFON
MIRON
MPFS

OP_LATCH
OP_DATA
TM
TM_

OP_CLK

/SCANSP

1
2
3
4

R55

SLCT
TP215
TP217
TP219

/INIT
/SLCTIN
/AUTOFD
/STB

R54
1
2
3
4

/REV
/FAULT
/ACK
BUSY
PE
TP207
TP208
TP210
TP212

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

RCV
VPIN
VMIN

8
7
6
5
BR35 33JX4

33J

/H_SYNC

PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7

PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
PIDATA3

TP194
TP195
TP197
TP199
TP201
TP203
TP204

TP187
TP189
TP191

TP182
TP183
TP185

TP168
TP170
TP172
TP173
TP175
TP177
TP179

TP153
TP155
TP157
TP159
TP161
TP162
TP164
TP166

TP148
TP150

R44

1
2
3
4

TP141

G3.3V

.c

py

co

/POREQ
VCC(AC)
/PIWT
/PIACK
GND(AC)
/POACK
/PIREQ
GND(CORE)
PODATA0
PODATA1
PODATA2
PODATA3
PODATA4
PODATA5
PODATA6
PODATA7
VCC(CORE)
/TRANSST
/RECEPTST
/PRINTST
/SCANST
RCV
VPIN
VMIN
GND(CORE)
VPOUT
VMOUT
OEN
GND(AC)
SUSPEND
IE1284_PARAD0
IE1284_PARAD1
VCC(AC)
IE1284_PARAD2
IE1284_PARAD3
IE1284_PARAD4
IE1284_PARAD5
IE1284_PARAD6
IE1284_PARAD7
IE1284_REV
VCC(CORE)
IE1284_FAULT
IE1284_ACK
IE1284_BUSY
IE1284_PE
GND(CORE)
IE1284_SLCT
IE1284_INIT
IE1284_SLCTIN
VCC(CORE)
IE1284_AUTOFD
IE1284_STB
TSP_MODE
TSO0
/SCANSP
VCC(AC)
OPE_CLK
GND(AC)
OPE_LATCH
OPE_DATA
TM
/TM
VCC(CORE)
OUTP14B
OUTP13B
OUTP12B
OUTP11B
OUTP10B
OUTP09B
OUTP08B
GND(CORE)
OUTP07B
OUTP06B
OUTP05B

BR29 33JX4

1
2
3
4

BR28 33JX4
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5

12P
C291

VSAMP

MEM_INT

12P
C292

(1,5)

TP121
TP122
TP123
TP124
TP125
TP126
TP127
TP128
TP129

A9
A8
A7
A6

12P
C293

(5)

TP111
TP112
TP113
TP114
TP115
TP116
TP117
TP118

JTG_TMS
JTG_TCK
TP740
TP739

JTG_TDO
JTG_TDI
TP742
TP741

RAM_CLK_OUT
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1

12P
C294

33J

SFCLK48

12P
C295

R30

PFCLK
CLKSW

12P
C296

TP837

TP738
TP737
TP736

/INREQ
/OUTCS
/OUTACK
/ESPRD
/FAXPRO
/PCLPRO
TP325
TP270

PFCLKOUT
PFCLKIN

12P
C297

0.1U

0.1U
C48

TP507
TP500
TP498

SYNC#

12P
C298

0.1U
C27
0.1U

0.1U

0.1U
C49

C38

0.1U
C28
0.1U

0.1U

0.1U
C50

C39

C29
0.1U

0.1U

0.1U
C51

C40

C30
0.1U

0.1U

0.1U
C52

C41

C31
0.1U

0.1U

0.1U
C53

C42

C32
0.1U
0.1U

C43

C33
0.1U

0.1U
C35
0.1U

0.1U
C36
0.1U

C54

C44

C34
0.1U
C45
0.1U
C55

C46
0.1U
C56

C47
0.1U
C57

D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8

TP134
TP135
TP136
TP137
TP138
TP139

222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
199
198
197
196
195
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
149

0.1U
C69

MCU PWB (ASIC section) (AR-M200/M201)

C75
22000P

CLPWM
VCC(AC)
AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
GND(AC)
AFESCK
VCC(CORE)
ADCLK
GND(CORE)
AFE_SEN
CCD_PH1
CCD_PH2
AFE_SDI
CCD_CP
BSAMP
CCD_RS
CCD_TG
VSAMP
GND(CORE)
TD0
TDI
TRSK
TMS
TCK
VCC(CORE)
/INREQ
/OUTCS
/OUTACK
/ESPRD
/FAXPRD
/PCLPRD
GND(AC)
MDAT15
MDAT14
MDAT13
VCC(CORE)
MDAT12
MDAT11
MDAT10
VCC(AC)
MDAT09
MDAT08
MDAT07
GND(CORE)
MDAT06
MDAT05
MDAT04
VCC(CORE)
MDAT03
MDAT02
MDAT01
MDAT00
GND(AC)
/INCS
/INACK
/OUTREQ
GND(CORE)
/HSYNC
PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
VCC(AC)
PIDATA3
PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7
/POCS

CPU_DATA7
CPU_DATA6
CPU_DATA5
CPU_DATA4
VCC(AC)
CPU_DATA3
CPU_DATA2
CPU_DATA1
CPU_DATA0
GND(AC)
MIRCNT
/CPUSYNC
MEM_INT
ARB_INT
VCC(CORE)
CPU_AD8
CPU_AD7
CPU_AD6
CPU_AD5
GND(CORE)
RAM_CLK_IN
CPU_AD4
CPU_AD3
CPU_AD2
CPU_AD1
CPU_AD0
/CPUCS
SFCLK48
GND(CORE)
/CPUWR
/CPURD
/RESET
VCC(CORE)
PFCLK
CLKSW
GND(CORE)
PFCLKOUT
PFCLKIN
GND(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
GND(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
TM2_15M
/SYNC
GND(AC)
/VIDEO
/LEND
VCC(AC)
OUTP00A
OUTP01A
OUTP02A
OUTP03A
OUTP04A
OUTP05A
OUTP06A
OUTP15A
VCC(CORE)
OUTP07A
OUTP08A
GND(CORE)
OUTP09A
OUTP10A
OUTP11A
OUTP12A
OUTP13A
VCC(CORE)
OUTP14A
OUTP00B
GND(AC)
OUTP01B
OUTP02B
OUTP03B
OUTP04B
VCC(AC)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 22

(2,5) (/ASIC_RST)

(1) /RES_IOASIC

R135
33J
R136
NM

1000P

C98

A[20..0]

(1,2,4,13) D[15..0]

(1,2,4)
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0

(1)

D13
D12
D11

D15
D14

CPUCLK#

/RD
/HWR

/CSIOASIC

(1,2,4,5)
(1,4)

(1)

(11)

(11)
(11)
(11)

R706
NM_10KJ

IC52

TP635

TP294
TP296

TP285
TP287

TP282

IOIC3.3V

TP636

TP262
TP263
TP264
TP265
TP266
TP267
TP268
TP269

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

hr
an

SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3

.te

KEYIN

MCU PWB (I/O ASIC section) (AR-M200/M201)

VDD
PHICLK
gnd
XCE0(PU50K)
CE1(PU50K)
XOE(PU50K)
XWR(PU50K)
A4(PU50K)
A3(PU50K)
A2(PU50K)
A1(PU50K)
A0(PU50K)
XRST(Sch)
vdd
D7(PU50K)
D6(PU50K)
SMC(SCAN)(PD50K)
SIN(SCAN)(PD50K)
SOUT(SCAN)
AMC(SCAN)(PD50K)
SCK(SCAN)
D5(PU50K)
D4(PU50K)
D3(PU50K)
VDD

RSV_IN1

TP811

(8)
(8)
(8)
(6)

(PMRDY)
(MMLD)
(FANLK)
THOPEN

(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)

(PPD1)
(PPD2)
(PPD3)
(POD)
(SPID)
(CED1)
(CED2)
(DRST)

(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)
(8)

(13)

(11)

DSWS
(TCS)
DVS1
(PD1)
(PD2)
(SCOD)
(SRJD)
(MFD)

MSU_ST1

BL

IOIC3.3V

VCC3

/ES_CRDY

LCDE
LCDRS

R707
4.7KJ

om

RSV_IN2

.c

(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)

SFTMT0
SFTMT1
SFTMT2
SFTMT3

(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(9)
(6)

(7)
(6)

(RSV_SOL)
PSFM

LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
LCDE
LCDRS
/ES_CRDY
MCNT

(11)
(11)
(7)
(7)

INFOLED
PSL
SPUS
SRVC

py

75
74 TP283
73 TP284
72 TP286
71 TP288
70 TP289
69 TP290
68 TP291
67 TP292
66
65 TP293
64 TP295
63
62 TP297
61 TP298
60 TP299
59 TP300
58 TP301
57
56 TP832
55 TP302
54 TP303
53 TP304
52 TP305
51

co

SC65892(IO ASIC) <LQFP100>

VDD
PORTE0(PD50K)
PORTE1(PD50K)
PORTE2(PD50K)
PORTE3(PD50K)
PORTE4(PD50K)
PORTE5(PD50K)
PORTE6(PD50K)
PORTE7(PD50K)
gnd
PORTD0(PD50K)
PORTD1(PD50K)
PORTD2(PD50K)
PORTD3(PD50K)
PORTD4(PD50K)
PORTD5(PD50K)
PORTD6(PD50K)
PORTD7(PD50K)
gnd
PORTC0(PD50K)
PORTC1(PD50K)
PORTC2(PD50K)
PORTC3(PD50K)
PORTC4(PD50K)
VDD

RSV_OUT17
RSV_OUT16

RSV_OUT15
RSV_OUT14
RSV_OUT13
RSV_OUT12
RSV_OUT11
RSV_OUT10
RSV_OUT9
RSV_OUT8

IO ASIC

0.1U
C568

0.1U
C662

2
1

MSU_ST1

R10
4.7KJ

VCC3

0.1U
C575

TP271
TP272
TP273
TP274

D10
D9
D8

0.1U
C660

TP275
TP276
TP277
TP278
TP279
TP306
TP280
TP281

100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76

TP307
TP308
TP309
TP815
TP310
TP311
TP312
TP313

0.1U
C574
NM_10KJ

GND
YIN(PD50K)(5VFS)
SELC(OD,5VFS)
SELB(OD,5VFS)
SELA(OD,5VFS)
gnd
XCE_EXT
PORTG0(PD50K)
PORTG1(PD50K)
PORTG2(PD50K)
PORTG3(PD50K)
PORTG4(PD50K)
PORTG5(PD50K)
PORTG6(PD50K)
PORTG7(PD50K)
vdd
PORTF0(PD50K)
PORTF1(PD50K)
PORTF2(PD50K)
PORTF3(PD50K)
PORTF4(PD50K)
PORTF5(PD50K)
PORTF6(PD50K)
PORTF7(PD50K)
GND

0.1U
C569
R122

GND
D2(PU50K)
D1(PU50K)
D0(PU50K)
PORTA7(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA6(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA5(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA4(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA3(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA2(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA1(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA0(PD50K)(5VFS)
vdd
PORTB7(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB6(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB5(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB4(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB3(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB2(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB1(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB0(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTC7(PD50K)
PORTC6(PD50K)
PORTC5(PD50K)
GND

0.1U
C663
NM_10KJ

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
TP314
TP315
TP316
TP317
TP318
TP319
TP320
TP321
TP322
TP323
TP324

0.1U
C700
R263

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 23

C304
10U/10V<2012>

L15
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA

FB13
0J <1608>

VCC3

3/16

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 24

R76

(1)
/CSSRAM
(1,2,3,5)
/RD
(1,3)
/HWR

A[20..0]

(1,2,3,13) D[15..0]

(1,2,3)

(1) SCL
(1) SDA

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16

TP726

100J

5
28
12

1
2
3
4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
29
30
31
32

GND
GND

VDD
VDD

I/O0
I/O1
I/O2
I/O3
I/O4
I/O5
I/O6
I/O7

C82
0.1U

9
25

8
24

6
7
10
11
22
23
26
27

VCC3

IS63LV1024L-12J-TR

CS1
OE
WE

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16

IC8

VCC3

8
7
6
5
E0
E1
E2
VSS

0.1U

C84

1
2
3
4

0.1U

C85

VCC3 VCC3

CAT24WC08LI

VCC
WC
SCL
SDA

IC5

Serial EE-PROM

D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15

R77
NM

TP889

A17
A1

A19
A18
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2

(1)

R86

RY/BY

NM

VCC3

TP353
TP355
TP357
TP359
TP361
TP363
TP365
TP366
TP368

TP344
TP346
TP347
TP349

TP888

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

(9)

IC7

VPP

A16
BYTE
GND
DQ15
DQ7
DQ14
DQ6
DQ13
DQ5
DQ12
DQ4
VCC
DQ11
DQ3
DQ10
DQ2
DQ9
DQ1
DQ8
DQ0
OE
GND
CE
A0

48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25

R84
10KJ

VCC3

S29AL016D70TFI020

A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A19
NC
WE
RP
VPP
WP
RY/BY
A18
A17
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1

TP367
TP369

TP348
TP350
TP352
TP354
TP356
TP358
TP360
TP362

TP332
TP334
TP336
TP338
TP340
TP342
TP343
TP345

TP327
TP329

C88
0.1U

A17

/RD

1
2
3

J1,J2

D15
D7
D14
D6
D13
D5
D12
D4

A1

(1,2,3,5)

(1)

(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
MAD10
MAD0
MAD1
MAD2
MAD3

RAMDB7

RAMDB5
RAMDB6

RAMDB3
RAMDB4

RAMDB1
RAMDB2

RAMDB0

/CSFROM

D11
D3
D10
D2
D9
D1
D8
D0

DQM0
/SDWDE
/SDCAS
/SDRAS
/SDCS
BANK0
BANK1

VSS
DQ15
VSSQ
DQ14
DQ13
VCCQ
DQ12
DQ11
VSSQ
DQ10
DQ9
VCCQ
DQ8
VSS
NC
UDQM
CLK
CLKE
NC
A11
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
VSS

C91
0.1U

C92
0.1U

SDRAM (16bit x 4bank)

VCC
DQ0
VCCQ
DQ1
DQ2
VSSQ
DQ3
DQ4
VCCQ
DQ5
DQ6
VSSQ
DQ7
VCC
LDQM
WE
CAS
RAS
CS
BA0
BA1
A10
A0
A1
A2
A3
VCC

IC6

C90
0.1U

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27

C93
0.1U

54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28

C89
0.1U

om

VCC3

TP850
TP849
TP813
TP840
TP838
TP853
TP839

VCC3

.c

py

co
VCC3

FlashROM VPP Controll

hr
an

TP326
TP328
TP330
TP331
TP333
TP335
TP337
TP339
TP341

.te

(1,3)
/HWR
(2,5,9,12) /RESET0
(9)
VPP

A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A20

VCC3

R74
10KJ

10KJ

NM

C352

NM

R81

NM
R88

MCU PWB (Memory section) (AR-M200/M201)

NM

C353

NM

R82

NM
C86

NM
C354

R83

22000P
C87

NM
R80
NM
C355

C94
0.1U

TP851
TP816
TP812
TP852

VCC3

C95
0.1U

C83
NM

DQM1
SDCLK
SDCKE

(2)
(2)
(2)
R85

RAMDB8

RAMDB10
RAMDB9

RAMDB12
RAMDB11

RAMDB14
RAMDB13

RAMDB15

0J

MAD12
MAD11
MAD9
MAD8
MAD7
MAD6
MAD5
MAD4

RAMDB[15..0]

(2)

MAD[12..0] (2)

4/16

C16

(2,3) (/ASIC_RST)

(1)

R64

RESETOUT1

1U<2012> 0.1U

C290

33J

CT

33J

C79
47P

TP395

R345
1KJ

OP Reset

R28

ASIC Reset

BU4212F

GND

VDD VOUT

IC3

Reset Circuit

R29
10KJ

VCC3

C26
47P

C18
NM

/OP_RST

TP386

0.01U

C17

TP786

R27
100KJ

VCC3

(9,10)

/ASIC_RST

TP383

(16)

/RESET0

(2,4,9,12)

(2,4,9,12) /RESET0

OP_CLK
OP_DATA
OP_LATCH

MIRCNT

AFE_SDI
AFE_SEN
AFE_SCK

(2)
(1,2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)

VSAMP
CCD_TG
CCD_RS
BSAMP
CCD_CP
CCD_PHI1
CCD_PHI2
ADCLK

(9,10)
PB_NOE
(9,10) PB_NAE0
(9,10) PB_NWE
(1,2,3,4)
/RD

(2)
(2)
(2)

LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
LCDE
LCDRS

(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)

VIDEO#
KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3
TM
TM_

(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)

(1,2)

R71
10KJ

R121

/OP_RST

/ASIC_RST

(1)
SPFMT0
(1)
SPFMT1
(1) SPFMT2/MIRCNT
(1)
SPFMT3
(2)
MIRON
(2)
SPFON

(2)

(16)

/RESET#

(9,10)
100J

3.3V

3.3V

TP378

R72
10KJ

TP718

3.3V

3.3V

2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10

2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10

VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4

1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND

IC16

VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4

74LCX244

1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND

IC13

20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3

20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3

0.1U

C105

TP384
TP385
TP387
TP388
TP389
TP390
TP391

C110
0.1U

VCC3

TP370
TP371
TP372
TP373
TP374
TP375
TP379
TP380

VCC3

R109

R101

R96
R97
R98

5
6
7
8

100J

33J
33J
33J

BR61

3.3V

3.3V

4
3
2
1

TP833

2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10

VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4

VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4

IC23

VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4

20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3

20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3

TC74VHC244FT

VCC
1Y1
1Y2
1Y3
1Y4
2Y1
2Y2
2Y3
2Y4

74LCX244

1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND

20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3

20
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3

NM_100J

74LCX244

1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND

IC26

74VHCT244

1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND

1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
1G
2G
GND

IC19

R110

2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10

2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10

IC20

74LCX244

TP396
TP397
TP398

5V

TP900
TP899
TP898
TP897
TP896
TP895
TP894
TP893

TP412
TP413
TP414
TP415
TP416
TP417
TP418
TP419

C127
0.1U

(PB_NOE)
(PB_NAE0)
(PB_NWE)
(/RD)

R226
NM_10KJ

R237
10KJ

NM

C104

C255
0.1U

(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)

(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(14)

1KJ
33J

TP814

/RESET#
/RESET1

C116
NM
C120
NM
C121
NM
C122
NM
C123
NM
C124
NM
C125
NM
C126
NM

ADCLK#

CCD_PHI1#

CCD_PHI2#

CCD_CP#

BSAMP#

CCD_RS#

CCD_TG#

VSAMP#

(1)

(11)

.c

py
NM_TC7SH32FU

IC46

VSAMP#
CCD_TG#
CCD_RS#
BSAMP#
CCD_CP#
CCD_PHI1#
CCD_PHI2#
ADCLK#

(13)
(13)
(13)
(13)

(PB_NOE)
(PB_NAE0)
(PB_NWE)
(/RD)

VCC3

(14)
(14)
(14)

AFE_SDI#
AFE_SEN#
AFE_SCK#

LCDDB4#
LCDDB5#
LCDDB6#
LCDDB7#
LCDE#
LCDRS#

(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(7)
(7)

/VIDEO
(KEYSC1)
(KEYSC2)
(KEYSC3)
(TM)
(TM_)

(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)

R119
R120
(2,3)

(11)
(11)
(11)
(13)
(15)

(SPFMT0)
(SPFMT1)
(SPFMT2)
(SPFMT3)

(/ASIC_RST)

(OP_CLK)
(OP_DATA)
(OP_LATCH)
/FAX_RST
/NIC_RST

co

AFE_SDI#
AFE_SEN#
AFE_SCK#

R224
0J

VSAMP#
33J
CCD_TG#
33J
CCD_RS#
33J
33J BSAMP#
CCD_CP#
33J
CCD_PHI1#
33J
CCD_PHI2#
33J
ADCLK#
33J

33J
33J
33J
33J

R373
R374
R375
R376

FWREN

100J

VCC3

33J
33J
33J

R223
NM_0J

R361
R370
R371

R332
R333
R336
R338
R344
R354
R355
R360

(2)

VCC3

C128
0.1U

TP404
TP405
TP406
TP407
TP408
TP409
TP410
TP411

VCC3

5V

5V

33JX4

hr
an

2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
10

.te

(2)
(2)
(2)

MCU PWB (Driver section 1) (AR-M200/M201)

33P
C117

0.01U
C310

0.1U

C114

0.1U
C115

NM
C311

5
3

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 25

/SYNC

C129
NM
C130
NM
C131
NM

NM

C376

C306
NM
C307
NM
C308
NM
C309
NM

R89
NM

(/RD)

(PB_NWE)

(PB_NAE0)

(PB_NOE)

AFE_SCK#

AFE_SEN#

AFE_SDI#

5V

om

FW

R93
10KJ

VCC3

(14) mt_at_home

(11)

47P

GND

Y2

GND

Y2

Y1

Vcc

TP394

0.1U

R100

3.3V

0.1U

C96

TP377

VCC3

C103

VCC3

TP393

NC7WZ17

A2

Y1

NC7WZ17

A2

A1

IC11

A1

Vcc

TP381

IC14

TP376

C99

3.3V

5V

33J

R91

3.3V

33J

(FW)

(1,9)

mt_at_home#

(/SYNC)

5/16

(2)
(1)

PR

MM_Y1
MM_Y2
MM_Y3
PMD
PMCLK
LDEN
/LEND

R116
10KJ

(1) MMCLK

100J

R339

(2)
VFM_24V
(2) VFMCNT_12V

TP474

TP797
TP799

TP798

100J

10KJ

R268

PR#

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9

TP475

1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
NC

(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)

Q21

TP464

TP805
TP806
TP807

KRC102S

KRC102S

TP723
TP722

Q14

10KJ

R269

R418
NM_10KJ

KID65503F

1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
G

R304

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

IC27

R142
NM_10KJ

R414
NM_10KJ

VCC3

R419
NM_10KJ

VCC3

TP792
TP785
TP790
TP789

10KJ

R265

10KJ

R271

10KJ

R270

10KJ

R266

MC
BIAS
TC
GRIDL
MCNT
PSFM

(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(3)

3
TP467

MMref0
MMref1
MMref2
/PMD
PMCLK_A
/LDEN

CPFS1
CPFS2
MPFS
RRS

R395 1.5KJ
R396 1.5KJ

(7)
(7)
(7)
(11)
(11)
(11)

Q16

R379
R380

Q17

KRC102S

(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(2)

Q4

(12)

D45
1SS355

TP466

INT24V

NM_1.5KJ
NM_1.5KJ

1.5KJX4
8
7
6
5

PGND

TP429

IC21

D61
1SS355

/PR

SHOLD

TP801

TP800
TP795
TP793
TP794

PGND

TP437
TP439
TP440
TP441
TP442
TP445
TP446

1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
COM

(11)

R296
10KJ

PGND

(11)

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9

TP430

47KJ

R363

/CPFS1
/CPFS2
/MPFS
/RRS

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
KID65503F

1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
G

IC24

1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
NC

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9

R413
NM_10KJ

(12)

/VFMCNT

TP461

TP802
TP803
TP804

D58

D56

CRH01

/MMD
MRPS_1
MRPS_2
MRPS_3
/POFF

TP457

12V

(12)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(11)

0603SFF150FM/32-2

CP17

CRH01

D55

Q13
2SB1132

TP454

TP451

24V

0603SFF150FM/32-2

CP16

Q12
2SB1132

TP448

47KJ

RLS-73

TP456

R389

5V

PGND

1SS355

D51

PSFMOUT

(12)

R112

(2)

R108

PTPULSE

Q3
KRA119S

TP460

24V

TP431

Q2
NM_KTA1505S

R297
47KJ

R298
1.5KF

HLOUT

R115
100J1/4W<3216>

(11)

(12)

Q18
KRC102S

EN5V

TP470
KIA358F-EL/P

IC45B

1
(1)

(12)

3
TP424

(16)

VCC3

12KF

TCS_AN

R129
NM

5V

0J

R378

5V

R366 0J

NM_KDS226

D59

R307
7.5KF

12V

TP463

TP458

R107
4.3KF

TP436

VCC3

12V

+
-

5
6

+
-

3
2

12V

+
-

5
6

TP472

R393
0J

IC22B
KIA393F

TP465
KIA358F-EL/P

IC53B

0.1U

C305

EN5V

TP473

R381
NM

10KJ

R382

Q15

TP553

VCC3

0.1U

C113

NM

C371

NM_KDS226

VCC3

TP476
0.1U

C398

NM_2SB1197K

D60

R383
NM

R114
100J

VCC3

KDS226

D3

KDS226

D67

R394
NM

C407
NM

22000P

C119

R308
NM

PR#

0.1U/50V<1608>

R124
4.7KJ

VCC3

TP453

C118

R113
300J

0.1U/50V<1608>

C111

KIA358F-EL/P
12V

12V

Q19
2SK3018

R105
1KJ

VCC3

(S)

(D)

TP452

IC53A

IC22A
KIA393F

(G)

KIA358F-EL/P

IC45A

EN5V

12V

12V

C379
0.1U

TP427

R303
10KJ
IC17A
KIA393F

R104
7.5KF

VCC3

NM_KDS226

D66

TP469

R123
10KF

R118
1.2KF

VCC3

C112
22000P

12V

om
R264

Analog Tonner Sensor Buffer

NM

R368

LCDCONT

R316
NM

VCC3

MA700

D1

R103
1MF

VCC3

R302
10KJ

NM_KDS226

D2

R106
10KF

R301
4.7KJ

TP433

R102
1KF

TP438

TP425

R300
470KJ

LCD Contrast Buffer

RTH_IN

VCC3

C367
2.2U<2012>

R299
100J

.c

py

PGND

VFMOUT

D36
1SS355

TP432

1SS355

D4

1U<2012>

C312

co

1SS355

D5
TP459

INT5V

NM_4.7KJ1/4W<3216>

TP444

NM_47KJ

hr
an
(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)

Q7
KTA1505S

47KJ

D57

RLS-73

TP450

4.7KJ1/4W<3216>

R387

4.7KJ1/4W<3216>

R386

R388

TP447

D52
MTZ J22B

TP443

24V

4.7KJ1/4W<3216>

(11)
(11)
(11)
(11)
(12)

24V

.te

KID65001AF

1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
E

R90
10KJ

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

R362

/MC
/BIAS
/TC
/GRIDL
/MCNT

24V

/PR

TP455

TP449

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9

MMD
MRPS1
MRPS2
MRPS3
POFF
HL
FTH

1C
2C
3C
4C
5C
6C
7C
COM

KID65001AF

1B
2B
3B
4B
5B
6B
7B
E

IC25

KRC102S

R117
10KJ

Q20
KRA119S

5V

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

BR62
1
2
3
4

KRC102S

/MMCLK

TP784

TP781

PGND

1.5KJX4
TP420
8
TP421
7
TP422
6
TP423
5
TP426
TP428
TP435

1
1

8
4

BR63
1
2
3
4

8
4

8
4
8
4

+
-

5
6

(TCS_AN)

(LCDCONT)

(11)

(1)

(3)

(1)

TP434

KIA393F

IC17B

THOPEN

RTH

FTH

12V

6/16

8
4

MCU PWB (Driver section 2) (AR-M200/M201)

8
4

4
8
4

E
C

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 26

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 27

(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)

(TM)

(TM_)

(5)

MRPS_1
MRPS_2
MRPS_3

(SPFMT0)
(SPFMT2)
(SPFMT1)
(SPFMT3)

MMref0
MMref1
MMref2

OUT_AOUT_A+
OUT_B+
OUT_B-

(5)

(6)
(6)
(6)

(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)

(6)
(6)
(6)

R160
300J

R150
2KJ

R161
620J

R162
1.2KJ

PGND

C144
NM_10U/10V<2012>

PGND

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

R158
1J 2W

2
Vs

N.C

OUT2

OUT1

Vref

TA7291AS

GND

IN2

IN1

Vcc

IC36

R312
0J <1608>

Vs

R149
30KJ

R164
4.7KJ

GND

OUT A
OUT A
OUT A/
OUT A/
OUT B
OUT B
OUT B/
OUT B/

PGND

STA7100M

Sense B

Sense A

Sync

REF

IN A
IN A/
IN B
IN B/

IC34

24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13

Tonner Motor Driver

PGND

R157
1J 2W

14

8
7
11
12

24VSCMT 5V

(2)

R145
1.5KJ

10

1
2
3
4
17
18
15
16

13

PGND

(2)
(2)

24VSPFMT

C136
820P

TP487

MM_AI1
MM_PH_A

TMB_O

TMA_O

PGND

C139
47U/35V

24V

SPMT_3

(12)

(12)

24V

(11)

(11)

(11)

SPMT_2
SPMT_1

(11)

SPMT_0

PGND

C140
0.1U/50V
<1608>

24VSFTMT

CP6
0603SFF150FM/32-2

24VSPFSOL

CP5
0603SFF150FM/32-2

24VDupMT

CP3
0603SFF150FM/32-2

24VSPFMT

CP2
0603SFF150FM/32-2

24VSCMT

CP1
0603SFF150FM/32-2

(3)

(3)

(3)

SPUS

SRVC

TP501

R275

TP503

TP502

PGND

1.2KJ

R404

1.2KJ

R403

NM_1.2KJ

PGND

TP499

TP496
TP497

TP494

TP491
TP492

PGND

TP485

TP482
TP484

TP480

TP477
TP479

R408
10KJ

R407
10KJ

TP506

17
18

3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15

1
8

16

IC33

O4

O3

O2

O1

COM
COM
TD62064AF

GND
GND

I1
NC
NC
I2
NC
I3
NC
NC
I4
NC

1
8

16

D41
D42
D43
1SS355 1SS355 1SS355

Q23
2SD1781K

Q24
2SD1781K

Q25
NM_2SD1781K

TP505

R406
NM_10KJ

TP504

O4

O3

O2

O1

COM
COM
TD62064AF

GND
GND

I1
NC
NC
I2
NC
I3
NC
NC
I4
NC

IC31

/SPUS

/SRVC

MTZ J22B

D9

/SFTMT3

/SFTMT2

/SFTMT1

/SFTMT0

MTZ J22B

D8

/DMT3

/DMT2

/DMT1

/DMT0

(11)

(11)

(11)

24VSPFSOL

/RSV_SOL

Shifter Motor Driver

17
18

3
4
5
6
10
11
12
13
14
15

Duplex Motor Driver

RSPF Solenoid Driver

SFTMT3

SFTMT2
(3)

SFTMT1
(3)

SFTMT0

DMT3

DMT2

DMT1

DMT0

(3)

(3)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

om
(RSV_SOL)

.c

py

co

hr
an

C133
820P

0.68J 1W

R143

C142
10U/35V
0.1U/50V<1608>

C143

TP481

.te

MM_AI0

TP478

VS
SENSE 1
COMP 1
OUT 1B
I01
GND
GND
I11
PHASE 1
VREF 1
RC 1
VSS

PGND

C138
0.1U

5V

L6219DS

OUT 1A
OUT 2A
SENSE 2
COMP 2
OUT 2B
GND
GND
I02
I12
PHASE 2
VREF 2
RC 2

IC32

SPF Motor Driver

PGND

C145
0.1U/50V<1608>

5V

PGND

R309
NM_0J <1608>

0.1U

C141

R159
1.2KJ

PGND

5V

PGND

R148
30KJ

TP488

MM_BI0
MM_BI1
MM_PH_B

C135
820P
TP489

(2)
(2)
(2)

TP483

R146
1.5KJ

PGND

C137
0.1U

R163
100J

R152
510J

10KJX4

BR66

R151
1KJ

5V

C134
820P

R147
1KJ

PGND

0.68J 1W

R144

Scanner Motor Driver

MCU PWB (Driver section 3) (AR-M200/M201)

4
3
2
1

5
6
7
8

24VSFTMT

(12)

(12)

(12)

(12)

24VDupMT

(12)

(12)

(12)

(12)

7/16

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 28

NM

C156

NM

C163

0.1U

C155

NM

C162

0.1U

(11)

C181

1000P

C180

1000P

12VIN

TP510

TP509

0.1U

C165

NM

C158

0.1U

C149

1000P

C182

TP511

R194
10J

0.1U

C166

NM

C159

NM

C150

47U/35V

C190

22U/16V

C204

47U/25V

C194

0.1U

C168

0.1U

C161

NM

C152

PGND

1000P

C183

TP512

R195
10J

0.1U

C167

0.1U

C160

NM

C151

L4
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA

FB4
0J <1608>

R193
10J

0.1U

C164

NM

C157

0.1U

C148

R192
10J

VCC3

C147

24V

1000P

C185

TP514

R197
10J

NM

C170

NM

C154

12V

0.1U

C206

R127
100KJ

5V

R126
100KJ
0.1U/50V<1608>

C196

R125
100KJ
0.1U/50V<1608>

C191

1000P

C184

TP513

R196
10J

0.1U

C169

NM

C153

(11)

INT24V

3.3VIN

R203
0J

IN

IC37

C195

22U/16V

C205

22U/16V

2 KIA7805

GND

OUT

D25
1SS355

R204
0J

L5
ZJSR5101-223TA

FB5
NM_0J <1608>

47U/35V

C192

R206
100J 2W

R202
0J

0.1U

C207

0.1U

C197

0.1U

C193

R205
0J

TP518

TP517

0.1U

DSWS

(3)

(16)
(16)

DVSEL
TCS

R130
100KJ

EN5V

R128
100KJ

VCC3

INT5V

(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)

POD
PMRDY

SCOD
SPID
SRJD
PPD3
PD1
PD2

100J
100J

UDZS3.9B

UDZS3.9B

(12)
(12)
(11)

(12)
(12)
(11)
(11)

CED1
CED2
DRST

PPD1
PPD2
SPPD
PSW

KDS226

D21

KDS226

D15

KDS226

D10

5V

KDS226

D23

VCC3

TP831
TP830

5V

5V

5V

KDS226

D24

KDS226

D22

KDS226

D16

KDS226

D11

5V

KDS226

D30

KDS226

D26

KDS226

D31

KDS226

D27

D28

KDS226

KDS226

D54

KDS226

D37

KDS226

D17

KDS226

D12

.c

py

co

MFD
MMLD
FANLK
PSFANLK

R305
R306

(12)
(11)

(11)
(11)
(11)
(12)
(12)
(12)

hr
an

5V

TP516

KDS226

D20

C179

PGND

R179
1KJ 2W

INT24V

TP515

R187
2.7KJ

R186
20KJ

TP508

1SS355

D19

PGND

D14
1SS355

0.22J 2W

R175

.te

R185
20KJ

w
(12) 24V1(DSWS)

0.1U

C146

VCC3

MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section) (AR-M200/M201)

D63

D62

1000P

C198

1000P

C199

1000P

C200

R209
4.7KJ

1000P

R208
15KJ

C187

R189
1KJ

1000P

C186

R188
1KJ

KDS226

D18

KDS226

D13

1000P

C201

R210
4.7KJ

1000P

C188

R190
15KJ

1000P

C171

R167
15KJ

R211
4.7KJ

1000P

C189

R191
4.7KJ

1000P

C172

R168
15KJ

om

R207
15KJ

VCC3

1000P

C372

R340
4.7KJ

KDS226

D32

KDS226

D29

1000P

C380

1000P

C174

R170
4.7KJ

R377
4.7KJ

VCC3

1000P

C173

R169
15KJ

R198
R199
R200
R201
R367
R372

1000P

C175

R171
4.7KJ

1000P

C202

R212
12KJ

1000P

C177

R173
15KJ

1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ

1000P

C203

R218
R219
R220

R214
R215
R216
R217

R213
3.3KJ

VCC3

1000P

C176

R172
4.7KJ

R183
R184

R176
R177
R178
R180
R181
R182

1KJ
1KJ
1KJ

1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ

DVS1
(TCS)
(MFD)
(MMLD)
(FANLK)
(PSFANLK)

1000P

C178

R174
4.7KJ

VCC3

(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)

(CED1)
(CED2)
(DRST)

(PPD1)
(PPD2)
(SPPD)
(PSW)

1KJ
1KJ

1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ
1KJ

(3)
(3)
(3)

(3)
(3)
(1)
(1)

(POD)
(PMRDY)

(SCOD)
(SPID)
(SRJD)
(PPD3)
(PD1)
(PD2)

8/16

(3)
(3)

(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)
(3)

R239

VCC3

R240
R241
R242
R243
R244

TDO
TCK
TMS
TDI
TRST_L

R137
33J
R138
NM

10KJ

10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
NM_10KJ

(2,4,5,12) /RESET0

(1) /RES_OA982

(5,10) /OP_RST

(2) PODATA[7..0]

/FPOFF

C216
NM

R342

R343

C100
1000P
(12)

PODATA7
PODATA6
PODATA5
PODATA4
PODATA3
PODATA2
PODATA1
PODATA0

10KJ

R238

(10,13) PB_ADDR[7:0]

/ES_PAGE
/ES_CRDY
/ES_SRDY
WAKEUP

(1)
(3)
(1)
(10)

(2)
(2)

(2)

(2)
(10)
(2)
(2)

C254
33P

R247
R248

TRST_L
VCC3
R245
R246

(12)
(12)
(12)
(12)

X4
AT-49(18.3856MHz)
R249
0J

4.7KJ

NM_0J

C252
33P

TRST_L

33JX4

R369
NM

XIN
XOUT

4.7KJ
4.7KJ

NM
NM

8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5

8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5

TP667
TP668

TDO
TCK
TMS
TDI

/FPOFF

33JX4

TDO
TCK
TMS
TDI

1
2
3
4
BR80 1
2
3
4
BR81

/POREQ
/POACK

/H_SYNC

/SC_LINE
INT_USBD
/PR_LINE
/FPOFF

(2) /IMC_READY
(13)
MDM_IRQ
(10) SUSPEND(USB2.0)

(12) OA982_READY

MODEM_IN

(FW)
DT_ACKB
DT_REQB

ES_CMD
ES_STS

BR78 1 33JX4
2
3
4
BR79 1
2
3
4
33JX4

PB_NWE
PB_NOE

PB_NCS3
PB_NAE0

8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5

RY_BY

BR76 1 33JX4
2
3
4
BR77 1
2
3
4
33JX4

PB_NCS1

CLK_EXT

OA_RX
OA_TX

(13)

(1,5)
(10)
(10)

(1)
(1)

PB_ADDR0
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR7

(5,10)
(5,10)

(10)
(5,10)

PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0

(13)

12P

C366

(10,13) PB_DATA[7:0]

RY_BY

(12)
(12)

12P

C362

10KJ

PIDATA7
PIDATA6
PIDATA5
PIDATA4
PIDATA3
PIDATA2
PIDATA1
PIDATA0

/PIACK
/PIREQ

(2)
(2)

12P

C381

R351

PIDATA[7..0]

12P

C382

VCC3

(2)

/PIWR

12P

C383

(2)

12P

C384

TP596
TP598
TP600
TP602
TP604
TP606
TP607
TP609
TP611
TP612
TP613
TP614
TP615
TP616
TP617
TP618

TP669

5
4

172
177

112
113
114
116
117
118

175
176

37
38
39
40
42
43
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
52

24
26
28
29
30
31
32
34

15
16
19
21
22
23

1
2
8
9
11
12
13
14

CLK_EXT

TP666

TP665

TP663
TP664

TP650
TP651
TP652
TP653
TP654
TP655
TP656
TP657
TP658
TP659
TP660
TP661
TP662

TP642
TP643
TP644
TP645
TP646
TP647
TP648

TP638
TP639
TP640

TP631
TP632
TP633
TP634

TP629

199
201
202
203
204
205
207
208

178
180
181
182
183
185
186
187
188
189
190
194
195
196
197
198

TP589
TP591
TP593

TP619
TP620
TP621
TP622
TP623
TP624
TP625
TP626

168
169
170

TP557
TP559
TP560
TP562
TP564
TP566
TP568
TP569
TP571
TP573
TP575
TP576
TP578
TP580
TP582
TP584
TP586

119
120
124
125
126
127
128
129
131
132
133
134
135
137
138
141
142

143
145
146
147
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
159
160
161
162
163
165
166
167

TP519
TP521
TP523
TP525
TP527
TP529
TP531
TP533
TP535
TP537
TP539
TP541
TP543
TP545
TP547
TP549
TP551

CLK_EXT

OA-982

XIN
XOUT

TEST_MODE0
TEST_MODE1

RESET_L
TDO
TCK
TMS
TDI
TRST_L

USB_DM
USB_DP

R250
4.7KJ

PO_LINE_SYNC/ANA_SCLK
PO_PAGE_SYNC/ANA_NCS
PO_REQ/ANA_SD0
PO_ACK/PDATA0/PDS0
PO_DONE/PDATA2/PDS2
PO_WR/PDATA1/PDS1
PO_DATA7/LHEAT/PAS_M
PO_DATA6/LCTRL/CFIRE2
PO_DATA5/AGATE/CFIRE1
PO_DATA4/ACLK/MFIRE2
PO_DATA3/PENABLE/MFIRE1
PO_DATA2/PLOAD
PO_DATA1/PCLK
PO_DATA0/PDATA3/PAS_C

GP_A0
GP_A1
GP_A2/DC_CHY1
GP_A3/DC_CHX1
GP_A4/DC_PWM1
GP_A5/DC_CHY0
GP_A6/DC_CHX0
GP_A7/DC_PWM0

GP_D0/ADC_A0
GP_D1/ADC_A1
GP_D2/ADC_A2
GP_D3/ADC_CLK
GP_D4/ADC_DATA
GP_D5/ADC_NCS

GP_B0/USART0_TX
GP_B1/USART0_RX
GP_B2/USART0_CK
GP_B3/ANA_SD1
GP_B4/DT_ACKB
GP_B5/DT_REQB
GP_B6/DT_ACKA
GP_B7/DT_REQA

GP_C0/PB_ADDR0
GP_C1/PB_ADDR1
GP_C2/PB_ADDR2
GP_C3/PB_ADDR3
GP_C4/PB_ADDR4
GP_C5/PB_ADDR5
GP_C6/PB_ADDR6
GP_C7/PB_ADDR7

SDRAM_DATA0
SDRAM_DATA1
SDRAM_DATA2
SDRAM_DATA3
SDRAM_DATA4
SDRAM_DATA5
SDRAM_DATA6
SDRAM_DATA7
SDRAM_DATA8
SDRAM_DATA9
SDRAM_DATA10
SDRAM_DATA11
SDRAM_DATA12
SDRAM_DATA13
SDRAM_DATA14
SDRAM_DATA15

74
73
72
68
67
66
65
63
62
61
60
58
57
56
55
53

VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE
VSS_CORE

VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO
VSS_IO

VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE
VDD_CORE

VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO
VDD_IO

PLLSS_VSSA

PLLSS_VDDA

PLLCS_VSSA

PLLCS_VDDA

SDRAM_CLK
SDRAM_CKE

SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1

SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12

SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L

SDRAM_CS0_L
SDRAM_CS1A_L
SDRAM_CS1B_L
ROM_CS_L

SDRAM_DQMA0
SDRAM_DQMB0
SDRAM_DQMA1
SDRAM_DQMB1

17
35
69
87
121
139
173
191

10
27
41
54
64
76
86
98
108
123
136
150
164
179
193
206

18
36
70
88
122
140
174
192

3
20
25
33
46
59
71
81
93
103
115
130
144
158
171
184
200

148

149

79
78

84
83

100
99
97
96
95
94
92
91
90
89
85
82
80

111
110
101

104
102
77
75

109
107
106
105

.te

REG_A9/PB_NCS1
REG_A8/PB_NCS2
REG_AD7/PB_DATA7
REG_AD6/PB_DATA6
REG_AD5/PB_DATA5
REG_AD4/PB_DATA4
REG_AD3/PB_DATA3
REG_AD2/PB_DATA2
REG_AD1/PB_DATA1
REG_AD0/PB_DATA0
REG_ADDR_VALID/PB_NCS0
REG_RD_L/PB_NCS3
REG_WR_L/PB_NAE0
REG_CS_L/PB_NAE1
REG_RDY/PB_NWE
INTERRUPT_L/PB_NOE

BASE_CLK/GP_PWM1
CLK_EXT/GP_PWM2
MAIN_CLK/GP_PWM0

PP_HIDRIVE/USART1_RX
PP_DRIVE/USART1_TX
PP_NINIT
PP_NFAULT
PP_NSELECTIN
PP_NAUTOFD
PP_SELECT
PP_PERROR
PP_BUSY
PP_NACK
PP_DATA7
PP_DATA6
PP_DATA5
PP_DATA4
PP_DATA3
PP_DATA2
PP_DATA1/USART1_CK
PP_DATA0
PP_NSTROBE

PI_LINE_SYNC/GP_D6
PI_TR_TGEN
PI_TGEN6
PI_TGEN5
PI_TGEN4
PI_TGEN3
PI_TGEN2
PI_TGEN1
PI_TGEN0
PI_DATA7
PI_DATA6
PI_DATA5
PI_DATA4
PI_DATA3
PI_DATA2
PI_DATA1
PI_DATA0

IC38

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

R227
R228
R229

8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5

33JX4

OA3.3V

OA3.3V

C214
0.01U

C212
0.01U

C240
0.1U

C241
0.1U

C228
0.1U

C219
0.1U

C242
0.1U

C229
0.1U

C220
0.1U

C397
10U/10V<2012>

C215
1U<2012>

C227
0.1U

33J
TP610

OA3.3V

C213
1U<2012>

C218
0.1U

TP608
R234
SDRAM_CKE

33JX4

33JX4

33JX4

C243
0.1U

C230
0.1U

C221
0.1U

C244
0.1U

C231
0.1U

C222
0.1U

C396
10U/10V<2012>

C211
NM

C245
0.1U

C232
0.1U

C246
0.1U

C233
0.1U

C224
0.1U

C226
0.1U

VCC3

10KJX4

10KJX4

10KJX4

10KJX4

C251
NM
C253
47P
_SDRAM_CKE

C303
NM

8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5

_SDRAM_CS0_L

_SDRAM_CS1A_L

BR82 1
2
3
4
BR83 1
2
3
4
BR84 1
2
3
4
BR85 1
2
3
4

VCC3

NM

VCC3

TP728

15

_SDRAM_DQMA1
_SDRAM_DQMA0
ROM_CS_L
RY_BY

IC39

_SDRAM_CLK

SDRAM_BANK[1:0]

C265
NM

_SDRAM_CLK

TP925

GND
GND

VCC

VCCW

IO0
IO1
IO2
IO3
IO4
IO5
IO6
IO7
IO8
IO9
IO10
IO11
IO12
IO13
IO14
IO15/A-1

TP764
TP765
TP766
TP767
TP768
TP769
TP770
TP771
TP772
TP773
TP774
TP775
TP776
TP777
TP778

TP912

_SDRAM_DQMA0
_SDRAM_DQMA1

TP791
_SDRAM_CKE

TP930

_SDRAM_DQMA0
_SDRAM_DQMA1

TP926
_SDRAM_CKE

_SDRAM_CS1A_L
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L

40

15
39

38
37

19
16
17
18

23
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
22
35
36
20
21

40

15
39

38
37

19
16
17
18

23
24
25
26
29
30
31
32
33
34
22
35
36
20
21

46
27

37

13

29
31
33
35
38
40
42
44
30
32
34
36
39
41
43
45

VSS
VSS
VSS

VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ

VDD
VDD
VDD

VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ

DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
DQ14
DQ15

VCC3

VSS
VSS
VSS

VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ
VSSQ

VDD
VDD
VDD

VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ

DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
DQ14
DQ15

HY57V561620FTP-H-C

N.C

LDQM
UDQM

CLK
CKE

CS
WE
CAS
RAS

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
BA0
BA1

IC44

54
41
28

52
46
12
6

27
14
1

49
43
9
3

2
4
5
7
8
10
11
13
42
44
45
47
48
50
51
53

54
41
28

52
46
12
6

27
14
1

49
43
9
3

2
4
5
7
8
10
11
13
42
44
45
47
48
50
51
53

C209
0.1U

10KJ

R346

VCC3

VCC3

_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
_SDRAM_DATA8
_SDRAM_DATA9
_SDRAM_DATA10
_SDRAM_DATA11
_SDRAM_DATA12
_SDRAM_DATA13
_SDRAM_DATA14
_SDRAM_DATA15

VCC3

C300
0.1U

C235
0.1U

TP748
TP749
TP750
TP751
TP752
TP753
TP754
TP755
TP756
TP757
TP758
TP759
TP760
TP761
TP762
TP763

9/16

C256
0.1U

C299
0.1U

C248
0.1U

C236
0.1U

VPP

(4)

C250
0.1U

C238
0.1U

C263
0.1U

C302
0.1U

C264
0.1U

C301
0.1U

VCC3

_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]

C249
0.1U

C237
0.1U

VCC3

_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]

C208
NM

NM

R221

VCC3

SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]

_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]

_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
_SDRAM_DATA8
_SDRAM_DATA9
_SDRAM_DATA10
_SDRAM_DATA11
_SDRAM_DATA12
_SDRAM_DATA13
_SDRAM_DATA14
_SDRAM_DATA15

_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
TP809
TP810
TP901
TP902
TP909
TP910
TP911
SDRAM_ADDR0

HY57V561620FTP-H-C

N.C

LDQM
UDQM

CLK
CKE

CS
WE
CAS
RAS

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
BA0
BA1

IC40

8M/16M Flash ROM

BYTE
WP/ACC
RESET

RY/BY

WE
OE
CE

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20

_SDRAM_CS0_L
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L

SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1

C239
NM

_SDRAM_CLK
TP796

TP788
TP787
TP780
TP779

SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1

TP744
TP745

11
28
26

TP808

47
14
12

25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
48
17
16
9
10

SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12
SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1
SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L

om

SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]

_SDRAM_CLK

SDRAM_BANK[1:0]

SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]

R232

_SDRAM_DQMB0
_SDRAM_DQMB1
_SDRAM_DATA8

SDRAM_BANK[1:0]

SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]

.c

L6
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA

FB6
0J <1608>

OA3.3V

_SDRAM_CLK

(2,4,5,12) /RESET0

_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]

py
C217
10U/10V<2012>

_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
_SDRAM_DATA8
_SDRAM_DATA9
_SDRAM_DATA10
_SDRAM_DATA11
_SDRAM_DATA12
_SDRAM_DATA13
_SDRAM_DATA14
_SDRAM_DATA15

C247
0.1U

C234
0.1U

C225
0.1U

C395
10U/10V<2012>

_SDRAM_CLK
_SDRAM_CKE

SDRAM_BANK[1:0]

SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]

_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]

co

C223
0.1U

R235
R236

SDRAM_BANK0
SDRAM_BANK1

TP730
TP731
TP732
TP733

33J
4.7KJ

SDRAM_WE_L
SDRAM_CAS_L
SDRAM_RAS_L

ROM_CS_L

_SDRAM_CS0_L
_SDRAM_CS1A_L

_SDRAM_DQMA0
_SDRAM_DQMB0
_SDRAM_DQMA1
_SDRAM_DQMB1

_SDRAM_DATA0
_SDRAM_DATA1
_SDRAM_DATA2
_SDRAM_DATA3
_SDRAM_DATA4
_SDRAM_DATA5
_SDRAM_DATA6
_SDRAM_DATA7
_SDRAM_DATA8
_SDRAM_DATA9
_SDRAM_DATA10
_SDRAM_DATA11
_SDRAM_DATA12
_SDRAM_DATA13
_SDRAM_DATA14
_SDRAM_DATA15

SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_ADDR1
SDRAM_ADDR2
SDRAM_ADDR3
SDRAM_ADDR4
SDRAM_ADDR5
SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR7
SDRAM_ADDR8
SDRAM_ADDR9
SDRAM_ADDR10
SDRAM_ADDR11
SDRAM_ADDR12

33J
33J
33J

33J

33J
33J

8 33JX4
7
6
5

8 100JX4
7
6
5
8 100JX4
7
6
5
8 100JX4
7
6
5
8 100JX4
7
6
5

hr
an

TP577
BR72
TP579
TP581
TP583
TP585
BR73
TP587
TP588
TP590
TP592
BR74
TP594
TP595
TP597
TP599
BR75
TP601
TP603
TP605

TP570
TP572
TP574

1 BR71
2
3
4

1 BR67
2
3
4
1 BR68
2
3
4
1 BR69
2
3
4
1 BR70
2
3
4

R222
R390

R225

TP561
TP563

TP552
TP554
TP556
TP558

SDRAM_DQMA0
SDRAM_DQMB0
SDRAM_DQMA1
SDRAM_DQMB1
SDRAM_CS0_L
SDRAM_CS1A_L
TP565
TP567

TP520
TP522
TP524
TP526
TP528
TP530
TP532
TP534
TP536
TP538
TP540
TP542
TP544
TP546
TP548
TP550

SDRAM_DATA0
SDRAM_DATA1
SDRAM_DATA2
SDRAM_DATA3
SDRAM_DATA4
SDRAM_DATA5
SDRAM_DATA6
SDRAM_DATA7
SDRAM_DATA8
SDRAM_DATA9
SDRAM_DATA10
SDRAM_DATA11
SDRAM_DATA12
SDRAM_DATA13
SDRAM_DATA14
SDRAM_DATA15

10KJ

MCU PWB (IMC2 section 1/2) (AR-M200/M201)

12P

C385

NM
R230
NM
R233

R231
22000P
C210

12P

C386

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 29

(9)

PB_NAE0

DT_ACKB

(5,9)

L7

C410
0.1U

BLM21PG600SN1

TP880

5
4
3
2
1

VCC3

IC183

TC7SH126FU

USB2.0 DEV1

SHIELD
GND
+D
-D
+5V

CN1
UBR23-4K2200

FG

100KJ

R399

(9)

C274
0.01U

TP908

VCC3

C409
0.1U

C408
0.1U

FG

VCC3

4
1

2
3

TC7SH04FU

IC43

TC7SH08FU

IC42

(5,9) /OP_RST
(1) /RES_USB20

(9)
WAKEUP
(9) SUSPEND(USB2.0)

TP702

R260
10KJ

TP708

TP703

R139
33J
R310
NM

R257
10KJ

NM

R273

(9,13) PB_DATA[7:0]

C101
1000P

TP706
TP705

VCC3

PB_NOE
PB_NWE

PB_DATA0
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA7

0J

R274

TP707

R261
10KJ

(9)

TP704

C268
0.1U

C259
0.01U

INT_USBD

10KJ
NM

DT_REQB
DT_ACKB

1.5KJ

R262

R258
R259

(9)
(9)

VCC3

C267
0.1U

C258
0.01U

(5,9)
(5,9)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

AGND
RPU
DP
DM
AGND
RREF
RESET_N
EOT
DREQ
DACK
DIOR
DIOW
DGND
INTRQ
READY/IORDY
INT

IC41

PB_NOE
PB_NWE

TP871

PB_NOE
PB_NWE

TP870

C272
15P

GND
C273
18P

TP783

AT-49(12MHz)

X6

VCC3
R253
1.2KJ

TP677

py
TP683
TP685

R255
10KJ

VCC3

C269
0.1U

ISP33

C260
0.01U

ISP33

co

C266
0.1U

C257
0.01U

hr
an

R254
NM

.te

0J <1608>

VCC3

2
3

5
1

VCC3

12KF

R272

TP709

GND

L11

DLW21SN900SQ2

BLM21PG600SN1

L9

L8

R111
1MF

C271
0.1U

PB_NCS3

R267
NM_<1608>

C404
1U<2012>

TP907

GND

C270
0.1U

VCC3

MCU PWB (IMC2 USB2.0 section 2/2) (AR-M200/M201)

10KJ
R251

0.1U
10KJ
R401

10KJ
R252

0.1U
C403

64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
ISP1583BS

.c

TP682

TP681

TP675
TP701

om

TP782

48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33

C406
10U/10V<2012>

TP695
TP694
TP693
TP692
TP691
TP690
TP689
TP688
TP687
TP686
TP684

PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR0
PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0
R256

TP700
TP699
TP698
TP697
TP696

10KJ

VCC3

PB_ADDR7
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR3

C262
0.1U

TP670
0J <1608>
L13

C261
10U/10V<2012>

ISP33

DATA10
DATA9
DATA8
DATA7
DATA6
DATA5
DATA4
VCC(I/O)
DATA3
DATA2
DATA1
DATA0
ALE/A0
DGND
MODE1
N.C.

SUSPEND
WAKEUP
BUS_CONF/DA0
VCC(3V3)
MODE0/DA1
DGND
XTAL1
XTAL2
VCC1V8
VBUS
VCC(I/O)
DATA15
DATA14
DATA13
DATA12
DATA11

DA2
CS_N
RW_N/RD_N
DS_N/WR_N
CS0_N
CS1_N
AD0
AD1
AD2
VCC(I/O)
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
VCC1V8
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

C405
10KJ
R400

DGND
DIE

0.1U

C370

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 30

(9,13)

PB_DATA[7:0] (9,13)

PB_ADDR[7:0]

10/16

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 31

To LD

(6)
(5)
(6)

/LDEN
/VIDEO
SHOLD

/SYNC

SPPD

(8)

(5)

SPMT_0
SPMT_2
SPMT_1
SPMT_3
SPID

(8)
(5)
(6)

(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(8)

EN5V
5V
12VIN
FW
/PR

5V

C275

0.1U/50V<1608>

EN5V
5V

1KJ

5V

KDS226

D65

24VSPFMT

INT5V

(6)
(8)
(6)

/PMD
PMRDY
PMCLK_A

B08B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

CN42

To LSU

PGND

24V

SPPD
SPID
SPMT_3
SPMT_1
SPMT_2
SPMT_0

(8)
(8)
(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)

5V

5V

NM_<1608>

24VSPFSOL

R347

PGND

(8)

(7)

(7)

(7)

/SRVC

/RSV_SOL

/SPUS

(8)

SCOD

SRJD

To Polygon motor
B05B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V)

1
2
3
4
5

CN41

B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24

To RSPF unit

(6)

200J1/4W<3216>

(3)

KEYIN

R277

C277
1000P

1KJ

R276
10KJ

5V

1
3

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

(5)

R294

LCDRS#

LCDE#

LCDDB4#

LCDDB5#

R290

R291

R292

C356

(LCDDB5)

(3)

SELIN3

100P

100P

C317

100J

100P

C347

100P

C349

100J

(LCDDB4)

(LCDRS)

(LCDE)

100P

C359

100J

100P

R328

100P

100J
C360

100J

100J

C357

100J

0J

SELIN2

R329

R330

100P

(3)

SELIN1

100P

(LCDDB6)

(3)

R365
100J

5V

C361

om

R293

0J

0J

(LCDDB7)

R398

R385

PSW
(OP_DATA)
(OP_CLK)
(OP_LATCH)

(5)

(LCDRS)
(LCDE)
(LCDDB4)
(LCDDB5)
(LCDDB6)
(LCDDB7)
DRST

(KEYSC3)
(KEYSC2)
(KEYSC1)
BZR

(8)
(5)
(5)

(8)

(5)
(5)
(5)
(1)

(SELIN1)
(SELIN2)
(SELIN3)

EN5V

To Operational PWB

C358

100J

NM
NM

R352
R331

R295

0J

0J

R350

R353

.c

LCDDB6#

LCDDB7#

INFOLED
BL

(3)
(3)

(5)

PSL

(3)

(6) (LCDCONT)

KDS226

D33

py

co

hr
an

1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23

.te

PGND

HLOUT

/POFF
24V

(6)

3.3VIN

CN30

PGND

(White)

24V

(6)
(6)
(8)

/TC
/MC

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
B12B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)

5V

w
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24

B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)

1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23

CN2

INT24V

CN29

NM_<1608>

C276

24VSPFMT

To SPF unit

R282

R278

/BIAS
/GRIDL

R140

(6)
(6)

200J1/4W<3216>

INT5V

200J1/4W<3216>

200J1/4W<3216>

NM
C363

NM
C365

To Power unit

R349

NM
C364

CP10

MCU PWB (Connector section 1) (AR-M200/M201)

R141

VCC3

1000P
C278

0603SFF150FM/32-2
CP8
1000P
C279

0603SFF150FM/32-2

0603SFF150FM/32-2
CP9
1000P
C280

(SELIN3)

(SELIN2)

(SELIN1)

FF4-32-S15D5

32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CN3

11/16

(6)
(8)
(6)

(6)
(8)
(6)

TMA_O
TMB_O

/SFTMT0
/SFTMT1
/SFTMT2
/SFTMT3

(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)

OUT_A+
OUT_B+
OUT_AOUT_B-

(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)

1000P

To Duplex motor

(White)

To Mirror motor

24VSFTMT

To Toner motor

To Shifter motor

(White)

B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)

1
2
3
4
5

CN27

(White)

B2P-VH(LF)(SN)

1
2

CN25

(Red)

To VF Fan motor

B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)

1
2
3
4

CN16

(White)

B4B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)

1
2
3
4

To Main motor

B5B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)

B05B-XASK-1(LF)(SN)

1
2
3
4
5

CN20

PGND

PGND

CN22

24VDupMT

C286

1000P

1000P

1000P

C285

C282

C281

(7)
(7)

/DMT0
/DMT1
/DMT2
/DMT3

(7)
(7)
(7)
(7)

VFMOUT
FANLK
/VFMCNT

/MMD
MMLD
/MMCLK

1
2
3
4
5

CN12

(8)

(8)

(8)

(8)

(6)

(6)

24V

PD1

POD

PPD1

CED1

/RRS

5V

5V

0.1U/50V<1608>

To Resist roller
solenoid

To Cassette detect

(Black)

B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)

1
2
3

CN21

(Blue)

B3B-PH-K-E(LF)(SN)

1
2
3

To Paper pass detect

To Paper out detect

To Paper detect
(Green)

B3B-PH-K-M(LF)(SN)

1
2
3

CN28

(White)

B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)

1
2
3

CN26

R286
200J1/4W<3216>

(Red)

B3B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)

1
2
3

CN24

(Red)

(6)

(8)
(8)

(8)

MFD

(8)

(6)

PD2
CED2

PPD3

/CPFS2

/MPFS

(6)

RTH_IN

(6)

5V

24V

CN19

(Red)

2
4
6
8
10
12
14

24V

CN23

(White)

(Red)

PGND

.c
NM_B3B-PH-K-R

3
2
1

5V

LT1P67A

D38

TP712

(2) GASIC_READY

om
VCC3

To Mecha. COUNTER

B14B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)

1
3
5
7
9
11
13

To Multi unit

To HL unit

B5B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)

1
2
3
4
5

CN14

py
/MCNT

PGND

24V

(White)

B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)

1
2
3
4
5

CN11

To 2nd. cassette

R284
200J1/4W<3216>

PPD2

(8)

co

hr
an

(White)

CN18

To Interlock switch

B2P-VH-R(LF)(SN)

1
2

CN10

To Cassette paper
solenoid

PGND

B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)

1
2
3

CN15

R285
200J1/4W<3216>

24V

.te

/CPFS1

24V1(DSWS)

w
(8)
0.1U/50V<1608>
C283

CP21

1000P

0J <1608>

1000P

C287

1000P

C288

C284

R283
200J1/4W<3216>
1/4W

NM
C373

5V

NM_<1608>

24V

C374

INT24V

390J

MCU PWB (Connector section 2) (AR-M200/M201)

R287

C289

PSFMOUT
PSFANLK

VCC3

LED for Checker

(6)
(8)

Q9
NM_LT1P67A
NM_KRC106S
3

(White)

1
3
5
7
9

CN17

TP713

TP710

1000P

C368

2
4
6
8
10

VCC3

D40

Q10
NM_LT1P67A
NM_KRC106S
3

PGND

(White)

NM_B03B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)

3
2
1

CN35

TCK
/RESET0 B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
OA_TX
OA_RX

VCC3

TCK
/RESET0
OA_TX
OA_RX

B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)

1
2
3
4

CN13

To PS Fan motor

(9) OA982_READY

D39

VCC3

(For debug)

12/16

OA982 JTAG & Serial

RxD
TxD

(9)
TRST_L
(9)
TMS
(9)
TDO
(9)
TDI
(9)
TCK
(2,4,5,9) /RESET0
(9)
OA_TX
(9)
OA_RX

(1)
(1)

CPU Serial

Not mounted

NM

R288

TP714

TP711

NM

R289

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 32

(1)

/CS5

TP725

100J

R391

NM

C378

(3)

(5)

MSU_ST1

(9)

1KJ
VCC3

R317

KDS226

D47

VCC3
D46

D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
MSU_ST1

D[15..0]

BR92

33JX4

C327
10KJ

C322
10KJ

C333
10KJ

C326
10KJ

33JX4

33JX4
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1

BR90

BR89
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8

BR88

D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

33JX4

C321
10KJ

C332
10KJ

C330
10KJ

C320
10KJ

R315
10KJ

VCC3

(1,2,3,4)

KDS226

(9)
MODEM_IN
(5) (/RD)

(MDM_IRQ)

(9)
PB_NCS1
(5) (PB_NAE0)
(5) (PB_NWE)
(5) (PB_NOE)

PB_ADDR7
PB_ADDR6
PB_ADDR5
PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR2
PB_ADDR1
PB_ADDR0

MCU_D7
MCU_D6
MCU_D5
MCU_D4
MCU_D3
MCU_D2
MCU_D1
MCU_D0
MODEM_IN
(/RD)
MCU_nCS
MCU_INT

PB_NCS1
(PB_NAE0)
(PB_NWE)
(PB_NOE)
(/FAX_RST)
#MDM_IRQ

#PB_ADDR7
#PB_ADDR6
#PB_ADDR5
#PB_ADDR4
#PB_ADDR3
#PB_ADDR2
#PB_ADDR1
#PB_ADDR0

#PB_DATA7
#PB_DATA6
#PB_DATA5
#PB_DATA4
#PB_DATA3
#PB_DATA2
#PB_DATA1
#PB_DATA0

CP11

24V

TP903

VCC3

PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0
(MDM_IRQ)

L16

0J <1608>

40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
B40B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)

39
37
35
33
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1

CN5

#MDM_IRQ
(PB_NOE)
(PB_NAE0)
#PB_ADDR0
#PB_ADDR2
#PB_ADDR4
#PB_ADDR6
#PB_DATA0
#PB_DATA2
#PB_DATA4
#PB_DATA6
MCU_INT
(/RD)
MCU_D1
MCU_D3
MCU_D5
MCU_D7

To Modem PWB

om

(/FAX_RST)
(PB_NWE)
PB_NCS1
#PB_ADDR1
#PB_ADDR3
#PB_ADDR5
#PB_ADDR7
#PB_DATA1
#PB_DATA3
#PB_DATA5
#PB_DATA7
MCU_nCS
MCU_D0
MCU_D2
MCU_D4
MCU_D6
MODEM_IN

.c

py

co

hr
an

R311
1KJ

.te

MDM_IRQ

R313
100J
R325
NM

/FAX_RST

(1) /RES_FAX

(9,10) PB_ADDR[7:0]

C102
0.1U

33JX4
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1

0603SFF150FM/32-2
C323
NM

BR91
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8

CP13
C331
NM

PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5
PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3
PB_DATA2
PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0
BR93
33JX4
5
4
6
3
7
2
8
1
5
4
6
3
7
2
8
1

C334
NM

0603SFF150FM/32-2
C324
NM

C335
NM

C325
NM

(9,10) PB_DATA[7:0]

C328
NM

MCU PWB (Modem I/F Connector) (AR-M200/M201)

C336
NM

C329
NM

PGND

L14

0J <1608>

0603SFF150FM/32-2
TP904

EN5V

CP12

C337
NM

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 33

13/16

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 34

(2)

CL

33P

R323
15KJ

C341

R324
56KJ

C338
47U/35V

24V

R318
910J

Q5 2SJ537

PGND

Q6
KTC3198

CP18
0603SFF150FM/32-2

D49
11EQS06

TWKA-221K

L12
220UH

47U/35V

+ C339

(5)

mt_at_home

R320
1KJ

1000P

C342

R322
12KJ

VCC3

KDS226

D48

.c

py

co

hr
an

VCL

.te

R319
15KJ
0.1U/50V<1608>

C340

Copy Lamp Inverter

R321

MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section) (AR-M200/M201)

5.6KJ1/4W<3216>

AFE_SCK#
ADCLK#
CCD_PHI1#
CCD_PHI2#
CCD_CP#
CCD_RS#
CCD_TG#

(2) AFE_DB[7..0]

(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)
(5)

VCL

AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#6

PGND

CP14

12V

31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1

BR87 33JX4

47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P

(5)

AFE_DB#0
AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB#3
AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#6
AFE_DB#7

VCL

VSAMP#

(5)
(5)
(5)

AFE_SDI#
BSAMP#

AFE_SEN#

AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB#7

AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB#3

L17
1J <1608>

C109C318C132C314C313C319C315C316

AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7

PGND

14/16

CP15
0603SFF150FM/32-2

TP886

EN5V

BR86 33JX4
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5

FF4-32-S15D5

32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2

CN4

To Scanner unit

AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7

0603SFF150FM/32-2

om

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 35

/NIC_RST

(2)

PARAD[7..0]

0.1U
C106

(5)
(1) /RES_NIC

R326
1KJ
R327
NM
PARAD0
PARAD1
PARAD2
PARAD3
PARAD4
PARAD5
PARAD6
PARAD7

TP672
TP673
TP674
TP676
TP678
TP679
TP680
TP717
/ACK_O
BUSY_O
PE_O
SLCT_O
/FAULT_O
/STB_I
/AUTOFD_I
/SLCTIN_I
/INIT_I
/REV_O

NM

24FMN-BTK-A

24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

CN39

om

8
7
6
5
8 BR94 33JX4
7
6
5
BR95 33JX4

L19
0J <1608>

TP906

EN5V

.c

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
/ACK_O
BUSY_O
PE_O
SLCT_O
/FAULT_O
/STB_I
/AUTOFD_I
/SLCTIN_I
/INIT_I
/REV_O
R402

L18
0J <1608>

TP905

VCC3
0603SFF150FM/32-2

py

(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)

co

hr
an
12P

C388

12P

C387

.te
12P

C389

w
12P

C391

12P

C390

12P

C392

MCU PWB (NIC I/F section) (AR-M200/M201)

12P

C393

CP19

CP20

12P

C394

0603SFF150FM/32-2

C346
0.1U

C345
0.1U

VCC3

To NIC PWB

0.1U

C343

0.1U

C344

EN5V

15/16

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 36

(1)

CRUMSCL

/ASIC_RST

(1) CRUMSDA

(5)

R337

3.3V

0J

3.3V

TP883

GND

Vcc

2
3

5
1
4

TC7SET08F

IC51

FB8

EN5V

TC7SBD385AFU

OE

IC49

FB9

0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>

TP887

F-GND 2

(CRUMSCL)

(CRUMSDA)

5V

F-GND 1

5V

C348
0.1U

TP884

R335
10KJ

EN5V

0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>

0.1U

C350

R341
10KJ

TP715

R334
NM

VCC3

CRUM Control

.te

MCU PWB (CRUM I/F section) (AR-M200/M201)

TCS
DVSEL

TP721

R348

FB10

24V

NM

2
4
6
8
10

R279
10J

(White)

0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>

FB12

0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>

FB11

0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>

PGND

EN5V

KDS226

D34

3
2

KDS226

D35

F-GND 3

F-GND 5

F-GND 4

300J

300J

.c

R281

R280

FB14

0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>

FB15

0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>

om

(CRUMSDA)
(CRUMSCL)

To DV Unit with CRUM


(To Analog Tonner Sensor)

py

(Red)

To DV Unit
(To Analog Tonner Sensor)

NM_B4B-PH-K-R

1
2
3
4

CN6

B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)

1
3
5
7
9

CN7

24V

co

hr
an

TCS_AN

(6)
(8)
(8)

F-GND 7

F-GND 6

16/16

CN304

18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

D-GND
DRST
5V
KIN2
PSW
ONL
PSL
D-GND
5VEN
OP-DATA
OP-LATCH
SELIN2
OP-CLK
SELIN1
OP-STB
SELIN3
KIN1
D-GND

18FMN-BMTTR-A-TB or IMSA-9619S-18C-TB

D-GND

DRST

S3B-PH-K-S

1
2
3

CN303

+5V

D-GND
DRST
5V
PSW
KIN2
KIN1
OP-STB
OP-CLK
OP-LATCH
OP-DATA
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
D-GND
5VEN
PSL
ONL
D-GND

TP1

22000PF

TP49
TP50

N.M.

C354

PSW

150J

R409

SW16

R410

R365
150J

SKQNABD010

5VEN
PSL
ONL

150J

g1

g2

R411
1.5KJ

d1

IC304

D316
1SS133

D319
D312
D320
1SS133 1SS133 1SS133

D318
D315 1SS133 D314
1SS133
1SS133

c1

c2

D311
1SS133

R413

R416

R368
150J

b2

b3

R369
150J

a2

a3

R370
150J

LED75

AE

TP6

TP7

b1

TP8

TP9

a1

TP10

+5V

R419

R417
1KJ
R415

510J
R414

1KJ

R339

1KJ

1KJ

510J

22000PF

TP40 C348

1KJ

TP41

1KJ

1KJ

SPFL

SJAL

TP12

LED89

TP11

JPL

LED68

BPL

TP13

R371
150J

LED90

CS1L
LED102

0.1uF

N.M. C349

N.M.

+5V

0.1uF

C350

+5V

1ENR
LED93

DPL
LED74

EXL
LED77

TP16

R420
150J

GND

VCC

IC306

A
B
C
G

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

74HC151

GND

A
B
C
G

74HC151
TP53 IC305
6 W
D0
D1
5 Y
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
16 VCC
D7

16

TPL
LED94

3RE

TP17

R379
150J

TP18

LED95

LED73

ME
LED91

ZPL
LED70

DU21
LED76

RPL

LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A

EXD
LED78

EXN
LED79

11
10
9
7

4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12

11
10
9
7

TP66
TP67
TP68
TP69
TP70
TP71

4 TP58 R390
TP59R389
3
TP60R388
2
TP61R387
1
15 TP62R386
14 TP63R402
13 TP64R385
12 TP65R384

2RE

TP19

R422
150J

LED96

100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J

1RE

TP21
TP23 TP24

TP20

R373
150J

LED97

CS2L
LED80

TP34 TP33 TP32

R383
R382
R381
R407
R380
R404

100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J

NOR
LED98

DAA1
LED81

R375
150J

TP29 TP28

+5V

TP31 TP30

R430

DAA2
LED99

TP25 TP26 TP27

TP22

R374
150J

py

co

TP35

TP15

R372
150J

TP51 6

TP38 TP37 TP36

C352
N.M.

LED71

PE

LTL-1LHG-002A

SCNL
LED92

.c
100J

+5V

R377
150J

SW18
SKQNABD010
SW24
SKQNABD010
SW23
SKQNABD010
SW22
SKQNABD010
SW19
SKQNABD010
SW30
SKQNABD010
SW25
SKQNABD010
SW20
SKQNABD010

EXMODK

ZUPK

ZDWK

CRSK

BPK

10UPK

MAGK

+5V

1UPK

CLK

OLK

CVOP

SW28
SKQNABD010

SW27
SKQNABD010

SW26
SKQNABD010

SW21
SKQNABD010

SW17
SKQNABD010
EXDWK

SCNK

SW29
SKQNABD010

1
2
3

CN305

+5V

LED72

PML

LED61

ONLL

LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A

NM_ S3B-PH-K-R (RED)

470J

R363

EXUPK

470J

R364

DUPK

PSL
ONL

5VEN

om

IC304

R376
150J

LED101

2ENR

LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHEE-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHEE-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A

LED67

C351 C353

TP55
TP56
TP57

TP52
TP54

TP39

LED69

MPL

LTL-1LHEE-002A
LTL-1LHEE-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A

LED60

DU22

LTL-1LHG-002A
LTL-1LHG-002A
NM_LTL-1LHEE-002A

hr
an

D313
1SS133

R421

R418

+5V

200PF 200PF 200PF

C328

C344 C345

200PF

D317
1SS133

c3

TP5

R367
150J

LC7935AN

R412
1.5KJ

R378
150J

TP42
TP43
TP44
TP45

R423
1.5KJ

+5V

e1

d2

d3

.te
e2

e3

C346

150J

f1

f2

R366
150J

R408

R429
1kJ

Q306
2SB1197K
3

TP46
TP47
TP48

C343

47uF/16V

TP3

R428
10kJ

R427
1kJ

Q304
2SB1197K
3

C342

TP2

R426
10kJ

R425
1kJ

f3

/Q28
/Q29
15

g3

/Q21

/Q30

16

R424
10kJ

/Q24

LEDM

/Q22

VCC

63

c3

/Q26

/STROBE

51

+5V

d3

/Q27

BEO

49

LEDM

/Q25

/LATCH

50

Q305
2SB1197K
3

c2

11

d2

10

c1

/Q23

S IN

30

d1

42

/Q11

CLOCK

64

w
TP14

40

/Q9

S OUT

19

13

b3

41

/Q7

GND1

g3

38

/Q10

GND2

14

e3

33
/Q3

GND3

35

e2

34
/Q4

GND4

e1

36
/Q5

GND5

44

b2
f3

37
/Q6

g2

43
/Q12
18

R394
4.7KJ

C329
1000p

b1
f2

R399
4.7KJ

C336
1000p

62

39
17

R406
4.7KJ

C332
1000p

g1

R398
4.7KJ

C338
1000p

f1

R397
4.7KJ

C330
1000p

C339
1000p

/Q32

/Q8
/Q31

31
/Q1
/Q20

32
/Q2

45
/Q13
/Q18
2

/Q19

R403
4.7KJ

46
R395
4.7KJ

C331
1000p

a3

C333
1000p

a2

C347
1000p

a1

C334
1000p

OPE PWB (7SEG) (AR-203E/5420)

C337
1000p

12

C335
1000p

R396
4.7KJ
C340
1000p

/Q14
/Q17
1

47
/Q15
/Q16
48
R401
4.7KJ
R393
4.7KJ
R392
4.7KJ
R391
4.7KJ
R400
4.7KJ
R405
4.7KJ

C341
1000p

R431
4.7KJ

C355

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 37


NM_1000p

1/1

C. OPE PWB (AR-203E/5420)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 38

OP-LATCH

OP-DATA
OP-CLK

Open

C308

KRC106S

Q302

TP12

3.3V

R324
0J

R323
10KJ

Q303
KRA225S

3.3V

R304
100J
R302

0.1u

TP1

R326
0J

Q305
KRA225S

C322

R325
0J

Q304
KRA225S

R303
TP11

TP13

5V

TP14
100J

100J

TP2

TP3

CS2L

C306

C307

1000p 1000p open

C305

SPFL

LED314

LTL-1LHEE-002A

HPL

LED304

LTL-1LHG-002A

SCAN

LED306

LTL-1LHG-002A

LTL-1LHG-002A

FAX

LED305

LTL-1LHG-002A

R305
0J

R306
OPEN

R327
820J
open

C323

TB62725AF

IC304

TP4

LTL-1LHG-002A

LTL-1LHG-002A

RPL

LED310

LTL-1LHG-002A

BPL

LED309

OPEN

SJAL

LED303

DATA1

LED_V3

LED_V2

LED_V1

LCDDB[7..4]

LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7

LCDDB7#
LCDDB6#
LCDDB5#
LCDDB4#
LCDE#
LCDRS#

.c

py

co

hr
an

PRINT

LED308

.te
LTL-1LHG-002A

LTL-1LHG-002A

LED307

CS1L

LED302

COPY

LED301

R333

Q307

100J

R328
10kJ

R332
R331
R330
R329

R334

R335

KRC106S

om
PSL

LCDE

LCDRS

LCDCONT

C332
100p
C327
100p
C328
100p
C329
100p
C330
100p
C331
100p

OPERATION PWB (LED/LCD section) (AR-M200/M201)

LCDE#
LCDDB4#
LCDDB5#
LCDDB6#
LCDDB7#

TP15

LCDRS#

100J
100J
100J
100J

100J

0J

R301

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

GPM181C0

GND
V5
VDD
RS
R/W
E
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7

IC301

LTL-1LHG-002A

PSL

LED311

5VEN

1/3

To LCD

ZENER_3.3V

D304

R344
100J

470J

5VEN

0.1u
C338

5
16

/OUT0
2
TP5

VCC

/OUT1
TP6

S-IN

/OUT2
3

CLOCK

4
TP7

/OUT3
13
TP8

/LATCH

10

/OUT4
/ENABLE

11

/OUT5

14
TP9

S-OUT
15
TP10

/OUT6

R-EXT

12

/OUT7

GND
1

0.1u
C333

D. OPERATION PWB (AR-M200/M201)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 39

SELIN3
SELIN2
SELIN1

5V

KEYSC1
KEYSC2
KEYSC3

Open

Open

C310

C311

Open

C309

47pF

C315

Open

Open

Open

KEYIN

C320

C319

BZR

C318

2kJ

R346

2kJ

R347

0.1u

PSW

5V

0.1u

C312

C321

1kJ
1kJ
1kJ

33J

1kJ
1kJ
1kJ

KRC106S

R317
R316
R315

R318

R338
R337
R336

Q306

TP25

5V

16

16

6
4
5

Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7

Open

C304

74HC151

GND

VCC

IC302

A
B
C
G

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

SKQNABD010

PSW

TP34
TP35
TP36

TP26
TP27
TP28
TP29
TP30
TP31
TP32
TP33

TP20
TP21
TP22
TP23

TP19

KEY310

11
10
9
7

4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12

15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7

D303

1SS133

D302

1SS133

D301

LK

KEY325

SKQNABD010

ESRT

KEY321

100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J
100J

1SS133

Open

C337

F-KEYSC1
F-KEYSC2
F-KEYSC3

2kJ

R342

SKQNABD010

MENU

KEY324

SKQNABD010

Open

C335

2kJ

R341

F-KEYIN1

SKQNABD010

NM5K

KEY319

SKQNABD010

NM8K

KEY323

SKQNABD010

NM2K

KEY320

Open

C334

2kJ

R340

F-KEYIN2

SKQNABD010

NM3K

KEY317

SKQNABD010

CLK

KEY318

SKQNABD010

NM6K

KEY322

RAT

KEY316

2kJ

R319

NM9K

KEY306

C316

Open

2kJ

Open

2kJ

R321

F-KEYIN5

SKQNABD010

EXP

KEY305

SKQNABD010

ENT

KEY313

SKQNABD010

RK

KEY314

om
R320

F-KEYIN4

SKQNABD010

CAK

KEY307

SKQNABD010

SHPK

KEY315

SKQNABD010

C314

.c
Open

C313

F-KEYIN3

SKQNABD010

ASTK

KEY308

SKQNABD010

NM0K

KEY309

SKQNABD010

py

co

hr
an

R314
R313
R312
R311
R307
R308
R309
R310

.te

10kJ

74HC238

GND

G1
G2A
G2B

A
B
C

VCC

IC303

R339

TP16 1
TP17 2
TP18 3

TP24

w
BZ301

PS1720P02

5VEN

OPERATION PWB (KEY / Buzzer section) (AR-M200/M201)

2kJ

R348

Open

C317

2kJ

R322

F-KEYIN6

SKQNABD010

NM7K

KEY304

SKQNABD010

NM4K

KEY311

SKQNABD010

NM1K

KEY312

Open

C336

2kJ

R343

F-KEYIN7

SKQNABD010

2SIDE

KEY303

SKQNABD010

BPK

KEY302

SKQNABD010

MODK

KEY301

2/3

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 40

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

32FMN-BMTTR-A-TB

CN302

TP57

TP55
TP56

TP54

TP39
TP40
TP41
TP42
TP43
TP44
TP45
TP46
TP47
TP48
TP49
TP50
TP51
TP52
TP53

TP38

TP37

0.1u

OP-LATCH

PSL
PSW
OP-DATA
OP-CLK

5V

LCDDB[7..4]

0.1u

C325

C301
0.1u

C326

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

BM15B-GHS-TBT

F-KEYSC3
F-KEYSC2
F-KEYSC1
F-KEYIN7
F-KEYIN6
F-KEYIN5
F-KEYIN4
F-KEYIN2
F-KEYIN3
F-KEYIN1
LED_V3
LED_V2
LED_V1
DATA1

.c

py

co

CN301

To FAX Key PWB

hr
an

47uF/16v

5VEN

.te

47uF/16v

C302

SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
KEYIN
KEYSC3
KEYSC2
KEYSC1
BZR
LCDCONT
LCDRS
LCDE

C324

C303

47uF/16v

LCDDB4
LCDDB5
LCDDB6
LCDDB7
DRST

3.3V

To MCU PWB

OPERATION PWB (Connector section) (AR-M200/M201)

Open

R352

om

S3B-PH-K-S

1
2
3

CN303
DRST

To Drum Initial Detector

3/3

[14] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD


PROCEDURES

2)

Select "Option" "Serial Number Setting" on the menu bar.

3)

Set the serial number according to the following.

[Preparation]
Write the download data (extension .dwl) into the main unit.
A USB port is required for the PC.
Create "MaintenanceTool" flooder in the PC, and copy the following
files to the folder.

Necessary for program download


Maintenance.exe ( Tool program)
ProcModelQ.fmt
ProcModelQ.mdl

om

Driver
Drivers/Vista/Mainte.inf (For Windows Vista)
Drivers/2kXP/Mainte.inf (For Windows XP/2000)
Drivers/Win9xME/Mainte.inf (For Windows Me/98SE)
Drivers/Win9xME/UsbScan.sys (For Windows Me/98SE)

.c

Download file
Download file (extension .dwl)

py

Note: Copy the download data file (extension .dwl) to the folder in
which the maintenance program is included.
When making a folder for the maintenance tool in the PC,
do not put a long folder name in the absolute path.
[Example]
Proper case:

c:\MaintenanceTool

Product Code (P): Enter number (0 99)


Enter the product code of "3."

hr
an

1. Initial setting
(Serial number setting procedures)

co

Erroneous case: c:\Mainte nance Tool Download

The serial number is set to the PC which is used for downloading.


Setting is required once only, and there is no need to set again
when rebooting the program.

ID Code(I): Enter number (0 99)


Assign an individual code to each PC uses
"Maintenance.exe."

After completion setting, press [OK]/[ENTER] key.

1)

PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/


5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.

4)

(Only to set the serial number, the PC should not be connected to the machine.)

2. Download procedures

.te

Note: This setting is required only when downloading the default


data of E2PROM, and is not required when downloading
firmware only.

1)

The serial number has been assigned.

Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).
Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press
and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (
) (or
[ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together,
and turn on the power simultaneously.)

AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series

2)

Connect machine and the PC with a USB cable. (Connect it to


the USB port on the main unit without fail.

3)

PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/


5420/M200/M201 series" in the Select Model menu.

AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 1

PC side: When the integration maintenance program is


boosted and "The copier is not turned on." is displayed at the
bottom of display, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu
bar.

PC side: Check that trees are displayed in the "Special (MCU/


IMC2/Facsimile)" folder in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB connector is connected, and select "Reconnect" in procedure 5)
again.)

9)

PC side: When a download file is specified, downloading is


performed automatically.

hr
an

co

6)

PC side: Specify the download file (*****.dwl) to be used.

om

5)

8)

.c

PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed on the integration maintenance program.

py

4)

PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the


main tree to develop its sub trees, and double-click "Download
DWL Data Area" in the sub trees.

7)

.te

10) PC side: When download is completed, the following message is displayed.

Note: Since, however, the machine enters the download data


write state, do not turn OFF the power of the machine at this
moment.
11) Main unit side: Wait until "0FF" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD
COMPLETE!" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the
operation panel. When "0FF" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD
COMPLETE!" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201), download
is completed.
Turn OFF the power of the machine, and disconnect the USB
cable.
12) Terminate the integration maintenance program, and turn ON
the machine again.
Download is completed with the above procedures.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 2

4)

PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree on


the integration maintenance program.

5)

PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The


copier is not turned on." is displayed, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.

.c

* Inhibition during download (Important)

om

Note: When another machine is connected, connect the USB


cable again and select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu
bar of the integration maintenance program. Repeat the
above procedures from 5).

If download is failed, the next download may not be executed. Use


great care not to execute the following items during download.

py

Never turn off the machine.


Never disconnect the download cable (USB cable).

* If the above inhibition item occurs during


downloading, turn OFF/ON the power.
When "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed
for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel, execute the
download procedure again.

2)

If "d" is not displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not displayed


for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel, turn OFF the
power and press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key
(
) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201)
and turn ON the power. Check that "d" is displayed (or
"DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on
the operation panel, and execute the download procedure
again.

hr
an

co

1)

6)

PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/


IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If
trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected
and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5).

.te

If "d" is not still displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not still


displayed for the AR-M200/M201), replace the MCU with a new
one.

3. Version acquisition procedures


1)

Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).

2)

Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.

PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/


5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.

3)

Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel of the
main unit. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key
(
) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201)
together, and turn on the power simultaneously.)

AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 3

8)

Check that the following display is shown.

4)

PC side: Check that "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed in the integration maintenance program.

5)

PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The


copier is not turned on." is displayed on the lower side of the
display, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.

om

PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the


main tree items to develop its sub trees. Select "Get Version"
in the sub trees.

hr
an

co

py

.c

7)

With the above procedures, version acquisition is completed.

The display of "**.**" means its version is not downloaded. The


downloaded versions are displayed in a version number as
shown in "MCU Boot Version" and "MCU program Version".

6)

PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/


IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If
trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected
and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5).

.te

4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure

EEPROM data is acquired to the PC. Use this procedure as data


maintenance of EEPROM.
1)

Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).

2)

Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.


PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.

3)

Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel of the
main unit. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key
(
) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201)
together, and turn on the power simultaneously.)

AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 4

7)

PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" to


develop its sub trees, and select "Upload EEPROM Data
Area" in the sub trees.

5. Installing procedures
<USB integration maintenance program installation>
Driver installation is made on plug-and-play.
<Installation on Windows Vista>
1)

Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).
Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press
and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (
) (or
[ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together,
and turn on the power simultaneously.)
The [Found New Hardware] display is shown as below. Select
[Locate and install driver software (recommended)].

om

Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.

3)

PC side: Enter a desired file name, and select "Save."

co

py

.c

8)

2)

hr
an

Note: A message to confirm the administrator of the computer is


displayed. Press [Agree] button.
4)

PC side: When upload is completed, the complete message is


displayed.

.te

9)

The [Found New Hardware - DOWNLOAD] display is shown.


Click [I don't have the disc. Show me other options.].

With the above procedure, the EEPROM data acquisition is completed.


Data acquired by the EEPROM data acquisition procedure are
saved in a file with extension of .eep.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 5

When the following display is shown, select [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].

8)

The path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool


driver (Maintenance.inf) is displayed. Press [Next] button.

6)

The following display is shown.

9)

When the following display is shown, select [Install this driver


software anyway].

hr
an

co

py

.c

om

5)

10) When the following display is shown, close [Close] button to


complete installation.

Press [Browse] button, specify the folder which includes the


maintenance tool driver (Maintenance.inf), and press [OK] button.

.te

7)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 6

<Installation on Windows XP>


1)

5)

Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).

(Suppose that the driver is included in


C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)

Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press
and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (
) (or
[ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together,
and turn on the power simultaneously.)
2)

Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.

3)

The following display is shown.

Select the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver


(Mainte.inf) and press <OK> button.

Check the path to the folder which includes the maintenance


tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <Next> button.

Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool
driver (Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is
the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press
<Next> button to go to procedure 7).

hr
an

4)

co

py

6)

.c

om

Select [Install from a list or specific location] and press <Next>


button.

When the following display is shown, press [Continue Anyway]


button.

.te

7)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 7

8)

When the following display is shown, installation is completed.

5)

Select [Specify a location] and press <Next> button.

6)

Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver
(Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the
folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press
<Next> button to go to procedure 9).

.c

With the above procedures, installation (on Windows XP) of the


integration maintenance program is completed.
<Installation on Windows 2000>
Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).

py

1)

om

Press <Finish> button.

co

Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press
and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (
) (or
[ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together,
and turn on the power simultaneously.)
Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.

3)

Check that the Found New Hardware Wizard is displayed, and


press <Next> button.

hr
an

2)

Specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver


(Mainte.inf), and press <Open> button.

Select [Search for a suitable driver for my device] and press


<Next> button.

4)

.te

7)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 8

8)

Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <OK>
button.

<Installation on Windows Me>


1)

(Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in


C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)

Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode).
Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press
and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (
) (or
[ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together,
and turn on the power simultaneously.)

2)

Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.

3)

The following display is shown on the PC side.

Press <Next> button to start installation.

Select [Specify a location], specify the folder which includes


the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) as the search location,
and press <Next> button.

co

4)

py

9)

.c

om

Select [Specify the location of the driver], and press <Next>


button.

If the search location does not include the maintenance tool


driver (Mainte.inf), press <Browse> button to specify the folder
which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf).

hr
an

(Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in


C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)

10) When the following display is shown, installation is completed.

.te

Press <Finish> button.

11) Restart the PC.


With the above procedures, installation (on Windows 2000) of the
integration maintenance program is completed.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 9

5)

Select the folder which includes maintenance tool driver


(Mainte.inf), and press <OK> button.

7)

When the following display is shown, installation is completed.

.c

Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <Next>
button.

.te

Press <Finish> button.

hr
an

co

py

6)

om

(Suppose that the driver is included in


C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)

8)

Restart the PC.

With the above procedures, installation (on Windows ME) of the


integration maintenance program is completed.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 10

w
.te
.c

py

co

hr
an
om

Memo

w
.te
.c

py

co

hr
an
om

Memo

LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.

Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition

Lead-Free

5mm

Solder composition code

Sn-Ag-Cu

Sn-Ag-Bi
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu

Sn-Zn-Bi

om

Solder composition
code (Refer to the
table at the right.)

Sn-In-Ag-Bi

Sn-Cu-Ni

Sn-Ag-Sb

py

(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD


When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.

.c

Bi-Sn-Ag-P
Bi-Sn-Ag

Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.

(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

co

Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use
soldering iron is recommendable.

hr
an

Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220C, which is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is
inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed
the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering is
confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip after
completion of soldering work.

.te

If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT


(Danish)
ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.

.c

(Finnish)
VAROITUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.

om

(English)
Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions.

VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.

hr
an

(Swedish)

co

py

(French)
ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux
instructions du fabricant.

.te

(German)
Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)


"BATTERY DISPOSAL"
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.

"TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGES"


CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANSE)
QUI DOIT TRE TRAITE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.

om
.c
py
co

COPYRIGHT 2008 BY SHARP CORPORATION

.te

hr
an

All rights reserved.


Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Trademark acknowledgements

Microsoft, Windows, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000,


Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and ReaderTM are
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and other countries.
IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2008 April Printed in Japan